Skip to main content Accessibility help
×
Hostname: page-component-848d4c4894-2xdlg Total loading time: 0 Render date: 2024-06-17T00:57:18.410Z Has data issue: false hasContentIssue false

References

Published online by Cambridge University Press:  20 July 2023

Linda R. Waugh
Affiliation:
University of Arizona
Monique Monville-Burston
Affiliation:
Cyprus University of Technology
John E. Joseph
Affiliation:
University of Edinburgh
Get access

Summary

Image of the first page of this content. For PDF version, please use the ‘Save PDF’ preceeding this image.'
Type
Chapter
Information
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Print publication year: 2023

Access options

Get access to the full version of this content by using one of the access options below. (Log in options will check for institutional or personal access. Content may require purchase if you do not have access.)

References

Aarsleff, H. 1982. From Locke to Saussure: Essays on the Study of Language in Intellectual History. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press.Google Scholar
Abbo of Fleury. [late 10th c.] 1982. Quaestiones grammaticales. In Guerreau-Jalabert, A.(ed./trans.). Paris: Société d’Édition Les Belles Lettres.Google Scholar
Abel-Rémusat, J.-P. 1822/1987. Élémens de la grammaire chinoise. Paris: Imprimerie royale. 1987: repr.: Editions Ala Productions.Google Scholar
Abramson, S. 1975. Šĕloša sĕfarim šel R. Yĕhuda ben Bil‘am. Jerusalem: Kiryat sefer.Google Scholar
Ackrill, J. L. 1979. Aristotle’sCategories andDe Interpretatione. [corr., repr.] Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Acton, H. B. 1959. The philosophy of language in revolutionary France. Proceedings of the British Academy 45: 199219.Google Scholar
Adams, M. M. 1987. William Ockham. South Bend, IN: University of Notre Dame Press.Google Scholar
Adamson, B. 2004. China’s English: A History of English in Chinese Education. Hong Kong University Press.Google Scholar
Adelung, J. C. & Vater, J. S. 1732–1817/1970. Mithridates oder allgemeine Sprachenkunde mit dem Vater Unser als Sprachprobe in bey nahe fünfhundert Sprachen und Mundarten. 4 vols. Berlin: Vossische Buchhandlung. 1970: repr. of 1806–17 edn.: Hildesheim: Olms.Google Scholar
Aelfric, Abbot of Eynsham. [10th c.]/1922. The Old English Version of the Heptateuch, Aelfric’s Treatise on the Old and New Testament and his Preface to Genesis. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Agesthialingom, S. & Kumaraswami Raja, N. (eds.). 1978. Studies in Early Dravidian Grammars. Annamalai University.Google Scholar
Agha, A. 1993. Grammatical and indexical convention in honorific discourse. Jrnl. of Linguistic Anthropology 3: 131–63.Google Scholar
Ahearn, L. 2011. Living Language: An Introduction to Linguistic Anthropology, vol. ii. Malden, MA: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar
Ahlqvist, A. 1980. Les débuts de l’étude du langage en Irlande. In Koerner, E. F. K. (ed.), Progress in Linguistic Historiography, pp. 3544. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Ahn, F. 1867. A New Practical and Easy Method of Learning the German Language (1st Amer. edn., fr. 8th London edn.). NY: D. Appleton.Google Scholar
Ahrens, H. L. 1839–43. De Graecae linguae dialectis, 2 vols. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.Google Scholar
Aitareya-Āraṇyaka. [c. 800–500 bce]1909: Keith, A. B. (ed./trans.). London: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Aitchison, J. 2003/2012. Words in the Mind: An Introduction to the Mental Lexicon, 1st/4th edns. Oxford: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar
Ajdukiewicz, K. 1935/1967. Die syntaktische Konnexität. Studia Philosophica 1: 127. 1967: Syntactic connexion. In S. McCall (ed.), Polish Logic 1920–1939, pp. 207–31. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Åkesson, J. 2001. Arabic Morphology and Phonology Based on the Marāḥ al-arwāḥ by Aḥmad B., ‘Aı̄ B. Mas’ūd, pres. w. an intro., Arabic edn., Engl. trans. and comm. Leiden: E. J. Brill.Google Scholar
Albert, M. & Obler, L. 1978. The Bilingual Brain. NY: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Albrecht, J. 1994. Neolinguistic school in Italy. In Asher, & Simpson, (eds.), pp. 2774–7.Google Scholar
Alcalá, P. de. 1505/1971. Arte para ligera mente saber la lengua arauiga. Granada. 1971: in P. de Lagarde (ed.), Petri Hispani De lingua arabica libri duo. Göttingen: A. Hoyer; repr. Osnabück: O. Zeller.Google Scholar
Alderson, C. & Wall, D. 1993. Does washback exist? Applied Linguistics 14: 115–29.Google Scholar
Aldhelm. [7th–8th c.]1985. M. Lapidge & J. Rosier (trans.), The Poetic Works. Woodbridge: D. S. Brewer.Google Scholar
Algra, K., Barnes, J., Mansfeld, J., & Schofield, M. (eds.). 1999. The Cambridge History of Hellenistic Philosophy. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Alibali, M. W. & Goldin-Meadow, S. 1993. Gesture–speech mismatch and mechanisms of learning: What the hands reveal about a child’s state of mind. Cognitive Psychology 25: 468523.Google Scholar
Allan, K. 1980. Nouns and countability. Language 56: 541–67.Google Scholar
Allan, K. 1986/1991. Linguistic Meaning. 2 vols. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul. 1991: repr. Beijing: World Publishing Corporation.Google Scholar
Allan, K. 2001. Natural Language Semantics. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Allan, K. 2004. Aristotle’s footprints in the linguist’s garden. Language Sciences 26: 317–42.CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Allan, K. 2006a. Dictionaries and encyclopedias (relationship). In Brown, (ed.), vol. iii, pp. 573–77.Google Scholar
Allan, K. 2006b. Selectional restrictions. In Brown, (ed.), vol. xi, pp. 118–19.Google Scholar
Allan, K. 2007. The pragmatics of connotation. Jrnl. of Pragmatics 39: 1047–57.Google Scholar
Allan, K. (ed.). 2009. Concise Encyclopaedia of Semantics. Oxford: Elsevier.Google Scholar
Allan, K. 2010. The Western Classical Tradition in Linguistics, 2nd exp. edn. London: Equinox.Google Scholar
Allan, K. & Burridge, K. 1991. Euphemism and Dysphemism: Language Used as Shield and Weapon. NY: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Allan, K. & Burridge, K. 2006. Forbidden Words: Taboo and the Censoring of Language. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Allan, K. & Jaszczolt, K. M. (eds.). 2012. The Cambridge Handbook of Pragmatics. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Allen, J. & Seidenberg, M. S. 1999. The emergence of grammaticality in connectionist networks. In MacWhinney, (ed.), pp. 115–51.Google Scholar
Allen, J. P. & Corder, S. P. (eds.). 1973–5. The Edinburgh Course in Applied Linguistics, vols. iiii. London: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Allen, J. P. & Corder, S. P. 1975. Editors’ preface. In Allen, & Corder, (eds.), vol. ii: Papers in Applied Linguistics, pp. xixii.Google Scholar
Allen, W. S. 1973. Accent and Rhythm. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Allen, W. S. 1987. Vox Graeca, 3rd edn. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Allony, N. 1969. Ha-’Egron, Kitāb uṣul al-ši‘r al-‘ibrāni, crit. edn. w. intro. and comm. Jerusalem: ha-Aḳademyah la-lashon ha-‘Ivrit.Google Scholar
Al-Nassir, A. A. 1993. Sibawayh the Phonologist: A Critical Study of the Phonetic and Phonological Theory of Sibawayh as Presented in his Treatise Al Kitāb. London: Kegan Paul International.Google Scholar
Althusser, L. 1974. Éléments d’auto-critique. Paris: Hachette.Google Scholar
Althusser, L., Balibar, É., Establet, R., Macherey, P., & Rancière, J. 1965. Lire le Capital. Paris: Maspero.Google Scholar
Amacker, R. 2011. See Saussure 2011.Google Scholar
Amacker, R. & Bouquet, S. 1990. Correspondence Bally–Meillet (1906–1932). Cahiers Ferdinand de Saussure 43: 9517.Google Scholar
Amacker, R., Forel, C., & Fryba, A. 1997. Les Cahiers Ferdinand de Saussure des origines à nos jours. Cahiers Ferdinand de Saussure 50: 341–54.Google Scholar
American Heritage Dictionary of the English language. See Morris, W. compiler.Google Scholar
Amirova, T. A., Olchovikov, B. A., & Rozdestvenskij, Ju. V. 1980. Abriß der Geschichte der Linguistik. Leipzig: Bibliographisches Institut.Google Scholar
Amsler, M. 1989. Etymology and Grammatical Discourse in Late Antiquity and the Early Middle Ages. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Amsler, M. 2006. Linguistic theory in the later Middle Ages. In Brown, (ed.), vol. vii, pp. 218–22.Google Scholar
Amsler, M. 2011. Affective Literacies: Writing and Multilingualism in the Late Middle Ages. Turnhout: Brepols.Google Scholar
Amsterdamska, O. 1987. Schools of Thought: The Development of Linguistics from Bopp to Saussure. Dordrecht: D. Reidel.CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Anderson, B. 1983. Imagined Communities: Reflections on the Origin and Spread of Nationalism. NY: Schocken Books.Google Scholar
Anderson, J. M. 1971. A Grammar of Case: Towards a Localistic Theory. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Anderson, J. R. 1982. Acquisition of cognitive skill. Psychological Review 89: 369406.Google Scholar
Anderson, L. B. 1982. The ‘perfect’ as a universal and as a language-particular category. In Hopper, P. (ed.), Tense-Aspect: Between Semantics & Pragmatics, pp. 227–64. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Anderson, S. R. 1985. Phonology in the Twentieth Century: Theories of Rules and Theories of Representation. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Andrade, M. J. 1936. Some questions of fact and policy concerning phonemes. Language 12: 114.Google Scholar
Andresen, J. T. 1990. Linguistics in America 1769–1924: A Critical History. NY: Routledge.Google Scholar
Anon. [c. 3rd c. bce]1984. Er ya. 1984. Repr. Zhou Zumo, Er ya jiaojian. Jiangsu: Jiangsu jiaoyu chubanshe.Google Scholar
Anon. [1485]1491/1500. Exercitum puerorum grammaticale per dietas distributum [Children’s grammar exercises for daily use]. 1491/1500: Strassburg: Georg Husner.Google Scholar
Anscombre, J.-C. & Ducrot, O. 1983. L’Argumentation dans la langue. Brussels: Éditions Mardaga.Google Scholar
Anttila, R. (ed.) 1977. Analogy. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Anubhūtisvarūpa. [13th c. ce]1952. Acharya, N. R. (ed.), Sārasvata-Vyākaraṇa, 7th edn. Bombay: Nirnayasagara Press.Google Scholar
Āpiśali. [c. 5th c. bce]. Āpiśali-Śikṣā. 1967. Mimamsaka, Y. (ed.), Śikṣāsūtrāṇi, Āpis΄ali-Pāṇini-Candragomi-viracitāni. Ajmer: Bharatiya Prachyavidya Pratishthan.Google Scholar
Apresjan, J. D. 1974. Regular polysemy. Linguistics 142: 532.Google Scholar
Apresjan, J. D. 1992. Lexical Semantics. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma.Google Scholar
Arai, T. 2001. The replication of Chiba and Kajiyama’s mechanical models of the human vocal cavity. Jrnl. of the Phonetic Society of Japan 5: 31–8.Google Scholar
Archer, T. (1885). Basing, John. In Stephen, L. (ed.), Dictionary of National Biography, vol. iii, pp. 354–5. London: Smith, Elder & Co.Google Scholar
Argyle, M. 1988. Bodily Communication, 2nd edn. London: Methuen.Google Scholar
Ariel, M. 1988. Referring and accessibility. Jrnl. of Linguistics 24: 6587.Google Scholar
Ariel, M. 1990. Accessing Noun-Phrase Antecedents. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Aristotle. 1984. Complete Works. Barnes, J. (ed.). Princeton University Press.Google Scholar
Arnauld, A. & Lancelot, C. [1660]1997. Grammaire générale et raisonnée. Paris: Éditions Allia.Google Scholar
Arnauld, A. & Nicole, P. [1662]/1965/1996. 1965: Logique, ou l’art de penser. Clair, P. & Girbal, E. (eds.). [Repr. of 1683 edn. of 1662 orig.] Paris: Presses universitaires de France. 1996: Logic or the Art of Thinking. Containing, besides Common Rules, several New Observations Appropriate for Forming Judgment. J. V. Buroker (trans.). Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Arnim, H. F. A. von & Adler, M. 1923–4. Stoicorum veterum fragmenta [aka SVF]. 4 vols. Leipzig: B. G. Teubner.Google Scholar
Arnold, D. 2005. Buddhists, Brahmins, and Belief: Epistemology in South Asian Philosophy of Religion. NY: Columbia University Press.Google Scholar
Aronoff, M. 1976. Word Formation in Generative Grammar. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Aronoff, M. & Rees-Miller, J. (eds.). 2001. The Handbook of Linguistics. Malden, MA: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Arrivé, M. 1992. Linguistics and Psychoanalysis: Freud, Saussure, Hjelmslev, Lacan and Others. Amsterdam: Benjamins.Google Scholar
Arrivé, Michel. 1994. Langage et psychanalyse. Linguistique et inconscient. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France.Google Scholar
Ascoli, G. I. 1887. Sprachwissenschaftliche Briefe, trans. B. Güterbeck. Leipzig: S. Hirzel.Google Scholar
Ash, S. 2002. Social class. In Chambers, et al. (eds.), pp. 402–22.Google Scholar
Asher, N. & Lascarides, A. 2003. Logics of Conversation. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Asher, R. E. 2002. R. E. Asher. In Brown, & Law, (eds.), pp. 2842.Google Scholar
Asher, R. E. & Henderson, E. J. A. (eds.). 1981. Towards a History of Phonetics. Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar
Asher, R. E. & Simpson, J. (eds.). 1994. The Encyclopedia of Language and Linguistics. Oxford: PergamonGoogle Scholar
Ashworth, E. J. 1981. Do words signify ideas or things? The scholastic sources of Locke’s theory of language. Jrnl. of the History of Philosophy 19: 299326.Google Scholar
Ashworth, E. J. 1989. Locke on language. Canadian Jrnl. of Philosophy 14: 4573.Google Scholar
Asporius [6th–7th c. ce]1855/1961 Ars grammatica. In Keil, H. (ed.), 1855–80, Grammatici latini. Leipzig: Teubner. 1961: repr. vol. i. Hildesheim: G. Olms.Google Scholar
Aston, G. & Burnard, L. 1998. The BNC Handbook: Exploring the British National Corpus with SARA. Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar
Atal, B. S. & Hanauer, S. L. 1971. Speech analysis and synthesis by linear prediction of the speech wave. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 50: 637–55.Google Scholar
Atharva-Prātis΄ākhya. [c. 5 c. bce]1939. Kanta, Surya (ed./trans.). Lahore: Meherchand Lachhmandas.Google Scholar
Atherton, C. 2007. The Stoics on Ambiguity. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Atkins, B. T. S. 1996. Bilingual dictionaries: Past, present and future. In Gellerstam, M. et al. (eds.), Proceedings of the ’96 EURALEX Congress, pp. 515–90. Gothenburg University.Google Scholar
Atkins, B. T. S. & Rundell, M. 2008. The Oxford Guide to Practical Lexicography. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Atkinson, C. M. 2008. The Critical Nexus: Tone-System, Mode, and Notation in Early Medieval Music. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Augustine (of Hippo), St. [397–426 ce]1962. De doctrina Christiana. In Martin, J. (ed.), Corpus Christianorum Series Latina, vol. xxxii. Turnhout: Brepols.Google Scholar
Augustine (of Hippo), St. [c. 387]1975. De dialectica. Pinborg, J. (ed.). D. Jackson (trans., intro., notes). Dordrecht: D. Reidel.Google Scholar
Augustine (of Hippo), St. [397–400 ce]1981. Confessiones. In Verheijen, L. (ed.), Corpus Christianorum Series Latina, vol. xxvii. Turnhout: Brepols.Google Scholar
Auroux, S. 1979. La querelle des lois phonétiques. Linguisticae Investigationes 3: 127.Google Scholar
Auroux, S. 1984. Linguistique et anthropologie en France (1600–1900). In Rupp-Eisenreich, B. (ed.), Histoire de l’anthropologie (XVIe–XIXe siècles), pp. 291318. Paris: Klincksieck.Google Scholar
Auroux, S. 1987. Histoire des sciences et entropie des systèmes scientifiques: Les horizons de rétrospection. In Schmitter, P. (ed.), Geschichte der Sprachtheorie,vol. i: Zur Theorie und Methode der Geschichtschreibung der Linguistik: Analysen und Reflexionen, pp. 2042. Tübingen: Gunter Narr.Google Scholar
Auroux, S. 1990. Representation and the place of linguistic change before comparative grammar. In De, T. Mauro, & Formigari, L. (eds.), Leibniz, Humboldt, and the Origins of Comparativism, pp. 213–38. Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Auroux, S. 1994. La Révolution technologique de la grammatisation. Liège: Éditions Mardaga.Google Scholar
Auroux, S., Koerner, E. F. K., Niederehe, H.-J., & Vers, teegh, K. (eds.). 2000–1. History of the Language Sciences: An International Handbook on the Evolution of the Study of Language from the Beginnings to the Present / Geschichte der Sprachwissenschaften / Histoire des sciences du langage, vols. i–ii. NY: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Austin, J. [1962]/1969/1972 How to Do Things with Words. 1969: Oxford: Clarendon Press. 1972: J. O. Urmson & M. Sbisà (eds.), 2nd edn. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Authier-Revuz, J. 1982. Hétérogénéité montrée et hétérogénéité constitutive: Éléments pour une approche de l’autre dans le discours. DRLAV, Revue de linguistique 26: 91151.Google Scholar
Authier-Revuz, J. 1984. Hétérogénéité(s) énonciative(s). Langages 73: 98111.Google Scholar
Ax, W. 2000. Lexis und Logos: Studien zur antiken Grammatik und Rhetorik. Stuttgart: Franz Steiner Verlag.Google Scholar
Ayer, A. J. 1936. Language, Truth and Logic. London: Victor Gollancz.Google Scholar
Ayres, L. (ed.). 1995. The Passionate Intellect: Essays on the Transformation of Classical Traditions Presented to Professor I. G. Kidd. New Brunswick, NJ: Transaction Publishers.Google Scholar
az-Zag˘g˘āg˘ı̄. 1995. The Explanation of Linguistic Cause: Az-Zag˘g˘āg˘ı̄’s Theory of Grammar. K. Versteegh (trans. and comm.). Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Azouvi, F. (ed.). 1992. L’Institution de la raison. La révolution culturelle des idéologues. Paris: J. Vrin.Google Scholar
Azouvi, F. 1995. Maine de Biran: La science de l’homme. Paris: J. Vrin.Google Scholar
Baalbaki, R. 1983. The relation between naḥw and balāġa: A comparative study of the methods of Sı̄bawayhi and Ĝurĝānı̄. Zeitschrift für arabische Linguistik 11: 723.Google Scholar
Baalbaki, R. 1990. I‚rāb and binā ƒ from linguistic reality to grammatical theory. In Carter, M. G. & Versteegh, K. (eds.), Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar, vol. ii, pp. 1733. Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Bach, K. 1994. Conversational impliciture. Mind and Language 9: 124–62.Google Scholar
Bach, K. 2004. Minding the gap. In Bianchi, C. (ed.), The Semantics/Pragmatics Distinction, pp. 2743. Stanford, CA: Center for the Study of Language and Information.Google Scholar
Bach, E. & Harms, R. T. (eds.). 1968. Universals in Linguistic Theory. NY: Holt, Rinehart & Winston.Google Scholar
Bacher, W. 1896. Sepher haschoraschim, Wurzelwörterbuch der hebräischen Sparche von Abulwalîd Merwân Ibn Ğanâh (R. Jona) aus dem Arabischen in’s Hebräische übersetzt von Jehuda Ibn Tibbon. Berlin: H. Itzkowski.Google Scholar
Bacher, W. [1888]1968. Sepher Sikkaron. Grammatik der hebräischen Sprache, 2nd edn. Berlin: Selbstverlage des Vereins M’kize Nirdamim. 1968: repr. Jerusalem: s.e.Google Scholar
Bachman, L. F. & Palmer, A. S. 1996. Language Testing in Practice: Designing and Developing Useful Language Tests. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Backhouse, A.E. 1994. The Lexical Field of Taste: A Semantic Study of Japanese Taste Terms. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Bacon, F. [1605]1996. The Advancement of Learning. In Bacon, F., The Major Works, ed. w. intro. & notes by B. Vickers. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Bacon, R. 1902. Greek Grammar [in Latin and Greek]. Nolan, E. & Hirsch, S. (eds.). Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Baer, T., Gore, J. C, Boyce, S., & Nye, W. 1987. Application of MRI to the analysis of speech production. Magnetic Resonance Imaging 5: 17.Google Scholar
Baggioni, D. 1997. Langues et nations en Europe. Paris: Éditions Payot.Google Scholar
Bahl, L. R., Jelinek, F., & Mercer, R. L. 1983. A maximum likelihood approach to continuous speech recognition. IEEE Transactions on Pattern Analysis and Machine Intelligence PAMI-5 (2), pp. 179–90.Google Scholar
Bailey, B. 1997. Communication of respect in interethnic service encounters. Language in Society 26: 327–56.Google Scholar
Bailey, B. 2000. Communicative behavior and conflict between African-American customers and Korean immigrant retailers in Los Angeles. Discourse & Society 11: 87108.Google Scholar
Baker, T. 1699. Reflections upon Learning, Wherein is Shewn the Insufficiency Thereof, in its Several Particulars. London: A. Bosvile.Google Scholar
Bakker, E. J. (ed.). 2010. A Companion to the Ancient Greek Language. Oxford: J. Wiley & Sons.Google Scholar
Bakker, P. & Muysken, P. 1995. Mixed languages and language intertwining. In Arends, J. et al. (eds.), Pidgins and Creoles: An Introduction, pp. 4152. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Baldauf, R. B. 1994. [Unplanned] language policy and planning. Annual Review of Applied Linguistics 14: 82–9.Google Scholar
Baldi, P. (ed.). 1991. Patterns of Change, Change of Patterns: Linguistic Change and Reconstruction Methodology. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Bally, C. 1905. Précis de stylistique. Geneva: Eggiman.Google Scholar
Bally, C. 1909/1951. Traité de stylistique française. Heidelberg: Winter. 1951: Paris: Klincksieck.Google Scholar
Bally, C. 1913/1965. Le Langage et la vie. 1965: 3rd enlarg. edn. Geneva: Droz.Google Scholar
Bally, C. 1932/1944. Linguistique générale et linguistique française. Bern: A. Francke. 1944: Paris: Presses universitaires de France.Google Scholar
Bammesberger, A. 1989. The laryngeal theory and prehistoric Greek. In Vennemann, (ed.), pp. 3541.Google Scholar
Baquedano-Lopez, P. 1997. Creating social identities through Doctrina narratives. Issues in Applied Linguistics 8: 2745.Google Scholar
Baratin, M. & Desbordes, F. 1986. La ‘troisième partie’ de l’Ars grammatica. Historiographia Linguistica 13: 215–40.Google Scholar
Bar-Hillel, Y. 1953/1964. A quasi-arithmetical notation for syntactic description. Language 29: 4758. 1964: in Y. Bar-Hillel (ed.), Language and Information: Selected Essays on their Theory and Application, pp. 61–74. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.Google Scholar
Bar-Hillel, Y. 1954/1970. Indexical expressions. Mind 63: 359–79. 1970: repr. in Y. Bar-Hillel, Aspects of Language: Essays and Lectures on the Philosophy of Language, Linguistic Philosophy and Methodology of Linguistics, pp. 69–88. Amsterdam: Magnes Press.Google Scholar
Bar-Hillel, Y. 1962. Some recent results in theoretical linguistics. In Ernest, N. et al. (eds.), Logic, Methodology, and the Philosophy of Science, pp. 551–7. Stanford University Press.Google Scholar
Barik, H. C. & Swain, M. 1975. A longitudinal study of bilingual and cognitive development. Intl. Jrnl. of Psychology 11: 251–63.Google Scholar
Baron, N. 1981. Speech, Writing, Sign: A Functional View of Linguistic Representation. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press.Google Scholar
Baroni, M., Bernardini, S., Ferraresi, A., & Zanchetta, E. 2009. The wacky wide web: A collection of very large linguistically processed web-crawled corpora. Language Resources and Evaluation 43: 209–26.Google Scholar
Barsalou, L. W. 1992. Frames, concepts, and conceptual fields. In Lehrer, & Kittay, (eds.), pp. 2174.Google Scholar
Barsalou, L. W. 1993. Flexibility, structure, and linguistic vagary in concepts: Manifestations of a compositional system of perceptual symbols. In Collins, A. F. et al. (eds.), Theories of Memory, pp. 29101. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.Google Scholar
Barthes, R. 1957a. Mythologies. Paris: Éditions du Seuil.Google Scholar
Barthes, R. 1957b. Le mythe, aujourd’hui. In Barthes, 1957a, pp. 191247.Google Scholar
Barthes, R. 1964. Éléments de sémiologie. Communications 4: 91135.Google Scholar
Barthes, R. 1966/1996. Introduction à l’analyse structurale du récit. Communication 8: 127. 1996: English trans. in S. Onega & J. A. G. Landa (eds.), Narratology: An Introduction, pp. 45–60. New York: Longman.Google Scholar
Barthes, R. 1967/1983. Système de la mode. Paris: Éditions du Seuil. 1983: M. Ward & R. Howard (trans.), The Fashion System. NY: Hill & Wang.Google Scholar
Barthes, R. 1970/1974. S/Z. Paris: Éditions du Seuil. 1974: R. Miller (trans.), S/Z: An Essay. NY: Hill & Wang.Google Scholar
Barthes, R. 1971. Réponses. Tel Quel 47: 89107.Google Scholar
Barthes, R. 1978. Leçon. Paris: Éditions du Seuil.Google Scholar
Bartoli, M. 1945. Saggi de linguistica spaziale. Turin: Casa editrice libraria.Google Scholar
Barwise, J. & Cooper, R. 1981. Generalized quantifiers and natural language. Linguistics and Philosophy 4: 159219.Google Scholar
Basal, N. 1992. Torato ha-diqduqit šel Rabı̄ Yĕhudah Ḥayyūŷ. PhD Dissertation. Ramat-Gan: Bar-Ilan University.Google Scholar
Basal, N. 2001. Kitāb al-nutaf lĕ-rabı̄ Yĕhudah Ḥayyūg˘. University of Tel-Aviv.Google Scholar
Baskin, W. 2011. Introduction. In Saussure, F. de, Cours de linguistique générale, p. xlix. Meisel, P. & Saussy, E. (eds.). NY: Columbia University Press.Google Scholar
Basso, K. H. 1979. Portraits of ‘The Whiteman’: Linguistic Play and Cultural Symbols among the Western Apache. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Bastide, Roger. 1962. Sens et usage du terme “structure”. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Bates, E. & MacWhinney, B. (eds.). 1989. The Cross-Linguistic Study of Sentence Processing. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Bates, E., McNew, S., MacWhinney, B., Devescovi, A., & Smith, S. 1982. Functional constraints on sentence comprehension: A cross-linguistic study. Cognition 11: 245–99.Google Scholar
Bateson, G. 1972. Steps to an Ecology of Mind. NY: Ballantine Books.Google Scholar
Battig, W. F. & Montague, W. E. 1969. Category norms for verbal items in 56 categories. Jrnl. of Experimental Psychology Monograph 80: 146.Google Scholar
Baudouin de Courtenay, J. 1907. Zur Kritik der künstlichen Weltsprachen. Annalen der Naturphilosophie 6: 385433.Google Scholar
Baudouin de Courtenay, J. 1972. A Baudouin de Courtenay Anthology: The Beginnings of Structural Linguistics [writings, 1871–1932]. Stankiewicz, E. (ed./trans.). Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press.Google Scholar
Bauer, B. 1999. Archaic Syntax in Indo-European. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Bauer, G. 1972. Athanasius von Qūṣ, Qilādat at-taḥrı̄r fı̄‚ilm at-tafsı̄r: Eine koptische Grammatik in arabischer Sprache aus dem 13.14. Jahrhundert. Freiburg: K. Schwarz.Google Scholar
Bauer, O. 1907/2000. Die Nationalitätenfrage und die Sozialdemokratie. 2000: J. O’Donnell (trans.), The Question of Nationalities and Social Democracy. Minneapolis, MIN: University of Minnesota Press.Google Scholar
Bauman, R. 1975. Verbal art as performance. American Anthropologist 77: 290311.Google Scholar
Bauman, R. 1977. Verbal Art as Performance. Prospect Heights, IL: Waveland Press.Google Scholar
Bauman, R. 1986. Story, Performance, and Event: Contextual Studies of Oral Narrative. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Bauman, R. (ed.). 1992. Folklore, Cultural Performances, and Popular Entertainments: A Communications-Centered Handbook. Oxford University Press.CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Bauman, R. & Briggs, C. L. 1990. Poetics and performance as critical perspectives on language and social life. Annual Review of Anthropology 19: 5988.Google Scholar
Bauman, R. & Sherzer, J. (eds.). 1974/1989. Explorations in the Ethnography of Speaking. 1989: 2nd edn. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Baumgarten, M. 1997. Professoren und Universitäten im 19. Jahrhundert: Zur Sozialgeschichte deutscher Geistes- und Naturwissenschaftler. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.Google Scholar
Bayless, M. 1993. Beatus quid est and the study of grammar in late Anglo-Saxon England. In Law, (ed.), pp. 67110.Google Scholar
Bayley, R. 2002. The quantitative paradigm. In Chambers, et al. (eds), pp. 117–41.Google Scholar
Bayley, R. & Preston, D. R. (eds.). 1996. Second Language Acquisition and Linguistic Variation. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Bazell, C. E., Catford, J. C., Halliday, M. A. K., & Robins, R. H. (eds.). 1966. In Memory of J. R. Firth. London: Longmans.Google Scholar
Beattie, J. 1771. An Essay on the Nature and Immutability of Truth, in Opposition to Sophistry and Scepticism, 2nd edn., corr. & enlarg. Edinburgh: A. Kincaird & J. Bell.Google Scholar
Beattie, J. 1788. The Theory of Language. In Two Parts. Part I. Of the Origin and General Nature of Speech, Part II. Of Universal Grammar, new edn., enlarg. and corr. London: printed for A. Strahan; T. Cadell, in The Strand, and Edinburgh: W. Creech.Google Scholar
Beauvillain, C. & Grainger, J. 1987. Accessing interlexical homographs: Some limitations of a language-selective access. Jrnl. of Memory and Language 26: 658–72.Google Scholar
Beauzée, N. & Douchet, J.-P.-A. 1765. Langue. In Le Rond d’Alembert, J. & Diderot, D. (eds.), Encyclopédie, ou Dictionnaire raisonné des sciences, des arts et des métiers, vol. ix. Paris: Samuel Faulche & Compagnie, Libraires & Imprimeurs.Google Scholar
Bébian, R. A. A. 1817. Essai sur les sourds-muets et sur le langage naturel, ou introduction à une classification naturelle des idées avec leurs signes propres. Paris: E. Dentu.Google Scholar
Becher, J. J. 1661. Character, pro notitia linguarum universali. Frankfurt am Main: Johann Wilhelm Ammon.Google Scholar
Beck, C. 1657. The Universal Character. London: William Weekley.Google Scholar
Beck, D. & Melcˇuk, I. 2011. Morphological phrasemes and Totonacan verbal morphology. Linguistics 49: 175228.Google Scholar
Becker, D. 1984. Al-Risāla šel Yĕhuda Ibn Qurayš, crit. edn. University of Tel Aviv.Google Scholar
Becker, D. 1998. Arabic Sources of R. Jonah ibn Janāḥ’s Grammar. University of Tel Aviv.Google Scholar
Becker, K. F. 1842. Ausführliche deutsche Grammatik als Kommentar der Schulgrammatik, 2nd edn., vol. i. Frankfurt am Main: G. F. Kettembeil.Google Scholar
Beckman, M. E. & Edwards, J. 1990. Lengthenings and shortenings and the nature of prosodic constituency. In Kingston, & Beckman, (eds.), pp. 152200.Google Scholar
Beckman, M. E. & Edwards, J. 2000. Lexical frequency effects on young children’s imitative productions. In Broe, & Pierrehumbert, (eds.), pp. 208–18.Google Scholar
Beckman, M. E., Edwards, J., & Fletcher, J. 1992. Prosodic structure and tempo in a sonority model of articulatory dynamics. In Docherty, & Ladd, (eds.), pp. 6886.Google Scholar
Bede, . 1975. Jones, C. W. et al. (eds.), Opera didascalia (Educational Works). Turnhout: Brepols.Google Scholar
Behler, C. 1989. Humboldts “radikale Reflexion über die Sprache” im Lichte der Foucaultschen Diskursanalyse. Deutsche Vierteljahrsschrift 63: 124.Google Scholar
Beilin, H. 1992. Piaget’s enduring contribution to developmental psychology. Developmental Psychology 28: 191204.Google Scholar
Beilin, H. & Pufall, P. 1992. Piaget’s Theory: Prospects and Possibilities. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.Google Scholar
Béjoint, H. 1979. The use of informants in dictionary-making. In Hartmann, (ed.), pp. 25–9.Google Scholar
Béjoint, H. 2004. Modern Lexicography: An Introduction. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Béjoint, H. 2007. Informatique et lexicographie de corpus: Les nouveaux dictionnaires. Revue française de linguistique appliquée 12: 723.Google Scholar
Bell, A. M. 1867. Visible Speech: The Science of Universal Alphabetics; or Self-Interpreting Physiological Letters, for the Writing of All Languages in One Alphabet. NY: Simpkin, Marshall & Co.Google Scholar
Bell, L. 1976. Interpreters and Egyptianized Nubians in Ancient Egyptian foreign policy: Aspects of the history of Egypt and Nubia. PhD dissertation. University of Pennsylvania.Google Scholar
Bendix, E. H. 1966. Componential Analysis of General Vocabulary: The Semantic Structure of a Set of Verbs in English, Hindi, and Japanese. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press.Google Scholar
Bendor-Samuel, J. 2002. John Bendor-Samuel. In Brown, & Law, (eds.), pp. 4352.Google Scholar
Benfey, T. 1839–42. Griechische Grammatik I: Griechisches Wurzellexicon. Berlin: D. Reimer.Google Scholar
Benfey, T. 1869. Geschichte der Sprachwissenschaft und orientalischen Philologie in Deutschland seit dem Anfang des 19. Jahrhunderts mit einem Rückblick auf die früheren Zeiten. Munich: J. F. Cotta.Google Scholar
Benson, E. J. 2001. The neglected history of codeswitching research in the United States. Language and Communication 21: 2336.Google Scholar
Benson, M. 1989. The structure of the collocational dictionary. Intl. Jrnl. of Lexicography 2: 114.Google Scholar
Benson, M., Benson, E., & Ilson, R. F. [1986, 1997]2010. The BBI Combinatory Dictionary of English, 3rd edn., exp. and rev. Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Bentley, J. R. 2001. The origin of the Man’yŎgana. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 64: 5973.Google Scholar
Benveniste, E. 1935. Origines de la formation des noms en indo-européen. Paris: Maisonneuve.Google Scholar
Benveniste, E. 1966–74/1971. Problèmes de linguistique générale, vols. i–ii. Paris: Gallimard. 1971: M. E. Meek (trans., vol. i), Problems in General Linguistics. Coral Gables, FL: University of Miami Press.Google Scholar
Benveniste, E. [1956]1971. The nature of pronouns. In Meek (trans.), pp. 218–20.Google Scholar
Benveniste, E. [1958]1971. On subjectivity in language. In Meek (trans.), pp. 223–30.Google Scholar
Benveniste, E. 1969. Sémiologie de la langue. Semiotica 1: 112.Google Scholar
Benveniste, E. 1969/1973. Le vocabulaire des institutions indo-européennes. Paris: Éditions de Minuit. 1973 (trans.): Indo-European Language and Society. London: Faber & Faber.Google Scholar
Benveniste, E. 1970/1974. L’appareil formel de l’énonciation. Langages 17: 1218. 1974: repr. in Benveniste, Problèmes de linguistique générale, vol. ii, 78–88. Paris: Gallimard.Google Scholar
Benveniste, E. 2012. Coquet, J-C. & Fenoglio, I. (eds.), Dernières leçons. Collège de France, 1968 et 1969. Paris: Gallimard.Google Scholar
Bergheaud, P. 1990. Entwicklung der sprachtheoretischen Reflexion in Großbritannien im 18. Jahrhundert. In Ricken, U. (ed.), Sprachtheorie und Weltanschauung in der europäischen Aufklärung. Zur Geschichte der Sprachtheorien des 18. Jahrhunderts und ihrer europäischen Rezeption nach der Französischen Revolution, pp. 3865. Berlin: Akademie-Verlag.Google Scholar
Bergounioux, G. 1980. Histoire sociale de la linguistique en France de 1789 à 1914. Thèse de 3ème cycle, Université de Paris VII.Google Scholar
Bergounioux, G. 1984. La science du langage en France de 1870 à 1885: Du marché civil au marché étatique. Langue française 63: 741.Google Scholar
Bergounioux, G. 2002. La sélection des langues: Darwinisme et linguistique. Langages 146: 719.Google Scholar
Bergsland, K. & Vogt, H. 1962. On the validity of glottochronology. Current Anthropology 3: 115–53.Google Scholar
Berkeley, G. [1710]1937. The Principles of Human Understanding. Jessop, T. E. (ed.). London: A. Brown & Sons.Google Scholar
Berko, J. 1958. The child’s learning of English morphology. Word 14: 150–77.Google Scholar
Berlin, B. & Kay, P. 1969. Basic Color Terms: Their Universality and Evolution. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Berlitz, M. D. 1889. Methode Berlitz für den Unterricht in den neueren Sprachen. NY: Berlitz.Google Scholar
Bernardin de Saint-Pierre, J.- H. 1830–1. Oeuvres complètes de Jacques-Henri-Bernardin de Saint-Pierre. L. Aimé-Martin (ed.). Paris: Lequien fils.Google Scholar
Bernards, M. 1997. Changing Traditions: Al-Mubarrad’s Refutation of Sı̄bawayh and the Subsequent Reception of the Kitāb. Leiden: E. J. Brill.Google Scholar
Bernhardi, A. F. 1801–3. Sprachlehre, 2nd edn. Berlin: Duncker & Humblot.Google Scholar
Berns, M., de Bot, K., & Hasenbrink, U. 2006. English, Media and Youth in Europe. NY: Kluwer.Google Scholar
Bernstein, B. 1960. Language and social class: A research note. The British Jrnl. of Sociology 11: 271–6.Google Scholar
Bernstein, B. 1961a. Social structure, language and learning. Educational Research 3: 163–76.Google Scholar
Bernstein, B. 1961b. Social class and linguistic development: A theory of social learning. In Halsey, A. H. et al. (eds.), Education, Economy and Society: A Reader in the Sociology of Education, pp. 288314. NY: The Free Press of Glencoe.Google Scholar
Bernstein, B. 1961c. Aspects of language and learning in the genesis of the social process. Jrnl. of Child Psychology and Psychiatry 1: 313–24.Google Scholar
Bernstein, B. 1962. Social class, linguistic codes and grammatical elements. Language and Speech 5: 221–40.Google Scholar
Bernstein, B. 1964. Elaborated and restricted codes: Their social origins and some consequences. American Anthropologist 66: 5569.Google Scholar
Berrettoni, P. 1989a. An idol of the school: The aspectual theory of the stoics. Rivista di Linguistica 1: 3368.Google Scholar
Berrettoni, P. 1989b. Further remarks on the stoic theory of tenses. Rivista di Linguistica 1: 251–75.Google Scholar
Bever, T. G. 1970. The cognitive basis for linguistic structures. In Hayes, J. (ed.), Cognition and the Development of Language, pp. 279362. NY: J. Wiley & Sons.Google Scholar
Bever, T. G. & Mehler, J. 1967. The coding hypothesis and short-term memory. AF Technical Report. Cambridge, MA: Harvard Center for Cognitive Studies.Google Scholar
Bhartr̥hari, . [c. 5th c. ce]1977. Vākyapadı̄ya. Rau, W. (ed.) (Abhandlungen für die Kunde des Morgenlandes 42). Wiesbaden: Franz Steiner.Google Scholar
Bhatia, T. K. & Ritchie, W. C. 2004. The Handbook of Bilingualism. Malden, MA: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Bialystok, E. 2001. Bilingualism in Development: Language, Literacy and Cognition. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Bialystok, E. & Codd, J. 1997. Cardinal limits: Evidence from language awareness and bilingualism for developing concepts of number. Cognitive Development 12: 85106.Google Scholar
Bialystok, E., Craik, F. I. M., Klein, R., & Viswanathan, M. 2004. Bilingualism, aging and cognitive control: Evidence from the Simon task. Psychology of Aging 19: 290303.Google Scholar
Biard, J. 1989. Logique et théorie du signe au XVIe siècle. Paris: J. Vrin.Google Scholar
Bibbesworth, W. de. 1990. Le Tretiz. W. Rothwell (ed.). London: Anglo-NormanText Society.Google Scholar
Biber, D., Conrad, S., & Reppen, R. 1998. Corpus Linguistics: Investigating Language Structure and Use. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Biber, D. & Finegan, E. (eds.). 1989. Sociolinguistic Perspectives on Register. NY: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Biber, D., & Reppen, R. (eds.). 2015. The Cambridge Handbook of English Corpus Linguistics. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Bickerton, D. 1981. Roots of Language. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma.Google Scholar
Biesenthal, H. & Lebrecht, F. 1847. Rabbi Davidis Kimchi radiculum liber sive hebraeum bibliorum lexicon cum animadversionibus Eliae Levitae. Berlin: G. Bethge.Google Scholar
Bihari, K. M. [17th c. ce]1965. Pārası̄ka-Prakās΄a. Bhattacharya, V. B. (ed.). (Sarasvatı̄ Bhavana Granthamālā 95). Banaras: Varanaseya Samskrita Vishvavidyalaya.Google Scholar
Binder, J. R., Desai, R. H., Graves, W. W., & Conant, L. L. 2009. Where is the semantic system? A critical review and meta-analysis of 120 functional neuroimaging studies. Cerebral Cortex 19: 2767–96.Google Scholar
Bisang, W., Himmelmann, N. P., & Wiemer, B. (eds.). 2004. What Makes Grammaticalization? A Look from its Fringes and Components. NY: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Black, J. 1991. Sumerian Grammar in Babylonian Theory, 2nd edn. Rome: Editrice Pontificio Istituto Biblico.Google Scholar
Blackburn, C. S. & Young, S. 2000. A self-learning predictive model of articulator movements during speech production. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 107: 1659–70.Google Scholar
Blair, H. [1783]1965. Lectures on Rhetoric and Belles Lettres. Harding, H. F. (ed.). 2 vols. Carbondale, Il: Southern Illinois University Press.Google Scholar
Blank, D. 1982. Ancient Philosophy and Grammar: The Syntax of Apollonius Dyscolus. Chico, CA: Scholars Press.Google Scholar
Blank, D. 1994. Analogy, anomaly, and Apollonius. In Everson, (ed.), pp. 149–65.Google Scholar
Blank, D. & Atherton, C. 2003. The stoic contribution to traditional grammar. In Inwood, B. (ed.), The Cambridge Companion to the Stoics, pp. 310–27. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Blau, J. & Hopkins, S. 2000. Tirgume Miqra’ qĕdumin lĕ-‘arabit-ha-yĕhudit. Pĕ‘amim 83: 414.Google Scholar
Blau, J. & Hopkins, S. 2007. Niṣane paršanut ha-Miqra’ bĕ-‘aravit ha-yĕhudit ‘al semek glosar qadum lĕ-Sefer Tĕhillim. In Bar-Asher, M. et al. (eds.), A Word Fitly Spoken: Studies in Medieval Exegesis of the Hebrew Bible and the Qur’ān, pp. 235–84. Jerusalem: Yad Izhaq Ben-Zvi and Hebrew University of Jerusalem.Google Scholar
Bloch, B. 1947. Syntactic formulas for Japanese. Studies in Linguistics 5: 112.Google Scholar
Bloch, B. 1948. A set of postulates for phonemic analysis. Language 24: 346.Google Scholar
Bloch, B. 1941/1958. Phonemic overlapping. American Speech 16: 278–84. 1958: repr. in Joos (ed.), pp. 93–6.Google Scholar
Bloch, B. 1946/1958. Studies in Colloquial Japanese II. Syntax. Language 22: 200–48. 1958: repr. in Joos (ed.), pp. 154–85.Google Scholar
Bloch, M. 1975. Introduction. In Bloch, M. (ed.), Political Language and Oratory in Traditional Society, pp. 128. London: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Bloch, M. 1976. Review of R. Bauman and J. Sherzer (eds.), Explorations in the Ethnography of Speaking. Language in Society 5: 229–34.Google Scholar
Block, D. 2003. The Social Turn in Second Language Acquisition. Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar
Block, D. 2013. Issues in language and identity research in applied linguistics. Estudios de lingüística inglesa aplicada 13: 11–46.Google Scholar
Block, N. 1986. Advertisement for a semantics for psychology. In French, P. et al. (eds.), Studies in the Philosophy of Mind (Midwest Studies in Philosophy 10), pp. 615–78. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press.Google Scholar
Blom, J.-P. & Gumperz, J. J. 1972. Social meaning in linguistic structure: Code-switching in Norway. In Gumperz, & Hymes, (eds.), pp. 407–37.Google Scholar
Blommaert, J. & Verschueren, J. 1998. Debating Diversity: Analysing the Discourse of Tolerance. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Bloomfield, L. 1914/1983. An Introduction to the Study of Language. NY: Henry Holt & Company. 1983: repr. w. intro. by J. F. Kess. Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Bloomfield, L. 1917. Tagalog Texts with Grammatical Analysis (Studies in Language and Literature 3, nos. 24). University of Illinois.Google Scholar
Bloomfield, L. 1924. Review of Ferdinand de Saussure (1916), Cours de linguistique générale. The Modern Language Jrnl. 8: 317–19.Google Scholar
Bloomfield, L. 1925a/1970. Why a linguistic society? Language 1: 15. 1970: repr. in Hockett (ed.), pp. 109–12.Google Scholar
Bloomfield, L. 1925b. On the sound system of Central Algonquian. Language 1: 130–56.Google Scholar
Bloomfield, L. 1926/1957/1970. A set of postulates for the science of language. Language 2: 153–64. 1957: repr. in Joos (ed.), pp. 26–31. 1970: repr. in Hockett (ed.), pp. 128–38.Google Scholar
Bloomfield, L. 1928/1970. A note on sound change. Language 4: 99100. 1970: repr. in Hockett (ed.), pp. 212–13.Google Scholar
Bloomfield, L. 1933/1935/1970/1984. Language. New York: H. Holt & Co.; London: Allen & Unwin. 1984: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Bloomfield, L. 1939/1970. Menomini morphophonemics. In Études phonologiques dédiées à la mémoire de M. le Prince N. S. Trubetzkoy. Travaux du Cercle linguistique de Prague 8: 105–15. 1970: repr. in Hockett (ed.), pp. 351–62.Google Scholar
Bloomfield, L. 1942/1970. Outline Guide for the Practical Study of Foreign Languages. Baltimore, MD: Linguistic Society of America.Google Scholar
Bloomfield, L. 1946a/1970. Algonquian. In Osgood, C. & Hoijer, H. (eds.), Linguistic Structures of Native America (Viking Fund Publications in Anthropology 6), pp. 85129. 1970: repr. in Hockett (ed.), pp. 440–88.Google Scholar
Bloomfield, L. 1946b/1970. Twenty-one years of the Linguistic Society. Language 22: 13. 1970: repr. in Hockett (ed.), pp. 491–4.Google Scholar
Blundeville, T. 1599. The Art of Logicke. London: William Stansby; sold by Matthew Lownes.Google Scholar
Boas, F. 1889. On alternating sounds. American Anthropologist 2: 4753.Google Scholar
Boas, F. (ed.) 1911a–1941. Handbook of American Indian Languages. 4 parts. 1911a: Part 1 (Smithsonian Institution & Bureau of American Ethnology Bulletin 40) Washington, DC: Govt. Printing Office. 1922: Part 2: (Bureau of American Ethnology Bulletin 40, Part ii). Washington, DC: Govt. Printing Office. 1933–8: Part 3: NY: J. J. Augustin. 1941: Part 4: Tunica, by M. R. Haas. NY: J. J. Augustin.Google Scholar
Boas, F. 1911b/1975/1991. Introduction. In Boas, (ed.), pp. 183. 1975: repr. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press. 1991: Washington, DC: Govt. Printing Office, repr. w. J. W. Powell, Indian Linguistic Families of America North of Mexico. Lincoln, NE: University of Nebraska Press.Google Scholar
Bogatyrëv, P. [1937]1971. The Functions of Folk Costume in Moravian Slovakia. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Bohas, G. 2004. Sur l’hypothèse de la racine triconsonantique en syriaque. Langues et littératures du monde arabe 5: 135–58.Google Scholar
Bonnet, C. 1779–93. Œuvres d’histoire naturelle et de philosophie. Neuchâtel: S. Fauche.Google Scholar
Böhtlingk, O. V. 1840. Pâṇini’s acht Bücher grammatischer Regeln, 2 vols. Bonn: König Verlag.Google Scholar
Böhtlingk, O. V. 1851. Über die Sprache der Jakuten. St. Petersburg: Kaiserliche Akademie der Wissenschaften.Google Scholar
Böhtlingk, O. V. & Roth, R. 1855–75. Sanskrit-Wörterbuch. St. Petersburg: Kaiserliche Akademie der Wissenschaften.Google Scholar
Bolelli, T. 1979. La scuola linguistica sociologica francese. Studi e Saggi Linguistici 19: 126.Google Scholar
Bolinger, D. L. 1951. Intonation: Levels versus configurations. Word 7: 199210.Google Scholar
Bolinger, D. L. 1958. A theory of pitch accent in English. Word 14: 109–49.Google Scholar
Bolinger, D. 1965a. Forms of English: Accent, Morpheme, Order. Abe, I. & Kanekiyo, T. (eds.). Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Bolinger, D. L. 1965b. The atomization of meaning. Language 41: 555–73.Google Scholar
Bolinger, D. L. 1971. Introduction. In Di Pietro, R. J. (ed.), Language Structures in Contrast, pp. viiix. Rowley, MA: Newbury House.Google Scholar
Bolinger, D. 1976. Meaning and memory. Forum Linguisticum 1: 114.Google Scholar
Bolinger, D. 1989. Intonation and its Uses: Melody in Grammar and Discourse. Stanford University Press.Google Scholar
Bonfiglio, T. P. 2010. Mother Tongues and Nations: The Invention of the Native Speaker. NY: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Bonner, S. F. 1960. Anecdoton Parisinum. Hermes 88: 354–60.Google Scholar
Boogert, N. v.d. 1997. The Berber Literary Tradition of the Sous, with an Edition and Translation ofThe Ocean of Tears by Muhammad Awzal (d. 1749). Leiden: Nederlands Instituut voor het Nabije Oosten.Google Scholar
Bopadeva, . [13th c. ce]1902. Mugdhabodha-Vyākaraṇa, w. two comm. Vidyāsāgara, J. (ed.). Calcutta: Jı̄bānanda Vidyāsāgara.Google Scholar
Bopp, F. 1816/1820. Über das Conjugationssystem der Sanskritsprache in Vergleichung mit jenem der griechischen, lateinischen, persischen und germanischen Sprache, ed. Windischmann, K. J. H. Frankfurt am Main: Andreäischen. 1820: (rev., trans.) Analytical comparison of the Sanskrit, Greek, Latin, and Teutonic languages, shewing the original identity of their grammatical structure. Annals of Oriental Literature 1: 1–64. London: Longman, Hurst, Rees, Orne, & Brown.Google Scholar
Bopp, F. 1833/1849. Vergleichende Grammatik des Sanskrit, Zend, Griechischen, Lateinischen, Litthauischen, Gothischen und Deutschen, vol i. 1849: 2nd edn. Berlin: F. Dümmler.Google Scholar
Borghouts, J. 2000. Indigenous Egyptian grammar. In Auroux, et al. (eds.), vol. i, pp. 514.Google Scholar
Borsche, T. 1981. Sprachansichten: Der Begriff der menschlichen Rede in der Sprachphilosophie Wilhelm von Humboldts. Stuttgart: Klett-Cotta.Google Scholar
Borsche, T. 1990. Wilhelm von Humboldt. Munich: C. H. Beck.Google Scholar
Bosworth, J. 1823. The Elements of Anglo-Saxon Grammar: With Copious Notes, Illustrating the Structure of the Saxon and the Formation of the English Language. London: Harding, Mayor, Lepard.Google Scholar
Bottéro, F. 1996. Sémantisme et classification dans l’écriture chinoise. Paris: Collège de France, Institut des hautes études chinoises.Google Scholar
Bouissac, P. 2010. Saussure: A Guide for the Perplexed. London: Continuum.Google Scholar
Bouquet, S., Engler, R., & Weil, A. 2002. Écrits de linguistique générale. Paris: Gallimard.Google Scholar
Bourdieu, P. 1977. Outline of a Theory of Practice. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Bourdieu, P. 1979. La Distinction: Critique sociale du jugement. Paris: Éditions de Minuit.Google Scholar
Bourdieu, P. 1982. Ce que parler veut dire: L’économie des échanges linguistiques. Paris: Éditions Fayard.Google Scholar
Bourdieu, P. 1987. What makes a social class? On the theoretical and practical existence of groups. Berkeley Jrnl. of Sociology 32: 117.Google Scholar
Bourdin, D. 1994. Essai sur ‘L’essai sur l’origine des langues’ de Jean-Jacques Rousseau: Pour une étude pragmatique du texte. Geneva: Slatkine.Google Scholar
Bourhis, R. Y. & Sachdev, I. 1984. Vitality perception and language attitudes: Some Canadian data. Jrnl. of Language and Social Psychology 3: 79126.Google Scholar
Bouwman, D. 2005. Throwing stones at the moon: The role of Arabic in contemporary Mali. PhD dissertation. University of Leiden.Google Scholar
Brandist, C. 2003. The origins of Soviet sociolinguistics. Jrnl. of Sociolinguistics 7: 213–31.Google Scholar
Brandom, R. 1994. Making it Explicit. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Branner, D. 2000. The Suí-Táng tradition of Fa˘nqiè phonology. In Auroux, et al. (eds.), vol. i, pp. 3640.Google Scholar
Bransford, J. D., Barclay, J. R., & Franks, J. J. 1972. Sentence memory: A constructive versus interpretive approach. Cognitive Psychology 3: 193209.Google Scholar
Bransford, J. D. & Franks, J. J. 1971. The abstraction of linguistic ideas. Cognitive Psychology 2: 331–50.Google Scholar
Braune, W. [1880]2004. Gotische Grammatik, 20th edn. Heidermanns, F. (ed.). Tübingen: Max Niemeyer.Google Scholar
Bréal, M. 1866a–1874. Grammaire comparée des langues indo-européennes comprenant le sanscrit, le zend, l’arménien, le grec, le latin, le lithuanien, l’ancien slave, le gotique et l’allemand. Fren. trans. of Bopp 1849, 5 vols. Paris: Imprimerie impériale.Google Scholar
Bréal, M. 1866b/1995. De la forme et de la fonction des mots. Revue des cours littéraires de la France et de l’étranger 4: 6571. 1995: repr. in Desmet & Swiggers (eds.), pp. 89–96.Google Scholar
Bréal, M. 1868/1995. Les idées latentes du langage. Leçon faite au Collège de France pour la réouverture du cours de grammaire comparée le 7 décembre 1868. Paris: Hachette. 1995: repr. in Desmet & Swiggers (eds.), pp. 175–213.Google Scholar
Bréal, M. 1883/1995. Les lois intellectuelles du langage: fragment de sémantique. Annuaire de l’association pour l’encouragement des études grecques en France 17: 132–42. 1995: repr. in Desmet & Swiggers (eds.), pp. 271–82.Google Scholar
Bréal, M. 1884/1995. Comment les mots sont classés dans notre esprit. Revue politique et littéraire. Revue des cours littéraires, 3rd series, 8: 552–5. 1995: repr. in Desmet & Swiggers (eds.), pp. 2881–91.Google Scholar
Bréal, M. 1897/1924, 1900/1964. Essai de sémantique. Science des significations. Paris: Hachette. 1924: repr. Geneva: Slatkine. 1900: Semantics: Studies in the Science of Meaning. H. Cust (trans.). NY: Henry Holt & Co. 1964: w. a new intro. by J. Whatmough. NY: Dover.Google Scholar
Bréal, M. 1991. The Beginnings of Semantics: Essays, Lectures and Reviews. Wolf, G. (ed./trans.). Stanford University Press.Google Scholar
Breen, M. & Candlin, C. 1980. The essentials of a communicative curriculum in language teaching. Applied Linguistics 1: 89112.Google Scholar
Brend, R. M. & Pike, K. L. (eds.). 1977. The Summer Institute of Linguistics: Its Works and Contributions. Paris: Mouton.Google Scholar
Brenneis, D. L. & Myers, F. (eds.). 1984. Dangerous Words: Language and Politics in the Pacific. New York University Press.Google Scholar
Brentano, F. [1874]1973. A. C. Rancurello, D. B. Terrell, & L. L. McAlister (trans.), Psychology from an Empirical Standpoint. London: Routledge. [1874 orig. Leipzig: Duncker & Humblot].Google Scholar
Brenzinger, M. 1998. Endangered Languages in Africa. Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe Verlag.Google Scholar
Bresnan, J. W. (ed.). 1982. The Mental Representation of Grammatical Relations. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Bresnan, J. W. 2000. Explaining morphosyntactic competition. In Baltin, M. & Collins, C. (eds.), The Handbook of Contemporary Syntactic Theory, pp. 1144. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Bresnan, J. W. 2001. Lexical-Functional Syntax. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Briggs, C. L. 1986. Learning How to Ask: A Sociolinguistic Appraisal of the Role of the Interview in Social Science Research. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Briggs, C. L. (ed.). 1996. Disorderly Discourse: Narrative, Conflict, and Inequality. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Bright, W. 1960. Linguistic change in some Indian caste dialects. In Ferguson, C. A. & Gumperz, J. J. (eds.), Linguistic Diversity in South Asia: Studies in Regional, Social and Functional Variation = Intl. Jrnl. of American Linguistics 26: 1926.Google Scholar
Bright, W. (ed.). 1992. International Encyclopedia of Linguistics. NY: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Bright, W. & Ramanujan, A. K. [1962]1964. Sociolinguistic variation and linguistic change. In Lunt, H. (ed.), Proceedings of the Ninth International Congress of Linguists, pp. 1107–13. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Brinton, L. J. & Traugott, E. C. 2005. Lexicalization and Language Change. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Broca, P.P. 1861. Remarques sur le siège de la faculté de la parole articulée, suivies d’une conservation d’aphémie (perte de parole). Bulletin de la Société d’Anatomie 36: 330–57.Google Scholar
Broe, M. B. & Pierrehumbert, J. B. (eds.). 2000. Papers in Laboratory Phonology V: Acquisition and the Lexicon. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Brøndal, V. 1932. Morfologi og syntax. Copenhagen: Københavns Universitet.Google Scholar
Brough, J. [1953]1972. Some Indian theories of meaning. In Staal, J. F. (ed.), A Reader on the Sanskrit Grammarians, pp. 414–23. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Browman, C. P. & Goldstein, L. M. 1985. Dynamic modeling of phonetic structure. In Fromkin, V. A. (ed.), Phonetic Linguistics: Essays in Honor of Peter Ladefoged, pp. 3553. Orlando, FL: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Browman, C. P. & Goldstein, L. M. 1989. Articulatory gestures as phonological units. Phonology 6: 201–51.Google Scholar
Browman, C. P. & Goldstein, L.M. 1990. Tiers in articulatory phonology, with some implications for casual speech. In Kingston, & Beckman, (eds.), pp. 342–76.Google Scholar
Browman, C. P. & Goldstein, L. M. 1992a. Articulatory phonology: An overview. Phonetica 49: 155–80.Google Scholar
Browman, C. P. & Goldstein, L. M. 1992b. ‘Targetless’ schwa: An articulatory analysis. In Docherty, & Ladd, (eds.), pp. 2667.Google Scholar
Brown, K. (ed.). 2006. The Encyclopedia of Language and Linguistics, 2nd edn. Oxford: Elsevier.Google Scholar
Brown, K. & Law, V. (eds.). 2002. Linguistics in Britain: Personal Histories. Boston, MA: Philological Society.Google Scholar
Brown, P. & Levinson, S.C. 1978. Universals in language usage: Politeness phenomena. In Goody, E. N. (ed.), Questions and Politeness Strategies in Social Interaction, pp. 56310. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Brown, P. & Levinson, S. C. 1987. Politeness: Some Universals in Language Usage. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Brown, R. W. 1957. Linguistic determinism and the part of speech. Jrnl. of Abnormal and Social Psychology 55: 15.Google Scholar
Brown, R. W. 1973. A First Language: The Early Stages. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Brown, R. W. & Gilman, A. 1960/1972. The pronouns of power and solidarity. In Sebeok, (ed.), pp. 253–76. 1972: repr. in P. P. Giglioli (ed.), Language and Social Context, pp. 252–82. Harmondsworth: Penguin Books.Google Scholar
Brown Corpus. 1967. Computational Analysis of Present-Day American English. [Francis, W. N. & Kucˇera, H.]. Providence, RI: Brown University.Google Scholar
Brücke, E. W. 1856. Grundzüge der Physiologie und Systematik der Sprachlaute. Vienna: C. Gerold & Sohn.Google Scholar
Brugmann, K. 1876. Nasalis sonans in der indogermanischen Grundsprache. In Curtius, (ed.), vol. ix, pp. 285338. Repr. London: Forgotten Books.Google Scholar
Brugmann, K. 1878. Zur Geschichte der Nominal-suffixe -as-, -jas- und -vas-. Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung 24: 199.Google Scholar
Brugmann, K. 1900. Zu dem Vorwort zu Band 1 der Morphologischen Untersuchungen von Osthoff und Brugmann. Indogermanische Forschungen 11: 131–2.Google Scholar
Brugmann, K. & Delbrück, B. 1886–1900. Grundriss der vergleichenden Grammatik der indogermanischen Sprachen, 6 vols. Strassburg: K. J. Trübner.Google Scholar
Brugmann, K. & Leskien, A. 1907. Zur Kritik der künstlichen Weltsprachen. Strassburg: K. J. Trübner.Google Scholar
Brugmann, K. & Streitberg, W. (eds.). 1892–1925. Indogermanische Forschungen, vols. 1–43. Strassburg: K. J. Trübner.Google Scholar
Brugnoli, G. 1965. Donato e Girolamo. Vetera Christianorum 2: 139–49.Google Scholar
Brumfit, C. 1997. How applied linguistics is the same as any other science. Intl. Jrnl. of Applied Linguistics 7: 8694.Google Scholar
Brumfit, C. & Johnson, K. 1979. The Communicative Approach to Language Teaching. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Bruner, J. S., Goodnow, J. J., & Austin, G. A. 1956. A Study of Thinking. NY: J. Wiley & Sons.Google Scholar
Brunot, F. 1966. Histoire de la langue française, vol. i. Paris: Armand Colin.Google Scholar
Brunschwig, J. 2003. Stoic metaphysics. In Inwood, B. (ed.), The Cambridge Companion to the Stoics, pp. 206–32. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Brun-Trigaud, G. 1990. Le croissant: Le concept et le mot – Contribution à l’histoire de la dialectologie française au XIXème siècle. Université Lyon III: Centre d’études linguistiques Jacques Goudet.Google Scholar
Brutt-Griffler, J. 2002. World English: A Study of its Development. Bristol: Multilingual Matters.Google Scholar
Bucholtz, M. 1999. “Why be normal?” Language and identity practices in a community of nerd girls. Language in Society 28: 203–23.Google Scholar
Bucholtz, M. & Hall, K. 2004. Language and identity. In Duranti, A. (ed.), A Companion to Linguistic Anthropology, pp. 369–94. Malden, MA: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Bucholtz, M., Liang, A. C., & Sutton, L. A. (eds.). 1999. Reinventing Identities: The Gendered Self in Discourse. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Bühler, G. 1864. On the origin of the Sanskrit linguals. Madras Jrnl. of Literature and Science 1864: 116–36.Google Scholar
Bühler, K. 1934/1965. Sprachtheorie. Die Darstellungsfunktion der Sprache. Jena: Gustav Fischer. 1965: repr. Stuttgart: Gustav Fischer.Google Scholar
Bulwer, J. [1644]1974. Chirologia, or the Natural Language of the Hand. Cleary, J. W. (ed.). Carbondale, Il: Southern Illinois University Press.Google Scholar
Bunge, S., Kahn, I., Miller, E. K., & Wallis, J. D. 2003. Neural circuits subserving the retrieval and maintenance of abstract rules. Jrnl. of Neurophysiology 90: 3419–28.Google Scholar
Burckhardt, A. & Henne, H. (eds.). 1997. Germanistik als Kulturwissenschaft: Hermann Paul 150. Geburtstag und 100 Jahre Deutsches Wörterbuch. Braunschweig: Ars & Scientia.Google Scholar
Burgersdijck, F. 1647. Institutionum logicarum. Cambridge, ms.Google Scholar
Burgoon, J. K., Stern, L. A., & Dillman, L. 1995. Interpersonal Adaptation: Dyadic Interaction Patterns. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Burke, E. [1757]1812. Philosophical Enquiry into the Origin of our Ideas of the Sublime and Beautiful. London: F. C. & J. Rivington.Google Scholar
Burley, W. [1324]2000. On the Purity of the Art of Logic: The Shorter and the Longer Treatises. P. V. Spade (trans.). New Haven, CT: Yale University Press.Google Scholar
Burnett, J. see Monboddo.Google Scholar
Buschmann, E. & Humboldt, W.v. 2000. Wörterbuch der mexikanischen Sprache. Ringmacher, M. (ed.). Paderborn: Verlag F. Schöningh.Google Scholar
Busse, W. & Trabant, J. (eds.). 1986. Les Idéologues. Sémiotique, théorie et politiques linguistiques pendant la Révolution française. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Butler, C. 1989. Systemic models: Unity, diversity and change. Word 40: 135.Google Scholar
Butler, C. 2003. Structure and Function: A Guide to Three Major Structural-functional Theories. Part I: Approaches to the Simplex Clause. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Butler, C. 2006. Functionalist theories of language. In Brown, (ed.), pp. 696704.Google Scholar
Butterworth, B., Comrie, B., & Dahl, Ö. (eds). 1984. Explanations for Language Universals. Berlin: De Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Buyssens, É. 1943. Les Langages et le discours: Essai de linguistique fonctionnelle dans le cadre de la sémiologie. Brussels: Office de la Publicité.Google Scholar
Buyssens, É. 1949. Mise au point de quelques notions fondamentales de la phonologe. Cahiers Ferdinand de Saussure 8: 3760.Google Scholar
Buyssens, É. 1967. La Communication et l’articulation linguistique. Paris: Presses universitaires de France.Google Scholar
Bybee Hooper, J. 1981. The empirical determination of phonological representations. In Myers, T. et al. (eds.), The Cognitive Representation of Speech, pp. 347–57. NY: North-Holland.Google Scholar
Bybee, J. 1985. Morphology: A Study of the Relation between Meaning and Form. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Bybee, J. 2000. Lexicalization of sound change and alternating environments. In Broe, & Pierrehumbert, (eds.), pp. 250–68.Google Scholar
Bybee, J. 2001. Phonology and Language Use. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Bybee, J. 2006a. Frequency of Use and the Organization of Language. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Bybee, J. 2006b. Language change and universals. In Mairal, R. & Gil, J. (eds.), Linguistic Universals, pp. 179–94. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Bybee, J. & Dahl, Ö. 1989. The creation of tense and aspect systems in the languages of the world. Studies in Language 13: 51103.Google Scholar
Bybee, J. & Hopper, P. 2001. Frequency and the Emergence of Linguistic Structure. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Bybee, J., Perkins, R., & Pagulica, W. 1994. The Evolution of Grammar. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Bybee, J. & Thompson, S. 1997. Three frequency effects in syntax. Proceedings of the Twenty-Third Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society: General Session and Parasession on Pragmatics and Grammatical Structure, pp. 378–88. Berkeley Linguistics Society.Google Scholar
Byrne, J. 1884. General Principles of the Structure of Language. London: N. Trübner & Co.Google Scholar
Cabanis, P.-J.-G. 1805. Rapport du physique et du moral de l’homme. Paris: Crapart, Caillet et Ravier.Google Scholar
Calder, G. (ed.). 1917. Auraicept na n-Éces: The Scholar’s Primer. Edinburgh: John Grant.Google Scholar
Caldwell, R. 1856. A Comparative Grammar of the Dravidian or South Indian Family of Languages. University of Madras.Google Scholar
Calvet, L.-J. 1975. Pour et contre Saussure: vers une linguistique sociale. Paris: Éditions Payot.Google Scholar
Cameron, D. 1997. Performing gender identity: Young men’s talk and the construction of heterosexual masculinity. In Johnson, S. & Meinhof, U. H. (eds.), Language and Masculinity, pp. 47–64. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Campanella, T. 1638. Philosophiae Rationalis partes quinque, videlicet: Grammatica, Dialectica, Rhetorica, Poetica, Historiographia. Paris: Joannes du Bray.Google Scholar
Campbell, L. 1988. Review of J. H. Greenberg, Languages in the Americas. Language 64: 591615.Google Scholar
Campbell, L. (ed.). 2001. Grammaticalization: A Critical Assessment. Special issue of Linguistic Sciences 23(23).Google Scholar
Campbell, L. 2004. Historical Linguistics: An Introduction, 2nd edn. Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar
Campbell, L. & Poser, W. J. 2008. Language Classification: History and Method. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Campbell-Kelly, M., Aspray, W., Ensmenger, N., & Yost, J. R. (2013). Computer: A History of the Information Machine. NY: Westview Press.Google Scholar
Canale, M. & Swain, M. 1980. Theoretical bases of communicative approaches to second language teaching and testing. Applied Linguistics 1: 147.Google Scholar
Candragomin. [7th c. ce] 1953–61. Cāndra-Vyākaraṇa. Chatterji, K. C. (ed.), 2 vols. Pune: Deccan College.Google Scholar
Canger, U. 1969. Analysis in outline of Mam, a Mayan language. PhD dissertation, University of California, Berkeley.Google Scholar
Caplan, D. 2001. Neurolinguistics. In Aronoff, & Rees-Miller, (eds.), pp. 582607.Google Scholar
Cappelen, H. & LePore, E. 2005. Insensitive Semantics: A Defense of Semantic Minimalism and Speech Act Pluralism. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Capps, L. & Ochs, E. 1995. Constructing Panic: The Discourse of Agoraphobia. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Cardona, G. 1986. Phonology and phonetics in ancient Indian works: The case of voiced and voiceless elements. In Krishnamurti, B. et al. (eds.), South Asian Languages: Structure, Convergence, and Diglossia, pp. 6080. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass.Google Scholar
Cardona, G. 1997. Pāṇini: His Work and its Traditions, rev. & enlarg. edn., vol. i. New Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass.Google Scholar
Cardona, G. 2000. Pāṇini. In Auroux, et al. (eds.), vol. i, pp. 113–24.Google Scholar
Carel, M. & Ducrot, O. 1999. Le problème du paradoxe dans une sémantique argumentative. Langue française 123: 626.Google Scholar
Carey, W. 1806. Grammar of the Sungskrit Language, composed from the works of the most esteemed grammarians, to which are added examples for the exercise of the student, and a complete list of the dhatoos, or roots, 2 vols. Serampore: Mission Press.Google Scholar
Carlucci, A. 2013. Gramsci and Languages: Unification, Diversity, Hegemony. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar
Carnap, R. 1928. Der logische Aufbau der Welt. Berlin-Schlachtensee: Weltkreis Verlag.Google Scholar
Carnap, R. [1931]1959. The elimination of metaphysics through the logical analysis of language. In Ayer, A. J. (ed.), Logical Positivism, pp. 6081. NY: Macmillan.Google Scholar
Carnap, R. 1934/1937. Logische Syntax der Sprache. Vienna: Springer. 1937: A. Smeaton (trans.), The Logical Syntax of Language. London: Kegan Paul, Trench & Co.Google Scholar
Carnap, R. 1936–7. Testability and meaning. Philosophy of Science 3: 419–71; 4: 1–40.Google Scholar
Carnap, R. 1942. Introduction to Semantics. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Carnap, R. 1946. Modalities and quantification. Jrnl. of Symbolic Logic 11: 3364.Google Scholar
Carnap, R. 1947. Meaning and Necessity. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Carré, M. H. 1946. Realists and Nominalists. London: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Carroll, J. B. 1953. The Study of Language: A Survey of Linguistics and Related Disciplines in America. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Carston, R. 1988. Implicature, explicature, and truth-theoretic semantics. In Kempson, R. (ed.), Mental Representations: The Interface between Language and Reality, pp. 155–81. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Carston, R. 2002. Thoughts and Utterances: The Pragmatics of Explicit Communication. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Carter, M. G. 1981. Arab Linguistics: An Introductory Classical Text with Translation and Notes. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Carter, R. & Simpson, P. (eds.). 1989. Language, Discourse and Literature: An Introductory Reader in Stylistics. London: Unwin Hyman.Google Scholar
Casacchia, G. & Mariarosaria, G. 2012. Storia della linguistica cinese. Vicenza: Cafoscarina.Google Scholar
Cassiodorus, F. M. A. 1830. Clausula inedita operis de artibus ac disciplinis liberalium artium ex cod. Vaticano. In Maio, A. (ed.), Classicorum Auctorum 3. Rome: Vatican Press.Google Scholar
Cassiodorus, F. M. A. 1844–55. De orthographia. In Migne, J.-P. (ed.), Patrologia Latina, vol. lxx, cols. 1239–70B.Google Scholar
Cassiodorus, F. M. A. 1622/2004. Institutiones. Opera omnia ii, pp. 9311101. Orléans: Petrus & Jacobus Chouët. 2004: J. W. Halporn (trans.), M. Vessey (intro.), Institutions of Divine and Secular Learning and On the Soul. Liverpool University Press.Google Scholar
Cassirer, E. 1922. Das Erkenntnisproblem in der Philosophie und Wissenschaft der neueren Zeit, 3rd edn., 2 vols. Berlin: B. Cassirer.Google Scholar
Cassirer, E. 1923–9/1973. Philosophie der symbolischen Formen, 3 vols. Darmstadt: Wissenschaftliche Buchgesellschaft. 1973: Hamburg: B. Cassirer.Google Scholar
Castrén, M. A. 1844. De nominum declinatione in lingua syrjaena. Helsingfors: Litteris Frenckellianis.Google Scholar
Castrén, M. A. 1850. De affixis personalibus linguarum altaicarum. Helsingfors: Litteris Frenckellianis.Google Scholar
Caton, S. C. 1990. “Peaks of Yemen I summon”: Poetry as Cultural Practice in a North Yemeni Tribe. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Cavalli-Sforza, L. L. 2000. Genes, Peoples and Languages. London: Penguin Books.Google Scholar
Cedergren, H. & Sankoff, D. 1974. Variable rules: Performance as a statistical reflection of competence. Language 50: 333–55.Google Scholar
Chafe, W. 1976. Givenness, contrastiveness, definiteness, subject, topics and point of view. In Li, C. N. (ed.), Subject and Topic, pp. 2555. NY: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Chafe, W. 1980. The Pear Stories: Cognitive, Cultural and Linguistic Aspects of Narrative Production. Norwood, NJ: Ablex.Google Scholar
Chafe, W. 1998. Language and the flow of thought. In Tomasello, (ed.), pp. 93112.Google Scholar
Chamberlain, H. S. 1899. Grundlagen des neunzehnten Jahrhunderts. Munich: Bruckmann Verlag.Google Scholar
Chambers, J. K. 1992. Linguistic correlates of gender and sex. English Worldwide 13: 173218.Google Scholar
Chambers, J. K. 1995. Sociolinguistic Theory. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Chambers, J. K., Trudgill, P., & Schilling-Estes, N. (eds.). 2002. The Handbook of Language Variation and Change. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Champollion, J.-F. 1822. Lettre à Monsieur Dacier relative à l’alphabet des hiéroglyphes phonétiques. Paris: Firmin Didot.Google Scholar
Chāndogya-Upaniṣad. [c. 800–500 bce]1958: In Limaye, V. P. & Wadekar, R. D. (eds.), Aṣṭādas΄a-Upaniṣadaḥ [Eighteen Upaniṣads]. Pune: Vaidika Saṃs΄odhana Maṇḍala.Google Scholar
Chantraine, P. 1968. Dictionnaire étymologique de la langue grecque. Paris: Librairie Klincksieck.Google Scholar
Chao, Y.-R. 1934/1958. The non-uniqueness of phonemic solutions of phonetic systems. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, Academia Sinica 4(4): 363–97. 1958: repr. in Joos, (ed.), pp. 38–54.Google Scholar
Chao, Y.-R. 1971/1997. Making sense out of nonsense: The story of my friend, whose colorless green ideas sleep furiously (after Noam Chomsky). The Sesquipedalian 7(32) (June 12, 1997). www.linguistics.stanford.edu/Archives/Sesquipedalian/1996–97/msg00033.htmlGoogle Scholar
Chappell, H. 2006. From Eurocentrism to Sinocentrism: The case of disposal constructions in Sinitic languages. In Ameka, F. et al. (eds.) Catching Language: The Standing Challenge of Grammar Writing, pp. 441–86. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Chappell, H. & Peyraube, A. 2006. The analytic causatives of early modern Southern Min in diachronic perspective. In Dah-an Ho, H. et al. (eds.), Linguistic Studies in Chinese and Neighboring Languages, pp. 9731011. Taipei: Institute of Linguistics, Academia Sinica.Google Scholar
Chappell, H. & Peyraube, A. 2014. The history of Chinese grammars in Chinese and western scholarly traditions. Language and History 57: 113–42.Google Scholar
Chater, N., Clark, A. Goldsmith, J. A., & Perfors, A. 2015. Empiricism and Language Learnability. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Chaudenson, R. 2001. Creolization of Language and Culture. London and NY: Routledge.Google Scholar
Chen, K. 陈骙. [1170]1960. Wen ze文则. Beijing: Renmin wenxue chubanshe.Google Scholar
Chen, M. 1970. Vowel length variation as a function of the voicing of the consonant environment. Phonetica 22: 129–59.Google Scholar
Chen, P. 陈朋年 & Yong, Q. 邱永. [1008]1960. Guang yun. 1960: repr. Zhou Zumo, Guang yun jiaoben. Shanghai: Shangwu yinshuguan.Google Scholar
Chevalier, J.-C. 1976. Idéologues et le comparatisme historique. In Niederehe, H.-J. & Haarmann, H. (eds.), In memoriam Friedrich Diez. Akten des Kolloquiums zur Wissenschaftsgeschichte der Romanistik, pp. 175–95. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Chevalier, J.-C. 1986. Grammaire philosophique et enseignement des Écoles normales. In Busse, & Trabant, (eds.), pp. 207–18.Google Scholar
Chevalier, J.-C. 1997. Trubetzkoy, Jakobson et la France, 1919–1939. Cahiers de l’institut de linguistique et des sciences du langage 9: 3346.Google Scholar
Chevalier, J.-C., Désirat, C., & Hordé, T. 1976. Les Idéologues: Le sujet de l’histoire et l’étude des langues. Didactiques 12: 1532.Google Scholar
Chiba, T. & Kajiyama, M. 1941. The Vowel: Its Nature and Structure. Tokyo-Kaiseikan.Google Scholar
Chierchia, G. & McConnell-Ginet, S. 2000. Meaning and Grammar: An Introduction to Semantics, 2nd edn. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
CHILDES (Child Language Data Exchange System). 1984 (earlier transcripts 1960s). [B. MacWhinney & C. Snow]. Pittsburgh, PA: Carnegie Mellon University.Google Scholar
Chin, C. 2008. Grammar and Christianity in the Late Roman World.Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press.Google Scholar
Chiss, J.-L. 1978. Synchronie/diachronie: méthodologie et théorie en linguistique. In Normand, C. (ed.), Saussure et la linguistique pré-saussurienne [=Langages 49], pp. 91111.Google Scholar
Chiss, J.-L. & Puech, C. 1997. Fondations de la linguistique – Études d’histoire et d’épistémologie, 2nd edn. Louvain-la-Neuve: Éditions Duculot.Google Scholar
Chiss, J.-L. & Puech, C. 1999. Le langage et ses disciplines – XIXe–XXe siècles. Louvain-la-Neuve: Éditions Duculot.Google Scholar
Chomsky, N. 1951/1979. Morphophonemics of Modern Hebrew. MA thesis, University of Pennsylvania. 1979: NY: Taylor & Francis.Google Scholar
Chomsky, N. [1955]1975. The Logical Structure of Linguistic Theory. NY: Plenum.Google Scholar
Chomsky, N. 1957/2002. Syntactic Structures. The Hague: Mouton. 2002: 2nd edn. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Chomsky, N. 1959. Review of Verbal Behavior by B. F. Skinner. Language 35: 2658.Google Scholar
Chomsky, N. 1962. Explanatory models in linguistics. In Nagel, E. et al. (eds.), Logic, Methodology, and Philosophy of Science, pp. 528–50. Stanford University Press.Google Scholar
Chomsky, N. 1964. Current Issues in Linguistic Theory. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Chomsky, N. 1965. Aspects of the Theory of Syntax. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Chomsky, N. 1966. Cartesian Linguistics. NY: Harper & Row.Google Scholar
Chomsky, N. 1970. Remarks on nominalization. In Jacobs, R. & Rosenbaum, P. (eds.), Readings in English Transformational Grammar, pp. 184221. Waltham, MA: Ginn & Co.Google Scholar
Chomsky, N. 1973. Conditions on transformations. In Anderson, S. & Kiparsky, P. (eds.), A Festschrift for Morris Halle, pp. 232–86. NY: Holt, Rinehart, & Winston.Google Scholar
Chomsky, N. 1975. Reflections on Language. NY: Pantheon Books.Google Scholar
Chomsky, N. 1980. On binding. Linguistic Inquiry 11: 146.Google Scholar
Chomsky, N. 1981. Lectures on Government and Binding. Dordrecht: Foris.Google Scholar
Chomsky, N. 1982. The Generative Enterprise: A Discussion with Riny Huybregts and Henk van Riemsdijk. Dordrecht: Foris.Google Scholar
Chomsky, N. 1986a. Barriers. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Chomsky, N. 1986b. Knowledge of Language: Its Nature, Origin, and Use. NY: Praeger.Google Scholar
Chomsky, N. [1987]1992. On the nature, use and acquisition of language. In Pütz, M. (ed.), Thirty Years of Linguistic Evolution: Studies in Honor of René Dirven on the Occasion of his Sixtieth Birthday, pp. 329. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Chomsky, N. 1995. The Minimalist Program. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Chomsky, N. 2000. New Horizons in the Study of Language and Mind. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Chomsky, N. 2015. Some core contested concepts. Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 44: 91104.Google Scholar
Chomsky, N. & Halle, M. 1965. Some controversial questions in phonological theory. Jrnl. of Linguistics 1: 97138.Google Scholar
Chomsky, N. & Halle, M. 1968. The Sound Pattern of English. NY: Harper & Row.Google Scholar
Chouliaraki, L. & Fairclough, N. 1999. Discourse in Late Modernity: Rethinking Critical Discourse Analysis. Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar
Church, A. 1940. A formulation of the simple theory of types. Jrnl. of Symbolic Logic 5: 5668.Google Scholar
Church, A. 1949. Review of Alfred Jules Ayer, Language, Truth and Logic. Jrnl. of Symbolic Logic 14: 52–3.Google Scholar
Church, A. 1951a. A formulation of the logic of sense and denotation. In Henle, P. et al. (eds.), Structure, Method and Meaning. Essays in Honor of H. M. Sheffer, pp. 324. NY: Liberal Arts Press.Google Scholar
Church, A. 1951b. The need for abstract entities. American Academy of Arts and Sciences Proceedings 80: 100–13.Google Scholar
Ciccollela, F. 2008. Donati Graeci: Learning Greek in the Renaissance. Leiden: E. J. Brill.Google Scholar
Cigana, L. 2014. Langage et cognition entre Saussure et Hjelmslev. Cahiers Ferdinand de Saussure 67: 2146.Google Scholar
Civil, M. 1975. Lexicography. In Lieberman, S. (ed.), Sumerological Studies in Honor of Thorkild Jacobsen (Assyriological Studies 20), pp. 123–57. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Civil, M. 1994. Sumerian. In Lepschy, (ed.), vol. i, pp. 7687.Google Scholar
Civil, M., Green, M. W., & Lambert, W. G. 1979. Ea A = nâqu, Aa A = nâqu, with their Forerunners and Related Texts (Materials for the Sumerian Lexicon xiv). Rome: Pontificium Institutum Biblicum.Google Scholar
Civil, M., Güterbock, H. G., Hallo, W., Hoffner, H. A. Reiner, E. 1971. Izi = iåΩtu, Ká-gal = abullu, and Níg-ga = makk„ru (Materials for the Sumerian Lexicon xiii). Rome: Pontificium Institutum Biblicum.Google Scholar
Civil, M. & Kennedy, D. A. 1986. Middle Babylonian Grammatical Texts (Materials for the Sumerian Lexicon). Supplementary Series 1: 7291. Rome: Pontificium Institutum Biblicum.Google Scholar
Clackson, J. 2011. Classical Latin. In Clackson, J. (ed.), A Companion to the Latin Language, pp. 236–56. Oxford: J. Wiley & Sons.Google Scholar
Clark, A., Fox, C., & Lappin, S. (eds.). 2010. The Handbook of Computational Linguistics and Natural Language Processing. Oxford: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar
Clark, E. V. 1993. The Lexicon in Acquisition. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Clark, E. V. 2003. First Language Acquisition. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Clark, H. H. 1992. Arenas of Language Use. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Clark, H. H. 1996. Using Language. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Clark, H. H. & Haviland, S. E. 1977. Comprehension and the given-new contract. In Freedle, R. O. (ed.), Discourse Production and Comprehension, pp. 140. Norwood, NJ: Ablex.Google Scholar
Clements, G. N. 1985. The geometry of phonological features. Phonology Yearbook 2: 225–52.Google Scholar
Clements, G. N. & Hume, E. V. 1995. The internal organization of speech sounds. In Goldsmith, J. A. (ed.), Handbook of Phonological Theory, pp. 245306. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Clements, G. N. & Ridouane, R. 2006. Quantal phonetics and distinctive features: A review. Proceedings of ISCA Tutorial and Research Workshop on Experimental Linguistics, pp. 2830. Athens, Greece.Google Scholar
Clyne, M. 1997. Multilingualism. In Coulmas, (ed.), pp. 301–14.Google Scholar
Coates, J. & Cameron, D. (eds.). 1990. Women in their Speech Communities: New Perspectives on Language and Sex. NY: Longman.Google Scholar
Cobarrubias, J. 1983. Language planning: The state of the art. In Cobarrubias, J. & Fishman, J. A. (eds.), Progress in Language Planning: International Perspectives, pp. 326, NY: Mouton.Google Scholar
Cobley, P. (ed.) 2010. The Routledge Companion to Semiotics. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Cobley, P., Deely, J., Kull, K., & Petrilli, S. A. (eds.). 2011. Semiotics Continues to Astonish: Thomas A. Sebeok and the Doctrine of Signs. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Coblin, W. S. & Joseph, A. L. (trans.). 2001. Francisco Varo’s Grammar of the Mandarin Language (1703): An English Translation of ‘Arte de le lengua mandarina’. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
COBUILD. 2003. Collins COBUILD English Dictionary for Advanced Learners, 4th edn. London: HarperCollins.Google Scholar
Cohn, A. C. 1990. Phonetic and phonological rules of nasalization. PhD dissertation, University of California, Los Angeles. UCLA Working Papers in Phonetics 76.Google Scholar
Coker, C. H. 1976. A model of articulatory dynamics and control. Proceedings of the IEEE, 64: 452–60.Google Scholar
Coldewey, J. (ed.). 1993. Early English Drama. London: Garland.Google Scholar
Cole, P. (ed.). 1981. Radical Pragmatics. NY: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Colebrooke, H. T. 1805. A Grammar of the Sanscrı̆t Language, vol. i. Calcutta: Honorable Company’s Press.Google Scholar
Coleman, J. S. 2003. Discovering the acoustic correlates of phonological contrasts. Jrnl. of Phonetics 31: 351–72.Google Scholar
Coleman, J. S. & Pierrehumbert, J. B. 1997. Stochastic phonological grammars and acceptability. In Computational Phonology, pp. 4956. Somerset, NJ: Association for Computational Linguistics.Google Scholar
Colish, M. L. 1999. The Stoic Tradition from Antiquity to the Early Middle Ages, vol. i: Stoicism in Classical Latin Literature, 3rd edn. Leiden: E. J. Brill.Google Scholar
Collinge, N. E. 1963. The Greek use of the term ‘middle’ in linguistic analysis. Word 19: 232–41.Google Scholar
Collinge, N. E. 1985. The Laws of Indo-European. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Collinge, N. E. 1994. Further laws of Indo-European. In Winter, W. (ed.), On Languages and Language, pp. 2752. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Collinge, N. E. 1995. History of historical linguistics. In Koerner, & Asher, (eds.), pp. 203–12.Google Scholar
Collins, A. M. & Quillian, M. R. 1970. Does category size affect categorization time? Jrnl. of Verbal Learning and Verbal Behavior 9: 432–8.Google Scholar
Collins, B. & Mees, I. M. 1998. The Real Professor Higgins: The Life and Career of Daniel Jones. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Colombo Timelli, M. 1990. La traduction-remaniement de l’ Ars minor de Donat du manuscrit Paris BN n.a.f. 4690 – Introduction. Archives et Documents de la Société d’Histoire et d’Épistémologie des Sciences du Langage, 2nd series, 4: 126.Google Scholar
Comenius, J. A. 1668. Via Lucis. Amsterdam: Apud Cunradum.Google Scholar
Comenius, J. A. 1966/1989. Panglottia. In Ñervenka, J. & Mikovská, V. T. (eds.), De Rerum Humanarum Emendatione Consultatio Catholica, vol. ii, pp. 147204. Prague: ÑSAV. 1989: A. M. O. Dobbie (trans.), John Amos Comenius: Panglottia, Universal Language: Being Part Five of his Universal Deliberation on the Reform of Human Affairs. Shipston-on-Stour: Drinkwater.Google Scholar
Comrie, B. 1978. Ergativity. In Lehmann, W. P. (ed.), Typology Studies in the Phenomenology of Language, pp. 329–94. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press.Google Scholar
Comrie, B. 1981/1989. Language Universals and Linguistic Typology, 1st/2nd edns. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Comrie, B. 1998. The Indo-European linguistic family: Genetic and typological perspectives. In Giacalone-Ramat, & Ramat, (eds.), pp. 7497.Google Scholar
Comte, A. 1830. Cours de philosophie positive. Paris: Éditions Bachelier.Google Scholar
Comte, A. [1851–1954]1969. Système de politique positive. Traité de sociologie instituant la religion de l’humanité. Paris: Presses universitaires de France.Google Scholar
Condillac, E. B. de. [1746]1971. Essai sur l’origine des connoissances humaines. Amsterdam: Peter Mortier. 1971: T. Nugents (trans.), An Essay on the Origin of Human Understanding. Repr. Gainesville, FL: Scholars’ Facsimiles & Reprints.Google Scholar
Condillac, E. B. de. [1775]1986. Cours d’étude pour l’instruction du Prince de Parme: Grammaire. Ricken, U. (ed.). Stuttgart: Frommann-Holzboog.Google Scholar
Condillac, E. B. de. 1798 (An VI). La Langue des calculs,ouvrage posthume et élémentaire. Imprimé sur les manuscrits autographes de l’auteur. Paris: Charles Houel.Google Scholar
Condillac, E. B. de. 1947–51. Oeuvres philosophiques. G. Le Roy (ed.). 3 vols. Paris: Presses universitaires de France.Google Scholar
Condillac, E. B. de. 1982. Philosophical Writings of Etienne Bonnet, Abbé de Condillac. F. Philip (trans.), vol. i. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.Google Scholar
Connine, C. M., Titone, D., & Wang, J. 1993. Auditory word recognition: Extrinsic and intrinsic effects of word frequency. Jrnl. of Experimental Psychology: Learning, Memory and Cognition 19: 8194.Google Scholar
Cook, S. W., Mitchell, Z., & Goldin-Meadow, S. 2008. Gesture makes learning last. Cognition 106, 1047–58.Google Scholar
Cooley, J. W. & Tukey, J. W. 1965. An algorithm for the machine calculation of complex Fourier series. Mathematics of Computation 19: 297301.Google Scholar
Coope, U. 2005. Time for Aristotle: Physics IV.10–14. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Cooper, F. S., Delattre, P. C., Liberman, A. M., Borst, J. M., & Gerstman, L. J. 1952. Some experiments on the perception of synthetic speech sounds. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 24: 597606.Google Scholar
Cooper, R. L. 1989. Language Planning and Social Change. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Corder, S. P. 1967. The significance of learner’s [sic] errors. Intl. Review of Applied Linguistics 5: 161–70.Google Scholar
Corder, S. P. 1981. Error Analysis and Interlanguage. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Corriente, F. 1986. Métrica hebrea cuantitativa, métrica de la poesía estrófica andalusí y “arūd”. Sefarad 46: 123–32.Google Scholar
Coseriu, E. 1952/1973. Sistema, norma y habla. Revista de la Facultad de Humanidades y Ciencias 9: 113–81. 1973: repr. in Teoria del lenguaje y lingüística general. Cinco estudios, 3rd edn., pp. 115–234. Madrid: Gredos.Google Scholar
Coseriu, E. 1958/1973. Sincronía. diacronía e historia. El problema del cambio lingüístico. Montevideo: Universidad de la Répública. 1973: Madrid: Gredos.Google Scholar
Coseriu, E. 1967. Georg von der Gabelentz et la linguistique synchronique. In Juilland, A. (ed.), Linguistic Studies Presented to André Martinet on the Occasion of his 60th Birthday. Part One: General Linguistics (= Word 23), pp. 74100.Google Scholar
Coseriu, E. 1972. Über die Sprachtypologie Wilhelm von Humboldts. Ein Beitrag zur Kritik der sprachwissenschaftlichen Überlieferung. In Wais, K. et al. (eds.), Beiträge zur vergleichenden Literaturgeschichte, pp. 107–35. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer.Google Scholar
Cotter, C. 1993. Prosodic aspects of broadcast news register. In Proceedings of the 19th Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society 19, pp. 90100. Berkeley Linguistic Society.Google Scholar
Cotter, C. 2010. News Talk: Investigating the Language of Journalism. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Coughlan, P. & Duff, P. A. 1994. Same task, different activities: Analysis of an SLA task from an activity theory perspective. In Lantolf, J. & Appel, G. (eds.), Vygotskian Approaches to Second Language Research, pp. 173–93. Norwood, NJ: Ablex.Google Scholar
Coulmas, F. 1988a. What is a national language good for? In Coulmas, (ed.), pp. 124.Google Scholar
Coulmas, F. (ed.) 1988b. With Forked Tongues: What are National Languages Good for? Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma.Google Scholar
Coulmas, F. 1991. European integration and the idea of a national language. In Coulmas, F. (ed.), A Language Policy for the European Community, pp. 143. Berlin: Mouton De Gruyter.Google Scholar
Coulmas, F. 1992. Language and Economy. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Coulmas, F. 1996. The Blackwell Encyclopedia of Writing Systems. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Coulmas, F. (ed.). 1997. The Handbook of Sociolinguistics. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Coulmas, F. 2005/2013. Sociolinguistics: The Study of Speakers’ Choices. 1st/2nd edns. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Coulon, L. 1997. Véracité et rhétorique dans les autobiographies égyptiennes de la Première Période Intermédiaire. Bulletin de l’Institut Français d’Archéologie Orientale au Caire 97: 109–38.Google Scholar
Coulon, L. 1999. La rhétorique et ses fictions. Pouvoirs et duplicité du discours à travers la littérature égyptienne du Moyen et du Nouvel Empire. Bulletin de l’Institut Français d’Archéologie Orientale au Caire 99: 103–32.Google Scholar
Coulon, L. 2009–10. Célébrer l’élite, louer pharaon: éloquence et cérémonial de cour au Nouvel Empire. In Moreno García, J. C. (ed.), Élites et pouvoir en Égypte ancienne (Cahiers de Recherches de l’Institut de Papyrologie et d’Égyptologie de Lille 28), pp. 211–38. Villeneuve d’Ascq: Université Lille III.Google Scholar
Coulson, S. 2001. Semantic Leaps: Frame-Shifting and Conceptual Blending in Meaning Construction. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Coustenoble, H. & Armstrong, L. E. 1934. Studies in French Intonation. Cambridge: W. Heffer & Sons.Google Scholar
Couturat, L. & Leau, L. 1903. Histoire de la langue universelle. Paris: Hachette.Google Scholar
Covington, M. A. 1984. Syntactic Theory in the High Middle Ages: Modistic Models of Sentence Structure. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Cowie, A. P. 1979. The treatment of polysemy in the design of a learner’s dictionary. In Hartmann, (ed.), pp. 82–8.Google Scholar
Cowie, A. P. 1998a. Phraseological dictionaries: Some east-west comparisons. In Cowie, A. P. (ed.), Phraseology: Theory, Analysis, and Applications, pp. 209–28. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Cowie, A. P. 1998b. A. S. Hornby, 1898–1998: A centenary tribute. Intl. Jrnl. of Lexicography 11: 251–68.Google Scholar
Cowie, A. P. 1999. English Dictionaries for Foreign Learners: A History. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Cowie, F. 1999. What’s Within? Nativism Reconsidered. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Coyle, J. M., & Kaschak, M. P. 2012. Female fertility affects men’s linguistic choices. PLOS One 7(2): Article e27971. https://journals.plos.org/plosone/article?id=10.1371/journal.pone.0027971Google Scholar
Crain, S. 1991. Language acquisition in the absence of experience. Behavioral and Brain Sciences 14: 597612.Google Scholar
Cram, D. 1994. Universal language, specious arithmetic and the alphabet of simple notions. Beiträge zur Geschichte der Sprachwissenschaft 4: 121.Google Scholar
Cram, D. & Maat, J. 2001. George Dalgarno on Universal Language: An Edition and Translation of Ars Signorum (1661) Together with an Edition of his Unpublished Papers. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Cresswell, M. J. 1973. Logics and Languages. London: Methuen.Google Scholar
Cresswell, M. J. 1979. Review of Semantics by John Lyons. Linguistics and Philosophy 3: 289–95.Google Scholar
Cristofaro, S. 2003. Subordination. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Croce, B. [1909]1922. 1909: Orig. in Ital. 1922: Aesthetic as Science of Expression and General Linguistics. NY: Macmillan.Google Scholar
Croft, W. 1990/2003. Typology and Universals, 1st/2nd edns. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Croft, W. 1995. Modern syntactic typology. In Shibatani, & Bynon, (eds.), pp. 85144.Google Scholar
Croft, W. 2001. Radical Construction Grammar. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Crowley, T. 1989. The Politics of Discourse. London: Macmillan.Google Scholar
Cruse, D. A. 1973. Some thoughts on agentivity. Jrnl. of Linguistics 9: 1123.Google Scholar
Cruse, D. A. 1986. Lexical Semantics. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Cruse, D. A. 1990. Prototype theory and lexical semantics. In Tsohatzidis, S. L. (ed.), Meanings and Prototypes: Studies in Linguistic Categorization, pp. 382402. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Culioli, A. [1990]2000. Pour une linguistique de l’énonciation. Opérations et representations, vol. i. Paris: Éditions Ophrys.Google Scholar
Culioli, A. 1995. Cognition and Representation in Linguistic Theory. Texts selec., ed. and intro. by M. Liddle (trans. w. the assist. of J. T. Stonham). Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Culioli, A. 2000. Pour une linguistique de l’énonciation. Formalisation et opérations de repérages (temps, aspects), vol. ii. Paris: Éditions Ophrys.Google Scholar
Culioli, A. 2002. Pour une linguistique de l’énonciation. Domaine notionnel: notion et occurrences – Le quantitatif et le qualitatif – Exclamation et intensité, vol. iii. Paris: Éditions Ophrys.Google Scholar
Cummins, J. 2003. Bilingual education. In Bourne, J. & Reid, E. (eds.), World Yearbook of Education 2003, pp. 3–20. London: Kogan Page.Google Scholar
Cureton, W. (ed.). 1845/1985. The Antient Syriac Version of the Epistles of St. Ignatius to St. Polycarp, the Ephesians, and the Romans; together with Extracts from his Epistles collected from the Writings of Severus of Antioch, Timotheus of Alexandria, and others, with an English translation. 1985: repr. in Quarterly Review 77: 3969.Google Scholar
Curran, C. 1976. Counseling-Learning in Second Language. Apple River, IL: Apple River Press.Google Scholar
Curtius, G. 1845/1848. Die Sprachvergleichung in ihrem Verhältnis zur classischen Philologie. Dresden: Blochmann. 1848: 2nd edn. Berlin: Besser.Google Scholar
Curtius, G. (ed.). 1868–78. Studien zur griechischen und lateinischen Grammatik, vols. i–x; vols. ix–x: Curtius, G. & Brugmann, K. (eds.). Leipzig: S. Hirzel.Google Scholar
Curtius, G. 1885. Zur Kritik der neuesten Sprachforschung. Leipzig: S. Hirzel.Google Scholar
Cutting, J. E. & Rosner, B. S. 1974. Categories and boundaries in speech and music. Perception and Psychophysics 16: 564–70.Google Scholar
D’Agostino, F. 1991. The study of Sumerian grammar at Ebla, Part i. Acta Sumerologica Japonesa 13: 157–80.Google Scholar
Dahan, G., Rosier, I., & Valente, L. 1995. Le grec, l’hébreu et les vernaculaires. In Ebbesen, (ed.), pp. 265324.Google Scholar
Dahl, Ö. 2001. Grammaticalization and the life-cycles of constructions. RASK 14: 91133.Google Scholar
Dalgarno, G. 1661/1968. Ars Signorum, Vulgo Character Universalis et Lingua Philosophica. London: J. Hayes. 1968: Menston: Scolar Press.Google Scholar
Dalgarno, G. 1680. Didascalocophus, or the Deaf and Dumb Mans Tutor. Oxford: At the Theater.Google Scholar
Dammann, O. 1926. Verzeichnis der Schriften Friedrich Kluges 1879–1926. In Franz, W. (ed.), Festschrift Friedrich Kluge zum 70. Geburtstage am 21. Juni 1926, pp. 520. Tübingen: Englisches Seminar.Google Scholar
Danesi, M. 1985. Charles Fries and contrastive analysis. In Fries, P. H. (ed.), Toward an Understanding of Language: Charles Carpenter Fries in Perspective, pp. 277–95. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Danesi, M. 2006. Kinesics. In Brown, (ed.), pp. 207–13.Google Scholar
Daniels, P. T. 1996. Methods of decipherment. In Daniels, P. T. & Bright, W. (eds.), The World’s Writing Systems, pp. 139–59. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Daniels, P. T. 2012. The native Syriac linguistic tradition: Resources ancient and modern. Historiographia Linguistica 39: 327–40.Google Scholar
Daniels, P. T. 2013. The Arabic writing system. In Owens, J. (ed.), Oxford Handbook of Arabic Linguistics, pp. 412–32. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Darnell, J. 2004. The Enigmatic Netherworld Books of the Solar-Osirian Unity: Cryptographic Compositions in the Tombs of Tutankhamun, Ramesses VI and Ramesses IX (Orbis Biblicus et Orientalis 198). Fribourg: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Darnell, J. & Dobbs-Allsopp, C. 2005. Two early alphabetic inscriptions from the Wadi el-Hol: New evidence for the origin of the alphabet from the western desert of Egypt. Annual of the American Schools of Oriental Research 58: 63124.Google Scholar
Darnell, R. 1990. Edward Sapir: Linguist, Anthropologist, Humanist. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Darnell, R. 2000. And Along Came Boas: Continuity and Revolution in Americanist Anthropology. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Dauphin, C. (ed.) 2004. Musique et langage chez Rousseau. Oxford: Voltaire Foundation.Google Scholar
Davidson, D. 1967a. The logical form of action sentences. In Rescher, N. (ed.), The Logic of Decision and Action, pp. 8194. University of Pittsburgh Press.Google Scholar
Davidson, D. 1967b/1984. Truth and meaning. Synthese 17: 304–23. 1984: repr. in Davidson 1984: 17–36.Google Scholar
Davidson, D. 1973/1984. Radical interpretation. Dialectica 27: 313–28. 1984: repr. in Davidson 1984: 125–39.Google Scholar
Davidson, D. 1974/1984. On the very idea of a conceptual scheme. Proceedings of the American Philosophical Association 47: 520. 1984: repr. in Davidson 1984: 183–98.Google Scholar
Davidson, D. 1975/1984. Thought and talk. In Guttenplan, S. D. (ed.), Mind and Language, pp. 723. Oxford University Press. 1984: repr. in Davidson 1984: 155–70.Google Scholar
Davidson, D. 1984. Inquiries into Truth and Interpretation. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Davidson, T. 1874/1973. The Grammar of Dionysius Thrax. 1973: repr. fr. Jrnl. of Speculative Philosophy. St. Louis: The RP Studley Co.Google Scholar
Davies, A. 2003. The Native Speaker: Myth and Reality. Clevedon: Multilingual Matters.Google Scholar
Davies, A. 2007. Introduction to Applied Linguistics: From Theory to Practice, 2nd edn. Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar
Davies, A. & Elder, C. (eds.). 2004. The Handbook of Applied Linguistics. Malden, MA: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Davies, M. 2009. The 385+ million word corpus of contemporary American English (1990–2008+): design, architecture, and linguistic insights. Intl. Jrnl. of Corpus Linguistics 14: 159–90.Google Scholar
Daylight, R. 2011. What if Derrida was Wrong about Saussure? Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar
Débats. 1800–1. Séances des Écoles normales, recueillies par des sténographes, et revues par les professeurs,new edn., 3 vols. Paris: à l’imprimerie du Cercle-Social.Google Scholar
De Beaugrande, R. & Dressler, W. 1981. Introduction to Text Linguistics. London: Longman.Google Scholar
de Bot, K. 2015. A History of Applied Linguistics: From 1980 to the Present. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
de Bot, K., Lowie, W., & Verspoor, M. 2007. A dynamic view as a complementary perspective. Bilingualism, Language and Cognition 10: 515.Google Scholar
de Bot, K., Verspoor, M., & Lowie, W. 2005. Dynamic systems theory and applied linguistics: The ultimate ‘so what’? Intl. Jrnl. of Applied Linguistics 15: 16118.Google Scholar
De Brosses, C. [1765]1801. Traité de la formation méchanique des langues. Paris: Saillant, Vincent et Dessaing.Google Scholar
De Cenival, F. 1988. Le Mythe de l’oeil du soleil. Translittération et traduction avec commentaire philologique. Sommerhausen: Gisela Zauzich Verlag.Google Scholar
Dedo, H. H. & Dunker, E. 1967. Husson’s Theory: An experimental analysis of his research data and conclusions. Archives of Otolaryngology 85: 303–13.Google Scholar
Degérando, J. M. 1800a. Des signes et de l’art de penser, 4 vols. Paris: Goujon, Fuchs, Henrichs.Google Scholar
Degérando, J. M. 1800b. Considérations sur les diverses méthodes à suivre dans l’observation des peuples sauvages. s.l.Google Scholar
Degérando, J. M. [1800]1969. F. C. T. Moore (trans.), The Observation of Savage Peoples. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Deimel, A. 1923. Schultexte aus Fara (Wissenschaftliche Veröffentlichungen der Deutschen Orient Gesellschaft 43). Leipzig: J. S. Hinrichs Verlag.Google Scholar
Dekydtspotter, L., Sprouse, R. A., & Anderson, B. 1997. The interpretive interface in L2 acquisition: The process-result distinction in English–French interlanguage grammars. Language Acquisition 6: 297332.Google Scholar
de Laguna, G. A. 1927. Speech: Its Function and Development. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press.Google Scholar
Delattre, P. C., Liberman, A. M. & Cooper, F. S. 1955. Acoustic loci and transitional cues for consonants. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 27: 769–73.Google Scholar
Delbos, L. 1878. Chapters on the Science of Language. London: Williams & Norgate.Google Scholar
Delbrück, B. 1880/1882. Einleitung in das Sprachstudium. Ein Beitrag zur Geschichte und Methodik der vergleichenden Sprachforschung. Leipzig: Breitkopf & Härtel. 1882: trans. Introduction to the Study of Language: A Critical Survey of the History and Methods of Comparative Philology of the Indo-European Languages. Leipzig: Breitkopf & Härtel.Google Scholar
Delbrück, B. 1902. Das Wesen der Lautgesetze. Annalen der Naturphilosophie 1: 277308.Google Scholar
Delesalle, S. 1987. Vie des mots et science des significations: Arsène Darmesteter et Michel Bréal. DRLAV – Revue de linguistique 36/37: 265314.Google Scholar
de Libera, A. & Rosier, I. 1992. L’analyse de la référence. In Auroux, S. (ed.), Histoire des idées linguistiques, pp. 137–58. Brussels: Éditions Mardaga.Google Scholar
Delormel, J. 1795. Projet d’une langue universelle présenté à la convention nationale. Paris (chez l’auteur).Google Scholar
De Mauro, T. 1963. Storia linguistica dell’Italia unita. Bari: Editori Laterza.Google Scholar
De Mauro, T. 1967/1970 (trans., intro., & notes). Ferdinand de Saussure. Corso di linguistica generale. Bari: Editori Laterza.Google Scholar
Demolin, D. 1995. The phonetics and phonology of glottalized consonants in Lendu. In Connell, B. & Arvaniti, A. (eds.), Phonology and Phonetic Evidence: Papers in Laboratory Phonology IV, pp. 368–85. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
De Prémare, J. H. 1831. Notitia linguae sinicae. Malacca: Cura-Academia Anglo-Sinensis.Google Scholar
Deprez, K. (ed.) 1984. Sociolinguistics in the Low Countries. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Derenbourg, J. 1886. Le Livre des parterres fleuris, grammaire hébraïque en arabe d’Abou’l-Walid Merwan Ibn Djanah de Cordoue. Paris: F. Vieweg.Google Scholar
Derenbourg, J. & Derenbourg, H. 1880. Opuscules et traités d’Abou ‘l-Walid Merwan Ibn Djanah de Cordove. Paris: C. Carrington. 1880: repr. Amsterdam: Philo Press.Google Scholar
de Rijk, L. M. 1959. Dialectica. Assen: van Gorcum.Google Scholar
de Rijk, L. M. 1986. Plato’s Sophist: A Philosophical Commentary. Amsterdam: North-Holland.Google Scholar
Derrida, J. 1967a/1974. De la grammatologie. Paris : Éditions de Minuit. 1974: G. C. Spivak (trans.), Of Grammatology. Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins University Press.Google Scholar
Derrida, J. 1967b. L’Écriture et la différence. Paris: Éditions du Seuil.Google Scholar
Derrida, J. 1967c. La Voix et le phénomène. Paris: Presses universitaires de France.Google Scholar
Derrida, J. 1967d. La linguistique de Rousseau. Revue internationale de philosophie 82: 443–62.Google Scholar
Descartes, R. 1936. Correspondance. Ch. Adam & G. Milhaud (ed. and intro.). Paris: Presses universitaires de France.Google Scholar
de Schryver, G.-M. 2003. Lexicographers’ dreams in the electronic-dictionary age. Intl. Jrnl. of Lexicography 16: 143–99.Google Scholar
Deshpande, M. 1976. On the R̥kprātis΄ākhya 13.5–6. Indian Linguistics 37: 171–81.Google Scholar
Deshpande, M. 1996. The Vedic traditions and origins of grammatical thought in Ancient India. In Balbir, N. & Pinault, G.-J. (eds.), Langue, style et structure dans le monde indien, pp. 145–70. Paris: Honoré Champion.Google Scholar
Deshpande, M. 1997. Building blocks or useful fictions: Changing view of morphology in Ancient Indian thought. In van der Meij, D. (ed.), India and Beyond: Aspects of Literature, Meaning, Ritual and Thought, Essays in Honour of Frits Staal, pp. 71127. Leiden: E. J. Brill.Google Scholar
Désirat, C. & Hordé, T. 1975. Les écoles normales: une liquidation de la rhétorique? Littérature et grammaire dans les programmes de l’École normale de l’an III. Littérature 18: 3150.Google Scholar
Désirat, C. & Hordé, T. 1981. Théories et pratiques de la grammaire générale en France = Annales de la Révolution française 243 (Jan.–Mar.).Google Scholar
Desmet, P. 1990. The role of semantics in the development of historical linguistics in France. Belgian Jrnl. of Linguistics 5: 133–58.Google Scholar
Desmet, P. 1991. Linguistique générale et linguistique socio-historique: Les vues d’Alf Sommerfelt sur le changement phonique. Travaux de linguistique 22: 520.Google Scholar
Desmet, P. 1996. La Linguistique naturaliste en France (1867–1922): Nature, évolution et origine du langage. Leuven: Peeters.Google Scholar
Desmet, P., Lauwers, P., & Swiggers, P. 1999. Dialectology, philology, and linguistics in the Romance field: Methodological developments and interactions. Belgian Jrnl. of Linguistics 13: 177203.Google Scholar
Desmet, P. & Swiggers, P. 1992. Diachronie et continuité: Les vues de Gaston Paris sur la grammaire historique du français. Folia linguistica historica 12:181–96.Google Scholar
Desmet, P. & Swiggers, P. 1995. De la grammaire comparée à la sémantique. Textes de Michel Bréal publiés entre 1864 et 1898. Intro., comm., and bibliography (Orbis Supplementa 4). Leuven: Peeters.Google Scholar
Desmet, P. & Swiggers, P. 1996. Gaston Paris: aspects linguistiques d’une œuvre philologique. In Ramón, L. (ed.), Actas do XIX Congreso Internacional de Lingüística e Filoloxía Románicas. Sección X. Historia da Lingüística e da Filoloxía Románicas. Sección XI. Traballos en curso e programas de investigación nacionais e internacionais, pp. 207–32. A Coruña: Fundación Pedro Barrié de la Maza, Conde de Fenosa.Google Scholar
Destutt de Tracy, A. L. C. [1801]1992. Mémoire de la faculté de penser. De la métaphysique de Kant, et autres textes. Paris: Éditions Fayard.Google Scholar
Destutt de Tracy, A. L. C. [1803–5]1824–6. Éléments d’idéologie. Paris: Lévi.Google Scholar
Detges, U. 2004. How cognitive is grammaticalization? The history of the Catalan perfect periphrastic. In Fischer, et al. (eds.), pp. 211–28.Google Scholar
Devanandin, . [5th c. ce]1956/1962. Jainendra-Vyākaraṇa with the Mahāvr̥tti by Abhayanandin. 1956: Banaras: Bharatiya Jnanapitha. 1962: A. Shastri (ed.), w. comm., Śikṣāvallı̄. Banaras: Dikshita Krishnachandra Sharma.Google Scholar
Devine, A. M. & Laurence, D. S. 1994. The Prosody of Greek Speech. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Di Benedetto, V. 1958. Dionisio Trace e la Techne a lui attribuita. Annali della Scuola Normale Superiore di Pisa. Lettere, Storia e Filosofia 27: 169210.Google Scholar
Di Benedetto, V. 1973. La Techne spuria. Annali della Scuola Normale Superiore di Pisa. Series 3: 797814.Google Scholar
Di Benedetto, V. 1990. At the origins of Greek grammar. Glotta 68: 1939.Google Scholar
Díaz Esteban, F. 1975. Sefer ’Oklah we-’Oklah. Madrid: Consejo Superior de Investigaciones Científicas.Google Scholar
Dickey, E. 2007. Ancient Greek Scholarship. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Diderichsen, P. 1936. Prolegomena til en metodisk dansk Syntax. In E. Spang-Hanssen, E., Brøndal, V., & Brøndum-Nielsen, J. (eds.), Forhandlinger paa det ottende nordiske Filologmøde i København den 12–14 August 1935, pp. 41–6. Copenhagen: J. H. Schultz Forlag.Google Scholar
Diderichsen, P. 1939. Realitet som grammatisk kategori. Nysvenska Studier 19: 6991.Google Scholar
Diderichsen, P. 1946/1976. Elementar dansk Grammatik. Copenhagen: Gyldendal.Google Scholar
Diderichsen, P. 1965. Synspunkter for dansk sproglære i det 20. århundrede. In Jørgen, L, Christian, L., & Martin Nielsen, K. (eds.), Det danske sprogs udforskning i det 20. århundrede, pp. 142211. Copenhagen: Gyldendal.Google Scholar
Diderot, D. [1751]2010. Lettre sur les sourds et muets, à l’usage de ceux qui entendent et qui parlent. In Delon, M. & de Negroni, B. (eds.), Oeuvres philosophiques, pp. 203–73. Paris: Éditions Gallimard.Google Scholar
Diels, H. 1901. Das Problem der Weltsprache. Deutsche Revue 26: 4558.Google Scholar
Diels, H. & Krantz, W. 1951. Die Fragmente der Vorsokratiker, vol. i. Berlin: Grunewald Weidmann.Google Scholar
Dietrich, N. (ed.). 1979. Studies in Contrastive Linguistics and Error Analysis, vol. i: Theoretical Background. Heidelberg: Julius Groos Verlag.Google Scholar
Dijkstra, T. 2005. Bilingual visual word recognition and access. In Kroll, & de Groot, (eds.), pp. 179201.Google Scholar
Dijkstra, T. & van Heuven, W. 2002. The architecture of the bilingual word recognition system: From identification to decision. Bilingualism: Language and Cognition 5: 175–97.Google Scholar
Dik, S. 1978. Functional Grammar. Amsterdam: North-Holland.Google Scholar
Dik, S. 1983. Advances in Functional Grammar. Dordrecht: Foris.Google Scholar
Dik, S. 1986. On the notion “functional explanation.” Belgian Jrnl. of Linguistics 1: 1152.Google Scholar
Dik, S. 1989/1997. The Theory of Functional Grammar, Part 1/Part 2. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Dinnsen, D. 1979. Atomic phonology. In Dinnsen, D. (ed.). Current Approaches to Phonological Theory, pp. 3149. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press.Google Scholar
Dinnsen, D. 1985. A re-examination of phonological neutralization. Jrnl. of Linguistics 21: 265–79.Google Scholar
Diogenes, L. 1925. Lives of Eminent Philosophers. R. Hicks (trans.) (Loeb Classical Library). London: Heinemann.Google Scholar
Di Pietro, R.J. 1968. Contrastive analysis and the notions of deep and surface structure. In Alatis, J. (ed.), Report of the Nineteenth Annual Round Table Meeting on Linguistics and Language Studies, pp. 6580. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press.Google Scholar
Di Sciullo, A.-M. & Williams, E. 1987. On the Definition of Word. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Dittmar, N. 1973. Soziolinguistik. Exemplarische und kritische Darstellung ihrer Theorie, Empirie und Anwendung. Frankfurt am Main: Athenäum Verlag.Google Scholar
Dixon, R. M. W. 1972. The Dyirbal Language of Queensland. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Dixon, R. M. W. 1979. Ergativity. Language 55: 59138.Google Scholar
Djamouri, R. 1993. Théorie de la ‘rectification des dénominations’ et réflexions linguistiques chez Xunzi. Extrême-Orient, Extrême-Occident 15: 5574.Google Scholar
Docherty, G. J. & Ladd, D. R. (eds.). 1992. Papers in Laboratory Phonology II: Gesture, Segment, Prosody. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Donatus, . 1855–80/2009. Probi, Donati, Servii qui feruntur De arte grammatica libri, et notarum laterculi. 2009: (1880 edn.) Keil, H. & Mommsen, T. (eds.). Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Donegan, P. 1978. On the natural phonology of vowels. PhD dissertation, Ohio State University.Google Scholar
Donegan, P. & Stampe, D. 1979. The study of natural phonology. In Dinnsen, D. (ed.), Current Approaches to Phonological Theory, pp. 126–73. Bloomingon, IN: Indiana University Press.Google Scholar
Dorian, N. C. 1981. Language Death: The Life Cycle of a Scottish Gaelic Dialect. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press.Google Scholar
Dorian, N. 1989. Investigating Obsolescence: Studies in Language Contraction and Death. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Döring, K. & Ebert, T. (eds.). 1993. Dialektiker und Stoiker: Zur Logik der Stoa und ihrer Vorläufer. Stuttgart: Franz Steiner Verlag.Google Scholar
Doss, ena, M. & Lass, R. (eds.). 2004. Methods and Data in English Historical Dialectology. Bern: Peter Lang.Google Scholar
Dotan, A. 1967. Sefer Diqduqe ha-ṭĕ‘amim lĕ-Rabbi Aharon ben Mošeh ben ’Ašer, 3 vols. Jerusalem: The Academy of the Hebrew Language.Google Scholar
Dotan, A. 1997. The Dawn of Hebrew Linguistics, The Book of Elegance of the Language of the Hebrews by Saadia Gaon, 2 vols. Jerusalem: World Union of Jewish Studies.Google Scholar
Dotan, A. 2005. Niṣanim ri’šonim bĕ-ḥokmat ha-millim [The Awakening of Word Lore, From the Masora to the Beginnings of Hebrew Lexicography]. Jerusalem: Aḳademyah la-lashon ha-‘Ivrit.Google Scholar
Doughty, C. J. & Long, M. H. (eds.). 2005. Blackwell Handbook of Second Language Acquisition. Malden, MA: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Dowty, D. R. 1979. Word Meaning and Montague Grammar: The Semantics of Verbs and Times in Generative Semantics and in Montague’s PTQ. Dordrecht: D. Reidel.Google Scholar
Dowty, D. R. 1991. Thematic proto-roles and argument selection. Language 67: 547619.Google Scholar
Dowty, D. R., Wall, R. E., & Peters, S. 1981. Introduction to Montague Semantics. Dordrecht: D. Reidel.Google Scholar
Draper, M. H., Ladefoged, P., & Whitteridge, D. 1959. Respiratory muscles in speech. Jrnl. of Speech and Hearing Research 2: 1627.Google Scholar
Dreshler, B. E. 2011. The phoneme. In van Oostendorp, M. et al. (eds.), The Blackwell Companion to Phonology, vol. i, pp. 241–66. Malden, MA: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar
Dressler, W. U., Mayerthaler, , , W., Panagl, O., & Wurzel, W. U. 1987. Lietmotivs in Natural Morphology. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Dretske, F. 1981. Knowledge and the Flow of Information. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Dretske, F. 1988. Explaining Behavior: Reasons in a World of Causes. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Droixhe, D. & Haßler, G. 1989. Aspekte der Sprachursprungsproblematik in Frankreich in der zweiten Hälfte des 18. Jahrhunderts. In Gessinger, J. & von Rahden, W. (eds.), Theorien vom Ursprung der Sprache, pp. 312–58. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Dryer, M. 1989. Large linguistic areas and language sampling. Studies in Language. 13: 257–92.Google Scholar
Dryer, M. 1991. The Greenbergian word order correlations. Language 68: 81138.Google Scholar
Dryer, M. 2003. Significant and non-significant implicational universals. Linguistic Typology 7: 108–28.Google Scholar
Dryer, M. 2005a. Order of demonstrative and noun. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds.), pp. 358–61.Google Scholar
Dryer, M. 2005b. Order of relative clause and noun. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds.), pp. 366–9.Google Scholar
Du Bois, J. W. 1987. The discourse basis of ergativity. Language 63: 805–55.Google Scholar
Du Trieu, P. [1615]1620/1662 Manuductio ad logicam. 1620: Cologne: Johannes Kinckius. 1662: London: Guildhall Press.Google Scholar
Ducrot, O. 1972a. Dire et ne pas dire. Paris: Éditions Hermann.Google Scholar
Ducrot, O. 1972b. De Saussure à la philosophie du langage. Preface to J. R. Searle, trans. H. Pauchard, Les Actes de langage, pp. 734. Paris: Éditions Hermann.Google Scholar
Ducrot, O. 1980a. Les Mots du discours. Paris: Éditions de Minuit.Google Scholar
Ducrot, O. 1980b. Les Échelles argumentatives. Paris: Éditions de Minuit.Google Scholar
Ducrot, O. 1984. Le Dire et le Dit. Paris: Éditions de Minuit.Google Scholar
Ducrot, O. 1995. Topoï et formes topiques. In Anscombre, J.-C. (ed.), Théorie des topoï, pp. 85100. Paris: Éditions Kimé.Google Scholar
Duff, P. 1995. An ethnography of communication in immersion classrooms in Hungary. TESOL Quarterly 29: 505–37.Google Scholar
Dufour, R. 2004. Chrysippe: Oeuvre philosophiques, 2 vols. Paris: Les Belles Lettres.Google Scholar
Duhem, P. 1906/1954. La Théorie physique. Son objet, sa structure. Paris: Chevalier et Rivière. 1954: P. Wiener (trans.), The Aim and Structure of Physical Theory. Princeton University Press.Google Scholar
Dukes, L. 1844. Grammatische Werke des R. Jehuda Chajjug. Sifre Diqduq me-roš ha-medaqdeqim R. Yĕhudah Ḥayyūg˘. Stuttgart: Krabbe.Google Scholar
Dulay, H. C. & Burt, M. K. 1974. Natural sequences in child second language acquisition. Language Learning 24: 3753.Google Scholar
Du Marsais, C. C. 1769. Logique et principes de grammaire. Paris: Briasson.Google Scholar
Dummett, M. 1978. Truth and Other Enigmas. London: Duckworth Books.Google Scholar
Dummett, M. 1991. The Logical Basis of Metaphysics. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Dummett, M. 1993. Origins of Analytical Philosophy. London: Duckworth Books.Google Scholar
Dunn, H. K. 1950. The calculation of vowel resonances, and an electrical vocal tract. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 22: 740–53.Google Scholar
Duponceau, P. S. 1819. Report of the Historical and Literary Committee to the American Philosophical Society. Transactions of the Historical and Literary Committee of the American Philosophical Society 1: xi–xvi.Google Scholar
Duponceau, P. S. 1838. Mémoire sur le système grammatical des langues des quelques nations indiennes de l’Amérique du nord. Paris: Pihan de la Forest.Google Scholar
Dupuy, J.-P. 2000. The Mechanization of Mind: On the Origins of Cognitive Science. Princeton University Press.Google Scholar
Duranti, A. 1981. The Fono: A Samoan speech event. PhD dissertation, University of Southern California.Google Scholar
Duranti, A. 1992a. Language and bodies in social space: Samoan ceremonial greetings. American Anthropologist 94: 657–91.Google Scholar
Duranti, A. 1992b. Heteroglossia in Samoan oratory. Pacific Studies 15: 155–75.Google Scholar
Duranti, A. 1994. From Grammar to Politics: Linguistic Anthropology in a Western Samoan Village. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Duranti, A. 1997. Linguistic Anthropology. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Duranti, A. (ed.). 2001a/2009. Linguistic Anthropology: A Reader. 2009: 2nd edn. Malden, MA: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Duranti, A. 2001b. Linguistic anthropology: History, ideas, and issues. In Duranti, (ed.), pp. 1–38, 465–79.Google Scholar
Duranti, A. 2003. Language as culture in U.S. anthropology: Three paradigms. Current Anthropology 44 (3): 323–47.Google Scholar
Duranti, A. & Goodwin, C. (eds.). 1992. Rethinking Context: Language as an Interactive Phenomenon. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Duranti, A. & Ochs, E. 1986. Literacy instruction in a Samoan village. In Schieffelin, B. B. & Gilmore, P. (eds.), Acquisition of Literacy: Ethnographic Perspectives, pp. 213–32. Norwood, NJ: Ablex.Google Scholar
Duranti, A., Ochs, E., & Schieffelin, B. B. (eds.). 2012. The Handbook of Language Socialization. Malden, MA: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar
Durie, M. & Ross, M. (eds.). 1996. The Comparative Method Reviewed: Regularity and Irregularity in Language Change. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Durkheim, E. 1895. Les Règles de la méthode sociologique. Paris: F. Alcan.Google Scholar
Durkheim, E. [1909]1970. Sociologie et sciences sociales. In De la méthode dans les sciences, pp. 259–85. Paris: F. Alcan. 1970: repr. in E. Durkheim, La Science sociale et l’action. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France.Google Scholar
Duval, R. 1907. La Littérature syriaque. Paris: Gabalda.Google Scholar
Ebbesen, S. 1980. Is “canis currit” ungrammatical? Historiographia Linguistica 7: 5368.Google Scholar
Ebbesen, S. (ed.). 1995. Sprachtheorien in Spätantike und Mittelalter. Tübingen: Gunter Narr.Google Scholar
Eckert, P. 1989a. Jocks and Burnouts: Social Categories and Identity in the High School. NY: Columbia Teachers College Press.Google Scholar
Eckert, P. 1989b. The whole woman: Sex and gender differences in variation. Language Variation and Change 1: 245–68.Google Scholar
Eckert, P. 2000. Linguistic Variation as Social Practice: The Linguistic Construction of Identity in Belten High. Malden, MA: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Eckert, P. & McConnell-Ginet, S. 1992. Think practically and look locally: Language and gender as community-based practices. Annual Review of Anthropology 21: 461–90.Google Scholar
Eco, U. 1968. La struttura assente: La ricerca semiotica e il metodo strutturale. Milan: Bompiani.Google Scholar
Eco, U. 1976. A Theory of Semiotics. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press.Google Scholar
Eco, U. [1993]1995/1997. The Search for the Perfect Language. Oxford: Blackwell. [Eng. trans. of Ital. orig.]Google Scholar
Edler, M. 2001. Der spektakuläre Sprachursprung: Zur hermeneutischen Archäologie der Sprache bei Vico, Condillac und Rousseau. Munich: W. Fink.Google Scholar
Edmondson, J. A. & Esling, J. H. 2006. The valves of the throat and their functioning in tone, vocal register, and stress: Laryngoscopic case studies. Phonology 23: 157–91.Google Scholar
Edwards, J. R. 1994. Multilingualism. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Egbert, M. M. 1996. Context-sensitivity in conversation analysis: Eye gaze and the German repair initiator bitte. Language in Society 25: 587612.Google Scholar
Eggins, S. & Slade, D. 1997. Analysing Casual Conversation. London: Cassell.Google Scholar
Ehlich, K. 1989. Deictic expressions and the connexity of text. In Conte, M.-E. et al. (eds.), Text and Discourse Connectedness, pp. 3352. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Ehwald, R. (ed.). 1919. Aldhelmi opera (Monumenta Germanica Historica, Auctores Antiquissimi 15). Berlin: Weinmann.Google Scholar
Eimas, P. D. 1985. The perception of speech in early infancy. Scientific American 252: 3440.Google Scholar
Eimas, P. D., Siqueland, E. R., Jusczyk, P., & Vigorito, J. 1971. Speech perception in infants. Science 171: 303–6.Google Scholar
Einhauser, E. 1989. Die Junggrammatiker – Ein Problem für die Sprachwissenschaftsgeschichtschreibung. Trier: Wissenschaftlicher Verlag.Google Scholar
Eldar, I. 1989. Mišnato ha-diqduqit šel R. Ḥayyūŷ ha-sĕfardı̄. Lĕšonenu 54: 173–81.Google Scholar
Eldar, I. 2001. Ha-glosografiah ha-miqra’it bĕ-’ezor ha-dibur ha-‘arabi bĕ-mizraḥ. Ha-‘Ibrit wĕ-’Aḥyoteha 1: 2337.Google Scholar
Elliott, R. W. V. 1957. Isaac Newton’s ‘Of an Universall Language.’ Modern Language Review 52: 118.Google Scholar
Ellis, A. J. 1848. Essentials of Phonetics: Containing the Theory of a Universal Alphabet. London: Pitman.Google Scholar
Ellis, F. W. 1816. Note to the introduction. In Campbell, A. D. (ed.), A Grammar of the Teloogoo Language, pp. 132. Madras: College Press.Google Scholar
Elman, J., Johnson, M. H., Karmiloff-Smith, A., Parisi, D., & Plunkett, K. 1996. Rethinking Innateness. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Elmedlaoui, M. 2001. A cross-cultural reading in a Kabyle Berber grammar handbook (Mammeri’s Tajerrumt). In Kniffka, H. (ed.), Indigenous Grammar across Cultures, pp. 379401. Frankfurt am Main: Peter Lang.Google Scholar
Embleton, S. 1986. Statistics in Historical Linguistics. Bochum: Brockmeyer.Google Scholar
Emeneau, M. B. 1956. India as a linguistic area. Language 32: 316.Google Scholar
Emonds, J. E. 1976. A Transformational Approach to English Syntax. NY: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Encyclopædia Britannica. 1889/1910–11. The Encyclopædia Britannica: A Dictionary of Arts, Sciences, and General Literature, 9th edn. Edinburgh: Adam & Charles Black. 1910–11: 11th edn. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Endress, G. 1986. Grammatik und Logik: Arabische Philologie und griechische Philosophie im Widerstreit. In Mojsisch, B. (ed.), Sprachphilosophie in Antike und Mittelalter, pp. 163299. Amsterdam: B. R. Grüner.Google Scholar
Engberg-Pedersen, E., Fortescue, M., Harder, P., Heltoft, L., & Jakobsen, L. (eds.). 1996. Content, Expression and Structure: Studies in Danish Functional Grammar. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Engler, R. (ed.). 1967–8/1968. See Saussure.Google Scholar
Engler, R. 1974a. Sémiologies saussuriennes: 1. De l’existence du signe. Cahiers Ferdinand de Saussure 29: 4573.Google Scholar
Engler, R. 1974b. Bibliographie saussurienne. Cahiers Ferdinand de Saussure 29: 211.Google Scholar
Engsheden, Åk. 2016. Traditional Egyptian II (Ptolemaic, Roman). In Stauder-Porchet, J. et al. (eds.), UCLA Encyclopedia of Egyptology. (online: http://escholarship.org/uc/item/8g73w3gp)Google Scholar
Eriugena, J. S. (John the Scot). [c. 810 – c. 877]: see Uhlfelder & Potter 1976.Google Scholar
Ermers, R. 1999. Arabic Grammars of Turkic: The Arabic Linguistic Model Applied to Foreign Languages and Translation of ‘Abū hÌ£ayyān Al-’Andalusī’s Kitāb al-‘Idrāk li-Lisān al-’Atrāk. Leiden: E. J. Brill.Google Scholar
Ernout, A. & Meillet, A. 2001. Dictionnaire étymologique de la langue latine: Histoire des mots. Paris: Librairie Klincksieck.Google Scholar
Ervin-Tripp, S. M. 1972. Sociolinguistic rules of address. In Pride, & Holmes, (eds.), pp. 225–40.Google Scholar
Esling, J. H. 1984. Laryngographic study of phonation type and laryngeal configuration. Jrnl. of the Intl. Phonetic Association 14: 5673.Google Scholar
Esper, E. A. 1968. Mentalism and Objectivism in Linguistics: The Sources of Leonard Bloomfield’s Psychology of Language. NY: Elsevier.Google Scholar
Everson, S. (ed.). 1994. Language (Companions to Ancient Thought 3). Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Fabbro, F. di & Paradis, M. 1995. Differential impairments in 4 multilingual patients with subcortical lesions. In Paradis, M. (ed.), Aspects of Bilingual Aphasia, pp. 139–76. Oxford: Pergamon Press.Google Scholar
Fadda, E. 2001. Le lieu théorique de la sémiologie de L. J. Prieto: Notes sur la présence de Saussure dans la sémiologie actuelle. Cahiers Ferdinand de Sausssure 54: 384403.Google Scholar
Faidit, Uc. [c. 1240]1969. The Donatz Proensals of Uc Faidit. Marshall, J. H. (ed.). London: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Faiguet de Villeneuve, J. 1765. Langue nouvelle. In Diderot, D. & d’Alembert, J. Le Rond (eds.), Encyclopédie ou dictionnaire raisonné des sciences, des arts et des métiers par une société de gens de lettres, vol. ix, pp. 268–71. Neufchastel: Samuel Faulche & Compagnie, Libraires & Imprimeurs.Google Scholar
Fairclough, N. 1989/2001/2015. Language and Power, 1st/2nd/3rd edns. London: Longman.Google Scholar
Fairclough, N. 1992. Discourse and Social Change. Cambridge: Polity Press.Google Scholar
Fairclough, N. 1995a. Media Discourse. London: Edward Arnold.Google Scholar
Fairclough, N. 1995b. Critical Discourse Analysis: The Critical Study of Language. London: Longman.Google Scholar
Fairclough, N. & Wodak, R. 1997. Critical Discourse Analysis. In van Dijk, T. (ed.), Discourse as Social Interaction (Discourse Studies: A Multidisciplinary Introduction 2), pp. 258–84. London: Sage.Google Scholar
Falk, J. S. 1995. Words without grammar: Linguists and the International Auxiliary Language Movement in the United States. Language & Communication 15: 241–59.Google Scholar
Falk, J. S. 1998. The American shift from historical to non-historical linguistics: E. H. Sturtevant and the first linguistic institutes. Language & Communication 18: 171–80.Google Scholar
Falk, J. S. 1999. Women, Language and Linguistics: Three American Stories from the First Half of the Twentieth Century. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Falk, J. S. 2003. Turn to the history of linguistics: Noam Chomsky and Charles Hockett in the 1960s. Historiographia Linguistica 30: 129–85.Google Scholar
Falk, J. S. 2006. Linguistics as a university subject: Early history, in America. In Brown, (ed.), pp. 234–37.Google Scholar
Fant, C. G. M. 1960. Acoustic Theory of Speech Production with Calculations Based on X-ray Studies of Russian Articulations. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Farrar, F. W. 1865. Chapters on Language. London: Longmans, Green, and Co.Google Scholar
Fasold, R. 1984. The Sociolinguistics of Society. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Fauconnier, G. & Sweetser, E. 1996. Spaces, Worlds, and Grammar. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Fauconnier, G. & Turner, M. 1996. Blending as a central process of grammar. In Goldberg, A. (ed.), Conceptual Structure, Discourse, and Language, pp. 113–30. Stanford, CA: CSLI Publications.Google Scholar
Fawcett, R. 1980. Cognitive Linguistics and Social Interaction: Towards an Integrated Model of a Systemic Functional Grammar and the Other Components of an Interacting Mind. Heidelberg: Julius Groos Verlag.Google Scholar
Feld, S. 1982. Sound and Sentiment: Birds, Weeping, Poetics, and Song in Kaluli Expression. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press.Google Scholar
Feld, S. 1996. Waterfalls of songs: An acoustemology of place resounding in Bosavi, Papua New Guinea. In Feld, S. & Basso, K. H. (eds.), Senses of Place, pp. 91135. Santa Fe, NM: University of Washington Press.Google Scholar
Fellbaum, C. (ed.). 1998. WordNet: An Electronic Lexical Database. Cambridge MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Ferguson, C. A. 1959. Diglossia. Word 15: 325–40.Google Scholar
Ferguson, C. A. 1964. Baby talk in six languages. In Gumperz, & Hymes, (eds.), 103–14.Google Scholar
Ferguson, C. A. 1977. Baby talk as a simplified register. In Snow, C. E. & Ferguson, C. A. (eds.), Talking to Children: Language Input and Acquisition, pp. 209–35. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Ferguson, C. A. 1985. Contrastive analysis: A linguistic hypothesis. In Jankowsky, K. (ed.), Scientific and Humanistic Dimensions of Language: Festschrift for Robert Lado, pp. 199207. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Ferguson, C. A. & Gumperz, J. J. 1960. Introduction. In Ferguson, C. A. & Gumperz, J. J. (eds.), Linguistic Diversity in South Asia: Studies in Regional, Social and Functional Variation, pp. 118. Bloomington: Indiana University Research Center in Anthropology, Folklore, and Linguistics.Google Scholar
Ferraresi, G. & Goldbach, M. (eds.). 2008. Principles of Syntactic Reconstruction. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Fichte, J. G. [1795]1966: Von der Sprachfähigkeit und dem Ursprung der Sprache. In Lauth, R. & Jacob, H. (eds.), with R. Schottky, Werke 1794–1796, pp. 91128. Stuttgart-Bad Cannstatt: Friedrich Frommann Verlag (Günther Holzboog).Google Scholar
Fichte, J. G. 1808. Reden an die deutsche Nation. Leipzig: Insel Verlag.Google Scholar
Field, H. 1978. Mental representation. Erkenntnis 13: 961.Google Scholar
Fillmore, C. J. 1966. Deictic categories and the semantics of ‘come.’ Foundations of Language 2: 219–27.Google Scholar
Fillmore, C. J. 1968. The case for case. In Bach, & Harms, (eds.), pp. 188.Google Scholar
Fillmore, C. J. 1975. An alternative to checklist theories of meaning. In Cogen, C. et al. (eds.), Proceedings of the First Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society, pp. 123–31. Berkeley Linguistics Society.Google Scholar
Fillmore, C. J. 1976. Frame semantics and the nature of language. Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences: Conference on the Origin and Development of Language and Speech 280: 2032.Google Scholar
Fillmore, C. J. 1982. Frame semantics. In Linguistic Society of Korea (ed.), Selected Papers from the SICOL-1981: Linguistics in the Morning Calm, pp. 111–38. Seoul: Hanshin.Google Scholar
Fillmore, C. J. 1985. Syntactic intrusions and the notion of grammatical construction. Proceedings of the Eleventh Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society, pp. 7386. Berkeley Linguistics Society.Google Scholar
Fillmore, C. J. 1992. “Corpus linguistics” or “Computer-aided armchair linguistics.” In Svartvik, J. (ed.), Directions in Corpus Linguistics (TiLSM Series 85), pp. 3560. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Fillmore, C. J. 1997. Lectures on Deixis. Stanford, CA: CSLI Publications.Google Scholar
Fillmore, C. J. 2006. Frame semantics. In Brown, (ed.), vol. iv, pp. 613–20.Google Scholar
Fillmore, C. J. & Atkins, B. T. 1992. Toward a frame-based lexicon: The semantics of RISK and its neighbors. In Lehrer, & Kittay, (eds.), pp. 75102.Google Scholar
Fillmore, C. J., Johnson, C. R., & Petruck, M. R. L. 2003. Background to FrameNet. Intl. Jrnl. of Lexicography 16: 235–50.Google Scholar
Fillmore, C. J. & Kay, P. 1987. The Goals of Construction Grammar (Berkeley Cognitive Science Program Technical Report no. 50). University of California.Google Scholar
Fillmore, C. J., Kay, P., & O’Connor, M. C. 1988. Regularity and idiomaticity in grammatical constructions: The case of ‘let alone.’ Language 64: 501–38.Google Scholar
Finck, F. N. 1910. Die Haupttypen des Sprachbaus. Leipzig: B. G. Teubner.Google Scholar
Findlater, A. 1875. Language. London: W. & R. Chambers.Google Scholar
Firbas, J. 1964. On defining the theme in functional sentence analysis. Travaux Linguistiques de Prague 1: 267–80.Google Scholar
Firth, A. & Wagner, J. 1997. On discourse, communication, and (some) fundamental concepts in SLA research. Modern Language Jrnl. 81: 285300.Google Scholar
Firth, J. R. 1930/1964. Speech. London: Ernest Benn. 1964: repr. in Firth 1964.Google Scholar
Firth, J. R. 1935/1957. The technique of semantics. Transactions of the Philological Society: 36–72. 1957: repr. in Firth 1957a: 7–33.Google Scholar
Firth, J. R. 1937/1964. The Tongues of Men. London: Watts & Co. 1964: repr. in Firth 1964.Google Scholar
Firth, J. R. 1946/1957. The English school of phonetics. Transactions of the Philological Society 45 : 92132. 1957: repr. in Firth 1957a: 92–120.Google Scholar
Firth, J. R. 1948/1957. Sounds and prosodies. Transactions of the Philological Society 47: 127–52. 1957: repr. in Firth. 1957a: 121–38.Google Scholar
Firth, J. R. 1949/1957. Atlantic linguistics. Archivum Linguisticum 1: 95116. 1957: repr. in Firth 1957a: 156–72.Google Scholar
Firth, J. R. 1950/1957. Personality and language in society. The Sociological Review 42: 3752. 1957: repr. in Firth 1957a: 177–89.Google Scholar
Firth, J. R. 1951/1957. Modes of meaning. In Essays and Studies of the English Association, new series 4, pp. 118–49. 1957: repr. in Firth 1957a: 190–215.Google Scholar
Firth, J. R. 1955/1968. Structural linguistics. Transactions of the Philological Society 54: 83103. 1968: repr. in Firth 1968: 35–52.Google Scholar
Firth, J. R. [1956]1968. A new approach to grammar. Repr. in Firth 1968: 114–25.Google Scholar
Firth, J. R. 1957a. Papers in Linguistics, 1934–1951. London: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Firth, J. R. 1957b/1968. Applications of general linguistics. Transactions of the Philological Society 56: 114. 1968: repr. in Firth 1968: 126–36.Google Scholar
Firth, J. R. 1957c/1968. A synopsis of linguistic theory, 1930–1955. In Studies in Linguistic Analysis. Special Volume of the Philological Society, pp. 132. Oxford: Basil Blackwell. 1968: repr. in Firth 1968: 168–205.Google Scholar
Firth, J. R. 1964. The Tongues of Men and Speech. Strevens, P. (ed.). London: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Firth, J. R. 1968. Selected Papers of J. R. Firth, 1952–1959. F. R. Palmer (ed.). Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press.Google Scholar
Firth, J. R. & Rogers, B. B. 1937/1957. The structure of the Chinese monosyllable in a Hunanese dialect (Changsha). Bulletin of the School of Oriental Studies 8: 1055–74. 1957: repr. in Firth 1957a: 76–91.Google Scholar
Fischer, J. L. 1958. Social influences on the choice of a linguistic variant. Word 14: 4756.Google Scholar
Fischer, M. H. & Zwaan, R.A. 2008. Embodied language – A review of the role of the motor system in language comprehension. Quarterly Jrnl. of Experimental Psychology 61 : 825–50.Google Scholar
Fischer, O., Norde, M., & Perridon, H. (eds.). 2004. Up and down the Cline – The Nature of Grammaticalization. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Fischer-Elfert, H.-W. 1986. Die satirische Streitschrift des Papyrus Anastasi I: Übersetung und Kommentar (Ägyptologische Abhandlungen 44). Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag.Google Scholar
Fischer-Elfert, H.-W. & Krebernik, M. 2016. Zu den Buchstabennamen auf dem Halaḥam-Ostrakon aus TT 99 (Grab des Sennefri). Zeitschrift für ägyptische Sprache und Altertumskunde 143: 169–76.Google Scholar
Fischer-Jørgensen, E. 1952a. The phonetic basis for identification of phonemic elements. The Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 24: 611–17.Google Scholar
Fischer-Jørgensen, E. 1952b. On the definition of phoneme categories on a distributional basis. Acta Linguistica 7: 839.Google Scholar
Fischer-Jørgensen, E. 1966. Form and substance in glossematics. Acta linguistica hafniensia 10: 133.Google Scholar
Fischer-Jørgensen, E. 2004. Glossematics. In Malmkjær, K. (ed.), The Linguistics Encyclopedia, pp. 208–17. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Fishman, J. A. 1964. Language maintenance and language shift as a field of inquiry: A definition of the field and suggestions for its further development. Linguistics 2: 3270.Google Scholar
Fishman, J. A. 1965. Who speaks what language to whom and when. La Linguistique 2: 6788.Google Scholar
Fishman, J. A. 1966. Language Loyalty in the United States. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Fishman, J. A. 1967. Bilingualism with and without diglossia; diglossia with and without bilingualism. Jrnl. of Social Issues 23: 2938.Google Scholar
Fishman, J. A. 1977. Bilingual education: A perspective. Bulletin of the Institute for Urban and Minority Education. 12: 113.Google Scholar
Fishman, J. A. 1978. Advances in the Study of Societal Multilingualism. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Fishman, J. A. 1991. Reversing Language Shift: Theory and Practice of Assistance toGoogle Scholar
Threatened Languages. Clevedon: Multilingual Matters.Google Scholar
Fishman, J. A. (ed.). 1999. Handbook of Language and Ethnic Identity. NY: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Fishman, J. A., Ferguson, C. A., & Das Gupta, J. 1968. Language Problems of Developing Nations. NY: Wiley & Sons.Google Scholar
Fodor, J. A. 1970. Three reasons for not deriving ‘kill’ from ‘cause to die.’ Linguistic Inquiry 1: 429–38.Google Scholar
Fodor, J. A. 1975. The Language of Thought. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Fodor, J. A. 1983. Modularity of Mind: An Essay on Faculty Psychology. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Fodor, J. A. 1987. Psychosemantics. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Fodor, J. A., Garrett, M. F., Walker, E. C. T., & Parkes, C. H. 1980. Against definitions. Cognition 8: 263367.Google Scholar
Fodor, J. A. & Pylyshyn, Z.W. 1988. Connectionism and cognitive architecture: A critical analysis. Cognition 28: 371.Google Scholar
Fodor, J. D. 1977. Semantics: Theories of Meaning in Generative Grammar. NY: Thomas Y. Crowell.Google Scholar
Foley, J. 1977. Foundations of Theoretical Phonology. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Foley, W. A. & Van Valin, R. D., Jr. 1984. Functional Syntax and Universal Grammar. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Folkins, J. W. & Abbs, J. H. 1975. Lip and jaw motor control during speech: Responses to resistive loading of the jaw. Jrnl. of Speech and Hearing Research 18: 207–20.Google Scholar
Fontenelle, T. 1997. Turning a Bilingual Dictionary into a Lexical–Semantic Database. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer.Google Scholar
Fontenelle, T. 2008. Practical Lexicography: A Reader. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Ford, C. 1993. Grammar and Interaction: Adverbial Clauses in American English Conversations. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Ford, K. M. & Pylyshyn, Z. W. (eds). 1996. The Robot’s Dilemma Revisited: The Frame Problem in Artificial Intelligence. Norwood, NJ: Ablex.Google Scholar
Forel, C-A. 2008. La Linguistique sociologique de Charles Bally: Étude des inédits. Geneva: Librairie Droz.Google Scholar
Formigari, L. 1988. Language and Experience in 17th-Century British Philosophy. W. Dodd (trans.). Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Formigari, L. 1993. Signs, Science and Politics: Philosophies of Language in Europe 1700–1830. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Formigari, L. 1994. La Sémiotique empiriste face au kantisme. M. Anquetil (trans.). Liège: Éditions Mardaga.Google Scholar
Formigari, L. 1999. Idealism and idealistic trends in linguistics and the philosophy of language. In Schmitter, (ed.), pp. 230–53.Google Scholar
Foucault, M. 1966/1970. Les Mots et les choses. Paris: Gallimard. 1970: (trans.) The Order of Things. NY: Pantheon Books.Google Scholar
Foucault, M. 1969/2002. L’archéologie du savoir. Paris: Gallimard. 2002: (trans.) The Archeology of Knowledge. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Foucault, M. 1972. Orders of discourse. Social Science Information 10: 730.Google Scholar
Foucault, M. 1980. Power/Knowledge – Selected Interviews and Other Writings 1972–1977. Brighton: Harvester Press.Google Scholar
Fought, J. (ed.). 1999. Leonard Bloomfield: Critical Assessments of Leading Linguists, 3 vols. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Fourcin, A. 1974. Laryngographic examination of vocal fold vibration. In Wyke, B. (ed.), Ventilatory and Phonatory Control Systems, pp. 315–33. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Fowler, C. A. 1996. Listeners do hear sounds, not tongues. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 99: 1730–41.Google Scholar
Fowler, M. 1952. Review of Methods in Structural Linguistics, by Zellig S. Harris. Language 28: 504–9.Google Scholar
Fowler, R., Hodge, R., Kress, G., & Trew, T. 1979. Language and Control. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul.Google Scholar
Fox, A. 1995. Linguistic Reconstruction: An Introduction to Theory and Method. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Fox, B. & Jasperson, R. 1995. A syntactic exploration of repair in English conversation. In Davis, P. (ed.), Alternative Linguistics: Descriptive and Theoretical Modes, pp. 77134. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Fox, B. & Thompson, S. 2007. Relative clauses in English conversation: Relativizers, frequency and the notion of construction. Studies in Language 31: 293326.Google Scholar
Frain du Tremblay, J. 1703. Traité des langues, où l’on donne des Principes & des Règles pour juger du mérite & de l’excellence de chaque langue, & en particulier de la Langue Françoise. Paris: Jean Baptiste Delespine.Google Scholar
Francis, W. N. & Kucˇera, H. 1964/1979. Brown Corpus Manual. Providence, RI: Brown University. 1979: rev. & ampl.: http://icame.uib.no/brown/bcm.htmlGoogle Scholar
Franklin, M. J. 2000. Introduction. In Representing India: Indian Culture and Imperial Control in Eighteenth-Century British Orientalist Discourse, vol. iv, pp. i–xiii. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Frazer, J. G. 1890. The Golden Bough: A Study in Comparative Religion. London: Macmillan.Google Scholar
Frazier, L. 1978. On comprehending sentences: Syntactic parsing strategies. PhD dissertation, University of Connecticut.Google Scholar
Frazier, L. & Clifton, C., Jr. 1996. Construal. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Fredborg, K. M. 1973. The dependence of Petrus Helias. Summa super Priscianum on William of Conches’ Glose super Priscianum. Cahiers de l’Institut du Moyen-Âge grec et latin 17: 139.Google Scholar
Fredborg, K. M. 1981. Some notes on the Grammar of William of Conches. Cahiers de l’Institut du Moyen-Âge grec et latin 37: 2141.Google Scholar
Fredborg, K. M. 1988. Speculative grammar. In Dronke, P. (ed.), A History of Western Philosophy, pp. 177–95. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Fredborg, K. M. & Kneepkens, C. H. (eds.). 1983. Grammatica Porretana. Cahiers de l’Institut du Moyen-Âge grec et latin 46: iii–113.Google Scholar
Frede, M. 1987. Essays in Ancient Philosophy. Minneapolis, MN: University of Minnesota Press.Google Scholar
Frede, M. 1993. The stoic doctrine of the tenses of the verb. In Döring, K. & Ebert, T. (eds.), Dialektiker und Stoiker. Zur Logik der Stoa und ihrer Vorläufer, pp. 141–54. Wiesbaden: Franz Steiner Verlag.Google Scholar
Frede, M. 1994a. The stoic notion of a Lekton. In Everson, (ed.), pp. 109–28.Google Scholar
Frede, M. 1994b. The stoic notion of a grammatical case. Bulletin of the Institute of Classical Studies 39: 1324.Google Scholar
Frege, G. 1879/1967/1972. Begriffsschrift, eine der arithmetischen nachgebildete Formelsprache des reinen Denkens. Halle: Verlag von Louis Nebert. 1967: H. L. Nebert (trans.), Begriffsschrift, a Formula Language, Modelled upon that of Arithmetic, for Pure Thought. In J. van Heijenoort (ed.), From Frege to Gödel: Source Book in Mathematical Logic, 1879–1931, pp. 5–82. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. 1972: T. W. Bynum (trans./ed., w. bio. and intro.), Conceptual Notation: and Related Articles. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Frege, G. 1884/1980. Die Grundlagen der Arithmetik: Eine logisch mathematische Untersuchung über den Begriff der Zahl. Breslau: Verlag von Wilhelm Koebner. 1980: J. L. Austin (trans.), The Foundations of Arithmetic, 2nd rev. edn. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Frege, G. 1892/1952. Über Sinn und Bedeutung. Zeitschrift für Philosophie und philosophische Kritik 100: 2550. 1952: On sense and meaning. In P. T. Geach & M. Black (eds.), Translations from the Philosophical Writings of Gottlob Frege, pp. 56–78. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Frei, H. 1929. La Grammaire des fautes: Introduction à la linguistique fonctionnelle. Paris: Geuthner.Google Scholar
Freidin, R. 1975. The analysis of passives. Language 51: 384405.Google Scholar
Frellesvig, B. 2010. A History of the Japanese Language. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Freud, S. [1891]1953. On Aphasia. London: Imago.Google Scholar
Fries, C. C. 1927. The Teaching of the English Language. NY: Thomas Nelson & Sons.Google Scholar
Fries, C. C. 1945. Teaching and Learning English as a Foreign Language. Ann Arbor, MI: University of Michigan Press.Google Scholar
Fries, P. 1985. C. C. Fries’ view of language and linguistics. In Fries, P. (ed.), Toward an Understanding of Language: Charles Carpenter Fries in Perspective, pp. 6384. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Fries, P. 1987. Charles Fries’ views on psychology and ESL pedagogy. Jrnl. of Intensive English Studies 1: 1739.Google Scholar
Fries, P. 1989. Fries’ views on psychology: His nonmechanical view of human behavior. In Norris, W. & Strain, J. (eds.), Charles Carpenter Fries: His ‘Oral Approach’ for Teaching and Learning Foreign Languages, pp. 1120. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press.Google Scholar
Fromm, H., Ganz, P., & Huber, W. 1978. [Contributions to the special issue on the Neogrammarians]. Beiträge zur Geschichte der deutschen Sprache und Literatur 100. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer.Google Scholar
Fry, D. B., Abramson, A. S., Eimas, P. D., & Liberman, A. M. 1962. The identification and discrimination of synthetic vowels. Language and Speech 5: 171–89.Google Scholar
Fryba, A. 2013. Philologie et linguistique romanes: Institutionalisation des disciplines dans les universités suisses (1872–1945). Leuven: Peeters.Google Scholar
Fudge, E. C. 1969. Syllables. Jrnl. of Linguistics 3: 253–86.Google Scholar
Fujimura, O., Kiritani, S., & Ishida, H. 1973. Computer controlled radiography for observation of articulatory and other human organs. Computers in Biology and Medicine 3: 371–84.Google Scholar
Fukui, N. 1995. The principles-and-parameters approach: A comparative syntax of English and Japanese. In Shibatani, & Bynon, (eds.), pp. 327–72.Google Scholar
Fulcher, G. 2004. Deluded by artifices? The Common European Framework and harmonization. Language Assessment Quarterly: An Intl. Jrnl. 1: 253–66.Google Scholar
Gabelentz, G. von der. 1881. Chinesische Grammatik. Leipzig: Weigel.Google Scholar
Gabelentz, G. von der. 1891/1901–69–72. 1891: Die Sprachwissenshaft – Ihre Aufgaben, Methoden und bisherigen Engebnisse. Lepzig: Tauchnitz. 1901–69–72: 2nd edn., rev. expan. by A. von der Shulenburg. Tübingen: Gunter Narr.Google Scholar
Gabelentz, H. C. von der. 1833. Éléments de la grammaire mandchoue. Altenburg: Comptoir de la Littérature.Google Scholar
Gabelentz, H. C. von der. 1861–73. Die melanesischen Sprachen nach ihrem grammatischen Bau und ihrer Verwandtschaft unter sich und mit den malaiisch-polynesischen Sprachen. Leipzig: Abhandlungen der Sachsische Akademie der Wissenschaften, Philologisch-Historische Klasse.Google Scholar
Gabelentz, H. C. von der & Loebe, J. 1843. Ulfilas: Veteris et novi testamenti versionis gothicae fragmenta quae supersunt … cum glossario et grammatica linguae gothicae. Leipzig: F. A. Brockhaus.Google Scholar
Gal, S. 1992. Language, gender, and power: An anthropological perspective. In Hall, K. et al. (eds.), Locating Power. Proceedings of the Second Berkeley Women and Language Conference, April 4–5, vol. 1, pp. 153–61. Berkeley: University of California.Google Scholar
Gal, S. 1995. Language, gender, and power. An anthropological review. In Hall, K. & Bucholtz, M. (eds.), Gender Articulated: Language and the Socially Constructed Self, pp. 169–82. NY: Routledge.Google Scholar
Gallatin, A. 1836. A synopsis of the Indian tribes within the United States East of the Rocky Mountains and in the British and Russian possessions in North America. Transactions and Collections of the American Antiquarian Society 2: 1–422.Google Scholar
Gallatin, A. 1848. Hale’s Indians of North-west America, and vocabularies of North America. Transactions of the American Ethnological Society 2: xxiii–clxxx, 1–130.Google Scholar
Gallego, M. Á. 2006. El judeo-árabe medieval; Edición, traducción y estudio lingüístico del Kitāb al-taswi’a de Yonah ibn Ğanāḥ. Bern: Peter Lang.Google Scholar
Gambarara, D. 2005a. [in Section: Documents, Le Troisième cours de linguistique générale] Un texte original. Présentation des textes de Ferdinand de Saussure. Cahiers Ferdinand de Saussure 58: 2942.Google Scholar
Gambarara, D. 2005b (with the help of Mejia Quijano, C.). [in Section: Documents, Le Troisième cours de linguistique générale]. Établisssement du texte. F. de Saussure, Linguistique générale. Cahiers Ferdinand de Saussure 58: 7380.Google Scholar
Gambarara, D. 2012. Comment éditer les cours de Saussure: L’exemple de R. Godel. Cahiers Ferdinand de Saussure 65: 267–71.Google Scholar
Gamkrelidze, T. V. & Ivanov, V. V. 1972. Lingvisticˇeskaja tipologija i rekonstrukcija sistemy indo-evropejskix smycˇnyx [Linguistic typology and reconstruction of the system of Indo-European sounds]. Working Papers of the Conference on the Comparative-Historical Grammar of the Indo-European Languages, Moscow, pp. 15–18.Google Scholar
Gamkrelidze, T. V. & Ivanov, V. V. 1995. Indo-European and the Indo-Europeans: A Reconstruction and Historical Analysis of a Proto-Language and a Proto-Culture. J. Nichols (trans.). Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Gamut, L. T. F. 1991 Language Logic and Meaning,vol. i: Introduction to Logic; vol. ii: Intensional Logic and Logical Grammar. Chicago University Press. [L. T. F. Gamut is a collective pseudonym for J. van Benthem, J. Groenendijk, D. de Jongh, M. Stokhof, & H. Verkuyl.]Google Scholar
Ganault, J. 1992. Idéologie et organisation du savoir à l’Institut national: L’exemple du concours sur l’influence des signes. In Azouvi, F. (ed.), L’Institution de la raison: La révolution culturelle des idéologues, pp. 6381. Paris: J. Vrin.Google Scholar
Ganong, W. F., III. 1980. Phonetic categorization in auditory word perception. Jrnl. of Experimental Psychology: Human Perception and Performance 6: 110–25.Google Scholar
Garat, D-J. 1800. Analyse de l’entendement (Douzième Séance, 23 pluviôse). Séances des Écoles Normales, recueillies par des sténographes, et revues par les professeurs, new edn. Paris: À l’Imprimerie du Cercle-Social.Google Scholar
García, O. 1988. The education of biliterate and bicultural children in ethnic schools in the United States. Essays by the Spencer Fellows of the National Academy of Education, vol. iv, pp. 1978. Cambridge, MA: National Academy of Education.Google Scholar
Gardiner, A. H. 1919. Some thoughts on the subject of language. Man: A Monthly Record of Anthropological Science 19: 26.Google Scholar
Gardiner, A. H. 1927. Egyptian Grammar: Being an Introduction to the Study of Hieroglyphs. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Gardiner, A. H. 1932/1951. The Theory of Speech and Language. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Gardiner, A. H. 1947. Ancient Egyptian Onomastica, 3 vols. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Gardiner, A. H. 1962. My Working Years. Privately printed.Google Scholar
Gardner, H. 1985. The New Mind’s Science: A History of the Cognitive Revolution. NY: Basic Books.Google Scholar
Garfinkel, H. 1967. Studies in Ethnomethodology. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.Google Scholar
Garrod, S. 1985. Incremental pragmatic interpretation versus occasional inferencing during fluent reading. In Rickheit, G. & Strohner, H. (eds.), Inferences in Text Processing, pp. 161–81. Amsterdam: North-Holland.Google Scholar
Garroni, E. 1973. Progetto di semiotica. Rome: Laterza.Google Scholar
Garvin, P. L. (ed.). 1964. A Prague School Reader in Esthetics, Literary Structure and Style. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press.Google Scholar
Garza-Cuarón, B. 1991. Connotation and Meaning. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Gaskin, R. 1997. The Stoics on cases, predicates and the unity of the proposition. In Sorabji, (ed.), pp. 91108.Google Scholar
Gasparov, B. 1987. The ideological principles of Prague School phonology. In Pomorska, K. et al. (eds.), Language, Poetry and Poetics: The Generation of the 1890s: Jakobson, Trubetzkoy, Majakovskij, pp. 4978. Berlin: Mouton.Google Scholar
Gass, S. M. & Mackey, A. (eds.). 2012. The Routledge Handbook of Second Language Acquisition. NY: Routledge.Google Scholar
Gattegno, C. 1976. The Common Sense of Teaching Foreign Languages. NY: Educational Solutions.Google Scholar
Gazdar, G. 1979. Pragmatics: Implicature, Presupposition, and Logical Form. NY: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Gazdar, G. 1981. Phrase structure grammar. In Jacobson, P. & Pullum, G. K. (eds.), The Nature of Syntactic Representation, pp. 131–86. Dordrecht: D. Reidel.Google Scholar
Gazdar, G., Klein, E., Pullum, G. K., & Sag, I. A. 1985. Generalized Phrase Structure Grammar. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Geckeler, H. 1971. Strukturelle Semantik und Wortfeldtheorie. Munich: W. Fink Verlag.Google Scholar
Geeraerts, D. 1988. Cognitive Linguistics and the history of lexical semantics. In Rudzka-Ostyn, B. (ed.), Topics in Cognitive Linguistics, pp. 647–77. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Geeraerts, D. 1997. Diachronic Prototype Semantics. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Geeraerts, D. 2003 Decontextualizing and recontextualizing tendencies in 20th-century linguistics and literary theory. Mengel, In E. et al. (eds.), Anglistentag 2002 Bayreuth, pp. 369–79. Trier: Wissenschaftlicher Verlag.Google Scholar
Geertz, C. 1972. Linguistic etiquette. In Pride, & Holmes, (eds.), pp. 167–79.Google Scholar
Gehlen, A. 1979. Der Mensch: seine Natur und seine Stellung in der Welt, 13th impr. Wiesbaden: Quelle & Meier.Google Scholar
Gellner, E. 1983. Nations and Nationalism. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Genesee, F. 1978. A longitudinal evaluation of an early immersion school program. Canadian Jrnl. of Education/Revue canadienne de l’éducation 3 : 3150.Google Scholar
Gerard, L. & Scarborough, D. 1989. Language-specific lexical access of homographs by bilinguals. Jrnl. of Experimental Psych: Learning, Memory and Cognition 15: 305–15.Google Scholar
Gercke, A. & Norden, E. (eds.). 1927. Einleitung in die Altertumswissenschaft, vol. i, 3rd edn. Leipzig: B. G. Teubner.Google Scholar
Gernsbacher, M. A. & Kaschak, M. P. 2003. Neuroimaging studies of language production and comprehension. Annual Review of Psychology 54 : 91114.Google Scholar
Gerson, J. [1426]1960. De modis significandi. Glorieux, P. (ed.), Oeuvres complètes, vol. ix, pp. 625–42. Paris: Desclée et Cie.Google Scholar
Geschwind, N. 1965. Disconnection syndromes in animals and man. Brain 88 : 237–94.Google Scholar
Gessinger, J. & von Rahden, W. (eds.). 1989. Theorien vom Ursprung der Sprache. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Giacalone-Ramat, A. & Hopper, P. (eds.). 1998. The Limits of Grammaticalization. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Giacalone-Ramat, A. & Ramat, P. (eds.). 1998. The Indo-European Languages. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Gibbs, R. W. 1983. Do people always process the literal meanings of indirect requests? Jrnl. of Experimental Psychology: Learning, Memory, and Cognition 9 : 524–33.Google Scholar
Gibson, M. 1992. Milestones in the study of Priscian circa 800 – circa 1200. Viator 23: 1735.Google Scholar
Giles, H. 1973. Accent mobility: A model and some data. Anthropological Linguistics 15: 87109.Google Scholar
Giles, H., Bourhis, R. Y., & Taylor, D. M. 1977. Towards a theory of language in ethnic group relations. In Giles, H. (ed.), Language, Ethnicity and Intergroup Relations, pp. 307–48. NY: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Ginsburgh, V. & Weber, S. 2011. How Many Languages Do We Need? The Economics of Linguistic Diversity. Princeton University Press.Google Scholar
Girard, G. [1747]1982. Les Vrais Principes de la langue françoise. Swiggers, P. (ed.). Geneva: Librairie Droz.Google Scholar
Givón, T. 1971. Historical syntax and synchronic morphology: An archaeologist’s field trip. Papers from the Annual Meeting of the Chicago Linguistic Society 7: 394415. Chicago Linguistic Society.Google Scholar
Givón, T. 1975. Serial verbs and syntactic change: Niger Congo. In Li, C. (ed.), Word Order and Word Order Change, pp. 47112. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press.Google Scholar
Givón, T. 1976. Topic, pronoun and grammatical agreement. In Li, C. (ed.), Subject and Topic, pp. 151–88. NY: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Givón, T. 1979a. On Understanding Grammar. NY: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Givón, T. 1979b. Language typology in Africa: A critical review. Jrnl. of African Languages and Linguistics 1: 199224.Google Scholar
Givón, T. (ed.). 1983. Topic Continuity in Discourse: A Quantitative Cross-Language Study. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Givón, T. 1993. English Grammar – A Function Based Introduction. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Givón, T. 1995. Functionalism and Grammar. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Givón, T. 2001. Syntax: An Introduction, vol. i. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Glare, P. G. W. (ed.). 1985. Oxford Latin Dictionary. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Gleason, H. A., Jr. [1955]1961. An Introduction to Descriptive Linguistics, rev. edn. NY: Holt, Rinehart, & Winston.Google Scholar
Gleason, H. A., Jr. 1988. Theories in conflict. Unpub. ms, University of Toronto.Google Scholar
Glenberg, A. M., Meyer, M., & Lindem, K. 1987. Mental models contribute to foregrounding during text comprehension. Jrnl. of Memory and Language 26: 6983.Google Scholar
Glenberg, A. M. & Kaschak, M. P. 2002. Grounding language in action. Psychonomic Bulletin and Review 9: 558–65.Google Scholar
Gobineau, J. A., Comte de. 1853. Essai sur l’inégalité des races humaines, vol. i. Paris/Hanover: Firmin Didot/Rumpler.Google Scholar
Gobl, C. & Ní Chasaide, A. 1992. Acoustic characteristics of voice quality. Speech Communication 11: 481–90.Google Scholar
Goddard, C. 1994. Semantic theory and semantic universals. In Goddard, C. & Wierzbicka, A. (eds.), Semantic and Lexical Universals: Theory and Empirical Findings, pp. 729. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Goddard, C. 1998/2011. Semantic Analysis: A Practical Introduction. 2011: rev. 2nd edn. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Goddard, C. 2009. The ‘communication concept’ and the ‘language concept’ in everyday English. Australian Jrnl. of Linguistics 29: 1126.Google Scholar
Goddard, I. 1987. Review of J. H. Greenberg Language in the Americas. Current Anthropology 28: 656–7.Google Scholar
Goddard, I. 1996. The description of the native languages of North America before Boas. In Goddard, I. (ed.), Handbook of North American Indians, vol. xvii: Languages, pp. 1742. Washington, DC: Smithsonian Institution.Google Scholar
Godel, R. 1957. Les sources manuscrites du Cours de linguistique générale de F. de Saussure. PhD dissertation. Geneva: Librairie Droz.Google Scholar
Godel, R. 1969. A Geneva School Reader in Linguistics. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press.Google Scholar
Godfrey, J. J. 1967. Sir William Jones and Père Coeurdoux: A philological footnote. Journal of the American Oriental Society 98: 579.Google Scholar
Godwin, F. [1638]1995. The Man in the Moon. Butler, J. A. (ed., w. intro. and annot.). Ottawa: Dovehouse Editions.Google Scholar
Goffman, E. 1955. On face-work: An analysis of ritual elements in social interaction. Psychiatry: Jrnl. for the Study of Interpersonal Processes 18: 213–31.Google Scholar
Goffman, E. 1959. The Presentation of Self in Everyday Life. Garden City, NY: Doubleday Anchor.Google Scholar
Goffman, E. 1961. Encounters: Two Studies in the Sociology of Interaction. Indianapolis, IN: Bobbs-Merrill.Google Scholar
Goffman, E. 1963. Behavior in Public Places: Notes on the Social Organization of Gathering. NY: Free Press.Google Scholar
Goffman, E. 1964. The neglected situation. In Gumperz, & Hymes, (eds.), pp. 133–6.Google Scholar
Goffman, E. 1967. Interaction Ritual: Essays in Face-to-Face Behavior. NY: Anchor Books.Google Scholar
Goffman, E. 1974. Frame Analysis: An Essay on the Organization of Experience. NY: Harper & Row.Google Scholar
Goffman, E. 1978. Response cries. Language. 54: 787815.Google Scholar
Goffman, E. 1981. Forms of Talk. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press.Google Scholar
Goldberg, A. E. 1995. Constructions: A Construction Grammar Approach to Argument Structure. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Goldberg, A. E. 2006. Constructions at Work: The Nature of Generalization in Language. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Goldin-Meadow, S. 2003. Hearing gesture. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Goldinger, S. D. 1997. Words and voices: perception and production in an episodic lexicon. In Johnson, K. & Mullenix, J. W. (eds.), Talker Variability in Speech Processing, pp. 3366. Orlando, FL: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Goldsmith, J. A. 1974. An autosegmental typology of tone and how Japanese fits in. In Kaisse, E. & Hankamer, J. (eds.), Proceedings from the Fifth Regional Meeting of the North East Linguistics Society (NELS 5), pp. 172–82. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Linguistics Department.Google Scholar
Goldsmith, J. A. 1976a/1979. Autosegmental Phonology. PhD dissertation, MIT. 1979: NY: Garland Press.Google Scholar
Goldsmith, J. A. 1976b. An overview of autosegmental phonology. Linguistic Analysis 2: 2368.Google Scholar
Goldsmith, J. A. 1989. Autosegmental licensing, inalterability, and harmonic application. Papers from the 25th Meeting of the Chicago Linguistic Society, pp. 145–56. Chicago Linguistic Society.Google Scholar
Goldsmith, J. A. 1990. Autosegmental and Metrical Phonology. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Goldsmith, J. A. 1993a. Harmonic phonology. In Goldsmith, (ed.), pp. 2160. [Circulated in 1989.]Google Scholar
Goldsmith, J. A. (ed.) 1993b. The Last Phonological Rule: Reflections on Constraints and Derivations. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Goldsmith, J. A. 2008. Generative phonology in the late 1940s. Phonology 25: 123.Google Scholar
Goldsmith, J. A. 2011. The syllable. In Goldsmith, J., Riggle, J., & Yu, A. (eds.), The Handbook of Phonological Theory, 2nd edn., pp. 164–96. Chichester: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar
Goldsmith, J. A. & Laks, B. 2019. Battle in the Mind Fields. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Goldwasser, O. 1991. On dynamic canonicity in Late Egyptian: The literary letter and the personal prayer. Lingua Aegyptia 1: 129–41.Google Scholar
Goldwasser, O. 1999. ‘Low’ and ‘High’ dialects in Ramesside Egyptian. In Grunert, S. & Hafemann, I. (eds.), Textcorpus und Wörterbuch. Aspekte zur ägyptischen Lexicographie (Probleme der Ägyptologie 14), pp. 311–28. Leiden: E. J. Brill.Google Scholar
Goldwasser, O. 2002. Prophets, Lovers, and Giraffes: Wor(l)d Classification in Ancient Egypt (Göttinger Orientforschungen, IV. Reihe, Ägypten 38.3). Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag.Google Scholar
Golwalkar, M. S. 1939. We, or Our Nationhood Defined. Nagpur: Bharat Prakashan.Google Scholar
Goodenough, W. H. 1956. Componential analysis and the study of meaning. Language 32: 195216.Google Scholar
Goodman, N. 1951. The Structure of Appearance. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Goodwin, C. 1981. Conversational Organization: Interaction between Speakers and Hearers. NY: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Goodwin, C. 1994. Professional vision. American Anthropologist 96: 606–33.Google Scholar
Goodwin, C. & Duranti, A. 1992. Rethinking context: An introduction. In Duranti, & Goodwin, (eds.), pp. 142.Google Scholar
Goodwin, M. H. 1990. He-Said-She-Said: Talk as Social Organization among Black Children. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press.Google Scholar
Gordon, M. J. 2006. Interview with William Labov. Jrnl. of English Linguistics 34: 332–51.Google Scholar
Gosvāmin, Jiva. [16th c. ce]1972. Harināmāmr̥ta-Vyākaraṇa. Gosvami, B. (ed.), 2nd edn. Calcutta: Shri Chaitanya Research Institute.Google Scholar
Gottschalk, H. B. 1968. The De Audibilibus and peripatetic acoustics. Hermes 96: 435–60.Google Scholar
Gouin, F. 1880. L’art d’enseigner et d’étudier les langues. Paris: Sandoz & Fischbacher.Google Scholar
Gouws, R. H. & Prinsloo, D. J. 2005. Principles and Practice of South African Lexicography. Stellenbosch: Sun Press.Google Scholar
Grady, J. 1999. A typology of motivation for conceptual metaphor: Correlation vs. resemblance. In Gibbs, R. & Steen, G. (eds.), Metaphor in Cognitive Linguistics, pp. 79100. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Graesser, A. C., Singer, M., & Trabasso, T. 1994. Constructing inferences during narrative text comprehension. Psychological Review 101: 371–95.Google Scholar
Graham, L. R. 1995. Performing Dreams: Discourses of Immortality among the Xavante of Central Brazil. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press.Google Scholar
Gramsci, A. [1929–35]1975. Quaderni del carcere. Gerratana, V. (ed.), 4 vols. Turin: Einaudi.Google Scholar
Granger, S. & Paquot, M. 2008. Disentangling the phraseological web. In Granger, S. & Paquot, M. (eds.), Phraseology: An Interdisciplinary Perspective, pp. 2749. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Grassmann, H. 1863. Über die Aspiration und ihr gleichzeitiges Vorhandensein im Auslaute der Wurzeln. Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung 12: 81138.Google Scholar
Green, D. 1993. Towards a model of L2 comprehension and production. In Schreuder, R. & Weltens, B. (eds.), The Bilingual Lexicon, pp. 249–78. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Green, D. 1998. Mental control of the bilingual lexico-semantic system. Bilingualism: Language and Cogition 1: 6782.Google Scholar
Greenberg, J. H. 1960. General classification of Central and South American languages. In Wallace, A. (ed.), Men and Cultures, pp. 791–4. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press.Google Scholar
Greenberg, J. H. 1963. Some universals of grammar with particular reference to the order of meaningful elements. In Greenberg, J. H. (ed.), Universals of Language, pp. 73113. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Greenberg, J. H. 1966. Language Universals, with Particular Reference to Feature Hierarchies. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Greenberg, J. H. 1970. Some generalizations concerning glottalic consonants. Intl. Jrnl. of American Linguistics 36: 123–45.Google Scholar
Greenberg, J. H. (ed.). 1978a/2002. Universals of Human Language, vol. i: Method and Theory; vol. ii: Phonology; vol. iii: Word Structure; vol. iv: Syntax. 2002: 2nd edn. Stanford University Press.Google Scholar
Greenberg, J. H. 1978b. Diachrony, synchrony and language universals. In Greenberg, (ed.), vol. i, pp. 6192.Google Scholar
Greenberg, J. H. 1991. Some problems of Indo-European in historical perspective. In Lamb, S. M. & Mitchell, E. D. (eds.), Sprung from Some Common Source: Investigations into the Prehistory of Language, pp. 125–40. Stanford University Press.Google Scholar
Greenberg, J. H. 2000. Indo-European and its Closest Relatives: The Euroasiatic Language Family, vol. i: Grammar. Stanford University Press.Google Scholar
Greenberg, J. H. 2002. Indo-European and its Closest Relatives: The Euroasiatic Language Family, vol. ii: Lexicon. Stanford University Press.Google Scholar
Greene, J. 1972. Psycholinguistics: Chomsky and Psychology. Harmondsworth: Penguin Books.Google Scholar
Greene, T. M., Fries, C. C., Wriston, H. M., & Dighton, W. 1943. Liberal Education Re-Examined: Its Role in a Democracy. NY: Harper & Brothers.Google Scholar
Gregersen, F. & Canger, U. 2001. Honoris causa: Tribute to Eli. In Gronnum, N. & Rischel, J. (eds.), To Honour Eli Fischer-Jørgensen: Festschrift on the Occasion of her 90th Birthday, Feb. 11th, 2001, Travaux du Cercle linguistique de Copenhague 31: 2373. Copenhagen: C. A. Reitzel.Google Scholar
Greimas, A. J. 1966. Sémantique structurale. Paris: Larousse.Google Scholar
Greimas, A. J. 1972. Pour une théorie du discours poétique. In Greimas, A. J. (ed.), Essais de sémiotique poétique, pp. 524. Paris: Larousse.Google Scholar
Greimas, A. J. & Courté, s, J. 1979/1982. Sémiotique: Dictionnaire raisonné de la théorie du langage, vol. i. Paris: Hachette.Google Scholar
Grice, H. P. 1975/1989a/1989b. Logic and conversation. In Cole, P. & Morgan, J. L. (eds.), Syntax and Semantics 3: Speech Acts, pp. 4158. NY: Academic Press. 1989a: in D. Davidson & G. Harman (eds.), The Logic of Grammar, pp. 64–75. Encino, CA: Dickenson. 1989b: in Grice. Studies in the Way of Words, pp. 22–40. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Grice, H. P. 1978. Further notes on logic and conversation. In Cole, P. (ed.), Syntax and Semantics 9: Pragmatics, pp. 113–27. NY: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Grice, H. P. 1981. Presupposition and conversational implicature. In Cole, (ed.), pp. 183–98.Google Scholar
Griffith, F. L. & Petrie, W. M. F. 1889. Two Hieroglyphic Papyri from Tanis. London: Trübner & Co.Google Scholar
Grimes, J. 1975. The Thread of Discourse. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Grimes, J. (ed.). 1978. Papers on Discourse. Dallas, TX: Summer Institute of Linguistics.Google Scholar
Grimm, J. 1819/1822. Deutsche Grammatik, vol. i. 1822: vol. i, 2nd edn. Göttingen: Dieterich.Google Scholar
Grimm, J. [1851]1864. Über den Ursprung der Sprach. In Grimm, J., Kleinere Schriften, vol. i, pp. 255–98. Berlin: F. Dümmler.Google Scholar
Grimshaw, J. 1997. Projection, heads, and optimality. Linguistic Inquiry 28: 373422.Google Scholar
Grosjean, F. 1988. Studying bilinguals: Methodological and conceptual issues. Bilingualism: Language and Cognition 1: 131–49.Google Scholar
Gross, M. 1975. Méthodes en syntaxe: Le régime des constructions complétives. Paris: Éditions Herman.Google Scholar
Gross, M. 1994. The lexicon-grammar of a language: Application to French. In Asher, & Simpson (eds.), vol. iv, pp. 2195–205.Google Scholar
Grosz, B. J. 1977. The Representation and Use of Focus in Dialogue Understanding. Technical report #151. Menlo Park, CA: SRI International.Google Scholar
Gruber, J. S. 1965/1976. Studies in lexical relations. PhD dissertation, MIT. 1976: rev. vers.: Lexical Structures in Syntax and Semantics. Amsterdam: North-Holland.Google Scholar
Gruhn, R. 1997. Language classification and models of the peopling of the Americas. In McConvell, P. & Evans, N. (eds.), Archaeology and Linguistics: Aboriginal Australia in Global Perspective, pp. 99110. NY: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Gu, Y. [543]1985. Yu pian, repr. as Yuanben Yu pian can juan. Beijing: Zhonghua shuju.Google Scholar
Guberina, P. 1964. The audio-visual global and structural method. In Libbish, B. (ed.), Advances in the Teaching of Modern Languages, vol. i, pp. 117. Oxford: Pergamon Press.Google Scholar
Guberina, P. 1984. Bases théoriques de la méthode audio-visuelle structuro-globale – Une linguistique de la parole. In Coste, D. (ed.), Aspects d’une politique de diffusion du français langue étrangère depuis 1945. Matériaux pour une histoire, pp. 8599. Paris: CREDIF-Hatier.Google Scholar
Guillaume, G. 1929/1970/1984. Temps et verbe. Théorie des aspects, des modes et des temps. 1970/1984: Temps et verbe. Théorie des aspects, des modes et des temps, suivi de L’Architectonique du temps dans les langues classiques. Paris: Honoré Champion.Google Scholar
Guillaume, G. 1971. Leçons de linguistique: Psycho-systématique du language: Principes, méthodes et applications. Québec: Presses de l’Université Laval.Google Scholar
Gully, A. 1995. Grammar and Semantics in Medieval Arabic: A study of Ibn-Hisham’s ‘Mughni l-Labib’. Richmond: Curzon Press.Google Scholar
Gumperz, J. J. 1964. Linguistic and social interaction in two communities. American Anthropologist 66: 137–53.Google Scholar
Gumperz, J. J. 1965. The speech community. Encyclopedia of the Social Sciences 9: 382–86.Google Scholar
Gumperz, J. J. 1982a. Discourse Strategies. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Gumperz, J. J. (ed.). 1982b. Language and Social Identity. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Gumperz, J. J. 1984. Communicative competence revisited. In Schiffrin, (ed.), pp. 278–89.Google Scholar
Gumperz, J. J. 1992. Contextualization and understanding. In Duranti, & Goodwin, (eds.), pp. 229–52.Google Scholar
Gumperz, J. J. & Hymes, D. (eds.). 1964. The Ethnography of Communication. Special issue of American Anthropologist 66(2).Google Scholar
Gumperz, J. J. & Hymes, D. (eds.) 1972. Directions in Sociolinguistics: The Ethnography of Communication. NY: Holt, Rinehart, & Winston.Google Scholar
Gumperz, J. J. & Levinson, S. C. (eds.). 1996. Rethinking Linguistic Relativity. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Gundel, J., Hedberg, N., & Zacharski, R. 1993. Cognitive status and the form of referring expressions in discourse. Language 69: 274307.Google Scholar
Gunderson, K. (ed.). 1975. Language, Mind and Knowledge (Minnesota Studies in the Philosophy of Science 7). Minneapolis, MN: University of Minnesota Press.Google Scholar
Günther, H. F. K. 1934. Die Nordische Rasse bei den Indogermanen Asiens: Zugleich ein Beitrag zur Frage nach der Urheimat und Rassenherkunft der Indogermanen. Munich: Lehmanns Verlag.Google Scholar
Guthrie, W. K. C. 1979. A History of Greek Philosophy,vol. i: The Earlier Presocratics and the Pythagoreans. Repr. edn. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Guthrie, W. K. C. 1998. The Sophists. Repr. edn. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Haas, M. R. 1969. Grammar or lexicon? The American Indian side of the question from Duponceau to Powell. Intl. Jrnl. of American Linguistics 35: 239–55.Google Scholar
Haas, M. R. 1978. Language, Culture, and History: Essays by Mary R. Haas. Select. and intro. by A. S. Dil. Stanford University Press.Google Scholar
Haas, W. 1958. Review of Chomsky, Noam. 1957. Syntactic Structures. Archivum Linguisticum 10: 5054.Google Scholar
Habermas, J. 1988. Theorie des kommunikativen Handelns, 2 vols. Frankfurt am Main: Suhrkamp Verlag.Google Scholar
Habermas, J. 1989. The Structural Transformation of the Public Sphere: An Inquiry into a Category of Bourgeois Society. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Hacking, I. 2006. Making up people. London Review of Books 28: 23–6.Google Scholar
Hahn, K. 1852. Althochdeutsche Grammatik. Prague: Calve.Google Scholar
Haiman, J. 1983. Iconic and economic motivation. Language 59: 781819.Google Scholar
Haiman, J. 1985a. Natural Syntax: Iconicity and Erosion. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Haiman, J. (ed.). 1985b. Iconicity in Syntax. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Haiman, J. 1991. From V/2 to subject clitics. In Traugott, & Heine, (eds.), vol. ii, pp. 135–57.Google Scholar
Hajicová, E. 1995. Prague School syntax and semantics. In Koerner, & Asher, (eds.), pp. 253–62.Google Scholar
Hakuta, K. 1985. Mirror of Language: The Debate on Bilingualism. NY: Basic Books.Google Scholar
Hale, A. (ed.). 1973. Clause, Sentence, and Discourse Patterns in Selected Languages of Nepal. Norman, OK: Summer Institute of Linguistics.Google Scholar
Hale, B. 1997. Rule-following, objectivity and meaning. In Hale, B. & Wright, C. (eds.), A Companion to the Philosophy of Language, pp. 369–96. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Hall, E. T. 1959. The Silent Language. Garden City, NY: Doubleday.Google Scholar
Halle, M. 1959. The Sound Pattern of Russian: A Linguistic and Acoustical Investigation. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Halle, M. 1962. Phonology in generative grammar. Word 18: 5472.Google Scholar
Halle, M. 1964. On the bases of phonology. In Fodor, J. A. & Katz, J. J. (eds.), The Structure of Language, pp. 604–12. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.Google Scholar
Halle, M. & Stevens, K. 1969. On the feature “Advanced Tongue Root.” MIT Research Laboratory of Electronics Quarterly Progress Report 94: 209–15.Google Scholar
Halliday, M. A. K. 1961. Categories of the theory of grammar. Word 17: 241–94.Google Scholar
Halliday, M. A. K. 1977. Text as semantic choice in social contexts. In van Dijk, T. A. & Petöfi, J. (eds.), Grammars and Descriptions: Studies in Text Theory and Text Analysis, pp. 176225. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Halliday, M. A. K. 1978. Language as Social Semiotic: The Social Interpretation of Language and Meaning. London: Edward Arnold.Google Scholar
Halliday, M. A. K. 1985a/1994/2004 Introduction to Functional Grammar. 1st/2nd edns. London: Edward Arnold. 2004: 3rd edn. (rev. by C. Mathiessen). London: Hodder Arnold.Google Scholar
Halliday, M. A. K. 1985b/1989. Spoken and Written Language. Geelong, Vic.: Deakin University Press. 1989: repr. London: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Halliday, M. A. K. 2002a–2009/2007. Webster, J. (ed.), The Collected Works of M. A. K. Halliday. 2007: vol. ix, Language and Education. London: Bloomsbury Publishers.Google Scholar
Halliday, M. A. K. 2002b. M. A. K. Halliday. In Brown, & Law, (eds.), pp. 116–26.Google Scholar
Halliday, M. A. K. & Hasan, R. 1976. Cohesion in English. London: Longman.Google Scholar
Halliday, M. A. K. & Hasan, R. 1985/1989. Language, Context and Text: Aspects of Language in a Social-Semiotic Perspective. Geelong, Vic.: Deakin University Press. 1989: 2nd edn. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Halliday, M. A. K. & Matthiessen, C. 1999. Construing Experience Through Meaning: A Language-based Approach to Cognition. London: Cassell.Google Scholar
Han, Z. H. & Tarone, E. 2014. Interlanguage: Forty Years Later. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Hanks, P. (ed.). 1979a. Collins Dictionary of the English Language. London: Collins.Google Scholar
Hanks, P. 1979b. To what extent does a dictionary definition define? In Intl. Jrnl. of Applied Linguistics 45/46: 32–8.Google Scholar
Hanks, P. 2009. The impact of corpora on dictionaries. In Baker, P. (ed.), Contemporary Corpus Linguistics, pp. 214–36. London: Continuum.Google Scholar
Hanks, W. F. 1990. Referential Practice: Language and Lived Space Among the Maya. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Hanks, W. F. 1996. Language and Communicative Practices. Boulder, CO: Westview Press.Google Scholar
Hansen, M.-B. 1995. Puis in spoken French: From time adjunct to additive conjunct? Jrnl. of French Language Studies 5: 3156.Google Scholar
Hansen, M.-B. 1997. Alors and donc in spoken French: A reanalysis. Jrnl. of Pragmatics 28: 153–87.Google Scholar
Harley, B. 1994. Maintaining French as a second language in adulthood. Canadian Modern Language Review 50: 688713.Google Scholar
Harris, A. C. & Campbell, L. 1995. Historical Syntax in Cross-linguistic Perspective. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Harris, J. 1751. Hermes: or, a Philosophical Inquiry concerning Language and Universal Grammar. London: Printed by H. Woodfall, for J. Nourse and P. Vaillant, in the Strand.Google Scholar
Harris, R(andall) A. 1993. The Linguistics Wars. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Harris, R(oy) A. 1983/1987. Commentary. In Saussure, F. de, Course in General Linguistics. R. Harris, trans., comment. London: Duckworth.Google Scholar
Harris, R. A. 1987. Reading Saussure: A Critical Commentary on the Cours de linguistique générale. London: Duckworth.Google Scholar
Harris, R. A. (ed.). 1988. Linguistic Thought in England 1914–1945. London: Duckworth.Google Scholar
Harris, R. A. 2001. Saussure and his Interpreters. Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar
Harris, Z. S. 1942/1958. Morpheme alternants in linguistic analysis. Language 18: 169–80. 1958: repr. in Joos (ed.), pp. 109–15.Google Scholar
Harris, Z. S. 1944. Simultaneous components in phonology. Language 20: 181205.Google Scholar
Harris, Z. S. 1946/1958. From morpheme to utterance. Language 22: 161–83. 1958: repr. in Joos (ed.), pp. 142–53.Google Scholar
Harris, Z. S. 1948. Componential analysis of a Hebrew paradigm. Language 24: 8791.Google Scholar
Harris, Z. S. 1951a. Review of Sapir 1949. Language 27: 288333.Google Scholar
Harris, Z. S. 1951b. Methods in Structural Linguistics. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Harris, Z. S. 1952. Discourse analysis. Language 28: 130.Google Scholar
Harris, Z. S. 1957. Co-occurrence and transformation in linguistic structure. Language 33: 283340.Google Scholar
Harshman, R., Ladefoged, P., & Goldstein, L. 1977. Factor analysis of tongue shapes. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 62: 693707.Google Scholar
’t Hart, J., Collier, R., & Cohen, A. 1990. A Perceptual Study of Intonation: An Experimental-Phonetic Approach to Speech Melody. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Hartley, D. [1749]1966. Observations on Man, his Frame, his Duty, and his Expectations. London: S. Richardson. 1966: Gainesville, FL: Scholars’ Facsimiles.Google Scholar
Hartmann, R. R. K. (ed.). 1979. Dictionaries and their Users: Papers from the 1978 BAAL Seminar on Lexicography (Exeter Linguistic Studies 4). University of Exeter.Google Scholar
Hartmann, R. R. K. (ed.). 1984. LEXeter’83 Proceedings. Lexicographica: Series Maior. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer.Google Scholar
Haspelmath, M. 1997. Indefinite Pronouns. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Haspelmath, M. 1998. Does grammaticalization need reanalysis? Studies in Language 22: 315–51.Google Scholar
Haspelmath, M. 1999. Why is grammaticalization irreversible? Linguistics 37: 1043–68.Google Scholar
Haspelmath, M. 2004. On directionality in language change with particular reference to grammaticalization. In Fischer, et al. (eds.), pp. 1744.Google Scholar
Haspelmath, M., Dryer, M. S., Gil, D., & Comrie, B. (eds.). 2005. World Atlas of Language Structures. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Haßler, G. 1999. Diversity of human languages and universals of thought: An eighteenth-century debate in the Berlin Academy. In Cram, D. et al. (eds.), History of Linguistics 1996, vol. ii: From Classical to Contemporary Linguistics, pp. 163–74. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Haßler, G. 2000. Les séries de textes dans l’histoire de la linguistique. In Anglebert, A. et al. (eds.), Actes du XXIIe Congrès International de Linguistique et Philologie Romanes,vol. i: L’Histoire de la linguistique, médiatrice de théories, pp. 97104. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer.Google Scholar
Haßler, G. & Neis, C. 2009. Lexikon sprachtheoretischer Grundbegriffe des 17. und 18. Jahrhunderts. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Haugen, E. 1953. The Norwegian Language in America: A Study in Bilingual Behavior. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press.Google Scholar
Haugen, E. 1956. The syllable in linguistic description. In Halle, M. (ed.), For Roman Jakobson, pp. 213–21. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Haugen, E. 1966a. Dialect, language, nation. American Anthropologist 68: 922–35.Google Scholar
Haugen, E. 1966b/1983. Language Conflict and Language Planning: The Case of Modern Norwegian. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. 1983: rev. & expan. edn.Google Scholar
Haugen, E. [1950]1972. First Grammatical Treatise: The Earliest Germanic Phonology. An Edition, Translation and Commentary, 2nd edn. London: Longman.Google Scholar
Haugen, E. & Twaddell, W. F. 1942. Facts and phonemics. Language 18: 228–37.Google Scholar
Hauser, M. D., Chomsky, N., & Fitch, W. T. 2002.The faculty of language: What is it, who has it, and how did it evolve? Science 298(5598): 1569–79.Google Scholar
Hausmann, F. J. 1989. Le dictionnaire de collocations. In Hausmann, et al. (eds.), vol. i, pp. 1010–19.Google Scholar
Hausmann, F. J. Ungeheuer, G., Steger, H., Wiegand, H. E., & Burkhandt, A. (eds.). 1989–91. Wörterbücher: Ein internationales Handbuch zur Lexikgraphie / Dictionaries: An International Encyclopedia of Lexicography / Dictionnaires: Encyclopédie internationale de lexicographie, vols. i–iii. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Havet, L. 1916. Nécrologie. Michel Bréal. École pratique des hautes études. Section des sciences historiques et philologiques. Annuaire 1913–1914, pp. 3842. Paris.Google Scholar
Haviland, J. B. 1996. Projections, transpositions, and relativity. In Gumperz, & Levinson, (eds.), pp. 271323.Google Scholar
Haviland, S. E. & Clark, H. H. 1974. What’s new? Acquiring new information as a process in comprehension. Jrnl. of Verbal Learning and Verbal Behavior 13 : 512–21.Google Scholar
Hawaydı̄, A. M. 1999. Kitāb al-muwāzana bayn al-luġa al-‘ibrāniyya wa-l-‘arabiyya, Abū Ibrahı̄m Yiṣḥaq ben Barūn. Mirkaz al-darasat al-sharqi, Cairo University.Google Scholar
Hawkins, J. A. 1983. Word Order Universals. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Hawkins, J. A. 1990. Seeking motives for change in typological variation. In Croft, W. et al. (eds.), Studies in Typology and Diachrony, pp. 95128. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Hayes, B. 1980/1985. A Metrical Theory of Stress Rules. PhD dissertation, MIT. 1985: NY: Garland Press.Google Scholar
Hayes, B. 2009. Introductory phonology. Malden, MA: John Wiley & Sons.Google Scholar
Haym, R. 1954. Herder. Berlin: Aufbau-Verlag.Google Scholar
He, J. 1985. Zhongguo gudai yuyanxue shi [History of Ancient Linguistics in China]. Henan renmin chubanshe.Google Scholar
Headland, T. N., Pike, K. L., & Harris, M. (eds.). 1990. Emics and Etics: The Insider/Outsider Debate. Newbury Park, CA: Sage.Google Scholar
Heath, S. B. 1982. What no bedtime story means: Narrative skills at home and school. Language in Society 11: 4976.Google Scholar
Heath, S. B. 1983. Ways with Words. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Heid, S. & Hawkins, S. 2000. An acoustical study of long domain /r/ and /l/ coarticulation. Proceedings of the Fifth Seminar on Speech Production: Models and Data, and CREST Workshop on Models of Speech Production: Motor Planning and Articulatory Modelling, pp. 7780. Munich: Institut für Phonetik and Sprachliche Kommunikation.Google Scholar
Heidegger, M. [1927]1986. Sein und Zeit, 16th edn. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer.Google Scholar
Heidegger, M. 1959. Unterwegs zur Sprache. Pfullingen: Günther Neske.Google Scholar
Heim, I. R. 1983. File change semantics and the familiarity theory of definiteness. In Bäuerle, R. et al. (eds.), Meaning, Use, and the Interpretation of Language, pp. 164–89. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Heim, I. R. 1988. The Semantics of Definite and Indefinite Noun Phrases. NY: Garland Press.Google Scholar
Heims, S. J. 1991. The Cybernetics Group. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Heine, B. 1976. A Typology of African Languages (Based on the Order of Meaningful Elements). Berlin: D. Reimer.Google Scholar
Heine, B. 1980. Language typology and linguistic reconstruction: The Niger-Congo case. Jrnl. of African Linguistics 2: 95112.Google Scholar
Heine, B. & Kuteva, T. 2007. The Genesis of Grammar. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Heine, B. & Reh, M. 1984. Grammaticalization and Reanalysis in African Languages. Hamburg: Helmut Buske Verlag.Google Scholar
Heine, B., Claudi, U., & Hunnemeyer, F. 1991. Grammaticalization: A Conceptual Framework. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Helmholtz, H. L. F. von. 1863. Die Lehre von den Tonempfindungen als theoretische Grundlage für die Theorie der Musik. Braunschweig: Vieweg & Sohn.Google Scholar
Helsinki Corpus of English Texts. 1991. [M. Rissanen & O. Ihalainen] University of Helsinki.Google Scholar
Hemacandra. [11th c. ce]1950. Hema-Śabdānus΄āsana, w. the auto-comm. Br̥hadvr̥tti, part 1. 1950: repr. C. Sūri (ed.). Ujjain: Chaganramji Amarchandraji Shiroliya.Google Scholar
Henderson, E. J. A. 1949/1970. Prosodies in Siamese: A study in synthesis. Asia Major,n. s., 1: 189215. 1970: repr. w. emend., in F. Palmer (ed.), Prosodic Analysis, pp. 27–53. London: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Henke, W. 1966. Dynamic articulatory model of speech production using computer simulation. PhD dissertation. MIT.Google Scholar
Henne, H. & Kilian, J. (eds.). 1998. Hermann Paul: Sprachtheorie, Sprachgeschichte, Philologie. Reden, Abhandlungen und Biographie. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer.Google Scholar
Herbst, T. 1988. A valency model for nouns in English. Jrnl. of Linguistics 24: 265301.Google Scholar
Herbst, T., Heath, D., Roe, I. F., & Götz, D. 2004. A Valency Dictionary of English: A Corpus-Based Analysis of the Complementation Patterns of English Verbs, Nouns, and Adjectives. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Herder, J. G. [1767]1969/1992. Menze, E. & Menges, K. (eds.), Fragments on Recent German Literature. University Park, PA: The Pennsylvania State University.Google Scholar
Herder, J. G. 1772/1978/1986. Abhandlung über den Ursprung der Sprache, welche den von der Königl. Academie der Wissenschaften für das Jahr 1770 gesezten Preis erhalten hat. Berlin: Bey Christian Friedrich Voss. 1978: Über den Ursprung der Sprache. In Herders Werke in fünf Bänden, vol. ii, pp. 89–200. Berlin: Aufbau-Verlag. 1986: Essay on the origin of language. A. Gode (trans.). In Moran & Gode (eds.), pp. 85–166.Google Scholar
Herder, J. G. [1799]1969. Eine Metakritik zur Kritik der reinen Vernunft. 1, Verstand und Erfahrung. Gottfried, J. (ed.). Brussels: Éditions Culture & Civilisation.Google Scholar
Herdina, P. & Jessner, U. 2002. A Dynamic Model of Multilingualism: Perspective of Change in Psycholinguistics. Clevedon: Multilingual Matters.Google Scholar
Heritage, J. 1984. Garfinkel and Ethnomethodology. Cambridge: Polity Press.Google Scholar
Heritage, J. 1985. Analyzing new interviews: Aspects of the production of talk for an overhearing audience. In van Dijk, (ed.), vol. iii, 95119.Google Scholar
Hermann, E. 1931. Lautgesetz und Analogie. Berlin: Weidmann.Google Scholar
Hervás, L. 1800–5. Católogo de las lenguas de las naciones conocidas. Madrid: Imprenta de la Administración del Real Arbitrio de Beneficencia.Google Scholar
Hickock, G., Love-Geffen, T., & Klima, E. S. 2002. The role of the left hemisphere in sign language comprehension. Brain and Language 82: 167–78.Google Scholar
Hiersche, R. 1977. ‘Aspekt’ in der stoischen Tempuslehre. Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung 91: 275–87.Google Scholar
Hill, J. H. 1993. Structure and practice in language shift. In Hyltenstam, K. & Viberg, A. (eds.), Progression and Regression in Language: Sociocultural, Neuropsychological and Linguistic Perspectives, pp. 6893. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Hill, J. H. 1998. Today there is no respect: Nostalgia, ‘respect,’ and oppositional discourse in Mexicano (Nahuatl) language ideology. In Schieffelin, B. et al. (eds.), Language Ideologies: Practice and Theory, pp. 6886. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Hill, J. H. & Irvine, J. (eds.). 1993. Responsibility and Evidence in Oral Discourse. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Himmelmann, N. 2004. Lexicalization and grammaticization: Opposite or orthogonal? In Bisang, et al. (eds.), pp. 2142.Google Scholar
Hirano, M. & Ohala, J. 1969. Use of hooked-wire electrodes for electromyography of the intrinsic laryngeal muscles. Jrnl. of Speech and Hearing Research 12: 362–73.Google Scholar
Hirose, H. & Gay, T. 1972. The activity of the intrinsic laryngeal muscles in voicing control: An electromyographic study. Phonetica 25: 140–64.Google Scholar
Hirt, H. 1927. Indogermanische Grammatik. Part i. Heidelberg: Winter Verlag.Google Scholar
Hjelmslev, L. 1928. Principes de grammaire générale. Copenhagen: Høst & Søn.Google Scholar
Hjelmslev, L. 1935–7. La Catégorie des cas: Étude de linguistique générale, 2 vols. Aarhus: Universitetsforlaget.Google Scholar
Hjelmslev, L. [1939]1973. Forme et substance linguistiques. In Essais de linguistique II, pp. 34. Copenhagen: Nordisk Sprog- og Kulturforlag.Google Scholar
Hjelmslev, L. 1942. Langue et parole. Cahiers Ferdinand de Saussure 2: 2944.Google Scholar
Hjelmslev, L. 1943/1961. Omkring sprogteoriens grundlaeggelse. Copenhagen: Munksgaard. 1961: F. J. Whitfield (trans.), Prolegomena to a Theory of Language. Madison, WI: University of Wisconsin.Google Scholar
Hjelmslev, L. 1948. Structural analysis of language. In Hjelmslev, L. (ed.), Essais linguistiques = Travaux du Cercle linguistique de Copenhague 12: 2735. Copenhagen: Nordisk Sprog- og Kulturforlag.Google Scholar
Höchheimer, M. ben H. ha-K. [1793]1966. Sefer ha-Miklol lĕ-RaDaK. Repr. Jerusalem: Lyck.Google Scholar
Hock, H. H. 1985. Yes, Virginia, syntactic reconstruction is possible. Studies in the Linguistic Sciences 15: 4960.Google Scholar
Hock, H. H. 1999. Through a glass darkly: Modern ‘racial’ interpretations vs. textual and general prehistoric evidence on ārya and dāsa/dasyu in Vedic society. In Bronkhorst, J. & Deshpande, M. M. (eds.), Aryan and Non-Aryan in South Asia: Evidence, Interpretation, and Ideology, pp. 145–74. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Hock, H. H. 2003. Did Indo-European linguistics prepare the ground for Nazism? Lessons from the past for the present and the future. In Bauer, B. L. M. & Pinault, G.-J. (eds.), Language in Time and Space: A Festschrift for Werner Winter on the Occasion of His 80th Birthday, pp. 167–87. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Hock, H. H. 2014. The Sanskrit phonetic tradition and western phonetics. In Sastry, V. K. (ed.), Sanskrit and Development of World Thought, pp. 5380. New Delhi: Rashtriya Sanskrit Sansthan/D. K. Printworld.Google Scholar
Hockett, C. F. 1942/1958. A system of descriptive phonology. Language 18: 321. 1958: repr. in Joos (ed.), pp. 97–107.Google Scholar
Hockett, C. F. 1947a. Componential analysis of Sierra Popoluca. Intl.. Jrnl. of American Linguistics 13: 258–67.Google Scholar
Hockett, C. F. 1947b/1958. Peiping phonology. Jrnl. of the American Oriental Society 67: 253–67. 1958: repr. Joos (ed.), pp. 217–28.Google Scholar
Hockett, C. F. 1952. Review of Travaux du Cercle Linguistique de Copenhague, V: Recherches Structurales. Intl. Jrnl. of American Linguistics 18: 8699.Google Scholar
Hockett, C. F. 1954/1958. Two models of grammatical description, Word 10: 210–34. 1958: repr. in Joos (ed.), 386–99.Google Scholar
Hockett, C. F. 1955. A Manual of Phonology. Baltimore, MD: Waverly Press.Google Scholar
Hockett, C. F. 1958. A Course in Modern Linguistics. NY: Macmillan.Google Scholar
Hockett, C. 1960. The origin of speech. Scientific American 203: 88111.Google Scholar
Hockett, C. F. 1968. The State of the Art. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Hockett, C. F. (ed.). 1970. A Leonard Bloomfield Anthology. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press.Google Scholar
Hockett, C. F. 1987. Refurbishing our Foundations. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Hockett, C. F. 1995. The birth and deaths of the phoneme. Idéologies dans le monde anglo-saxon 8: 550.Google Scholar
Hodge, B. & Kress, G. R. 1988. Social semiotics. Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press.Google Scholar
Hodge, C. 1970. The linguistic cycle. Linguistic Sciences 13: 17.Google Scholar
Hoenigswald, H. M. 1954. Media, Neutrum und Zirkumflex. In Sprachgeschichte und Wortbedeutung: Festschrift Albert Debrunner, pp. 209–12. Bern: Francke Verlag.Google Scholar
Hoenigswald, H. M. 1985. Sir William Jones and historiography. In Acson, V. Z. & Leed, R. L. (eds.), For Gordon H. Fairbanks, pp. 64–6. Honolulu, HI: University of Hawaii Press.Google Scholar
Hoey, M. 2005. Lexical Priming: A New Theory of Words and Language. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Hoff, E. & Shatz, M. (eds.). 2007. Blackwell Handbook of Language Development. Malden, MA: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Hofman, R. 1993. The linguistic preoccupations of the St Gall Priscian. In Law, (ed.), pp. 111–26.Google Scholar
Hoijer, H. 1954. The Sapir–Whorf Hypothesis. In Hoijer, H. (ed.), Language in Culture: Conference on the Interrelations of Language and Other Aspects of Culture, pp. 92105. Chicago University Press.Google Scholar
Holder, W. 1669. Elements of Speech: An Essay of Inquiry into the Natural Production of Letters: With an Appendix Concerning Persons Deaf and Dumb. London: J. Martyn.Google Scholar
Holenstein, E. 1976. Roman Jakobson’s Approach to Language: Phenomenological Structuralism. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press.Google Scholar
Holm, G. 1972. Carl Johan Schlyter and textual scholarship. Saga och Sed: Kungl. Gustav Adolf Akademiens Årsbok, pp. 48–80.Google Scholar
Holmes, J. 1997. Women, Men and Language. London: Longman.Google Scholar
Holmes, J. N. 1973. The influence of glottal waveform on the naturalness of speech from a parallel formant synthesizer. IEEE Transactions on Audio and Electroacoustics, vol. AU-21( 3), pp. 298305.Google Scholar
Holmes, J. N., Mattingly, I. G., & Shearme, J. N. 1964. Speech synthesis by rule. Language and Speech 7: 127–43.Google Scholar
Holt, J. 1943. Études d’aspect. Acta Jutlandica 15. Aarhus: Universitetsforlaget.Google Scholar
Holt, J. 1967. Contribution à l’analyse fonctionnelle du contenu linguistique. Langages 6: 5969.Google Scholar
Holt, R. (ed.). 1878. The Ormulum. R. M. White notes and glossary. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Holtgraves, T. M. 1999. Comprehending indirect replies: When and how are their conveyed meanings activated? Jrnl. of Memory and Language 41: 519–40.Google Scholar
Holtgraves, T. (ed). 2014. The Oxford Handbook of Language and Social Psychology. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Holtz, L. 1981. Donat et la tradition de l’enseignement grammatical. Étude sur l’Ars Donati et sa diffusion (IVe–IXe siècle) et édition critique. Paris: Centre national de la recherche scientifique.Google Scholar
Holtz, L. 1988. Les innovations théoriques de la grammaire carolingienne: Peu de chose. Pourquoi? In Rosier, I. (ed.). L’Héritage des grammariens latins de l’antiquité aux lumières, pp. 133–45. Paris: Société pour l’Information grammaticale.Google Scholar
Hombert, I. 1978. Whitney: Notes sur une entreprise théorique pré-saussurienne. In Normand, C. (ed.), Saussure et la linguistique pré-saussurienne [=Langages 49], pp. 112–19. Paris.Google Scholar
Honey, J. 1997. Language is Power: The Story of Standard English and its Enemies. London: Faber & Faber.Google Scholar
Hooper, J. Bybee. See also J. Bybee.Google Scholar
Hooper, J. B. 1973. Aspects of natural generative phonology. PhD dissertation. University of California, Los Angeles.Google Scholar
Hooper, J. B. 1979. Substantive principles in natural generative phonology. In Dinnsen, D. (ed.), Current Approaches to Phonological Theory, pp. 106–25. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press.Google Scholar
Hopper, P. 1973. Glottalized and murmured occlusives in Indo-European. Glossa 7: 141–66.Google Scholar
Hopper, P. 1984. The discourse basis for lexical categories in universal grammar. Language 60: 703–52.Google Scholar
Hopper, P. 1987. Emergent grammar. In Proceedings of the Thirteenth Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society 13, pp. 139–57. Berkeley Linguistic Society.Google Scholar
Hopper, P. 1990. The emergence of the category ‘Proper Name’ in discourse. In Davis, H. & Taylor, T. (eds.), Redefining Linguistics, pp. 149–62. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Hopper, P. 1992. Emergence of grammar. In Bright (ed.), pp. 364–67.Google Scholar
Hopper, P. 1997. When ‘grammar’ and discourse clash. In Bybee, J. et al. (eds.), Essays on Language Function and Language Type: Dedicated to T. Givón, pp. 231–50. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Hopper, P. & Thompson, S. 1980. Transitivity in grammar and discourse. Language 56: 251–99.Google Scholar
Hopper, P. J. & Traugott, E. C. 1993/2003. Grammaticalization, 1st/2nd edns. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Horn, L. R. 1972. On the Semantic Properties of the Logical Operators in English. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Linguistics Club.Google Scholar
Horn, L. R. 1984. Toward a new taxonomy for pragmatic inference: Q-based and R-based implicature. In Schiffrin (ed.), pp. 1142.Google Scholar
Horn, L. R. & Ward, G. (eds.). 2004. The Handbook of Pragmatics. Malden, MA: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Hornby, A. S. 1950. The situational approach in language teaching. English Language Teaching 4: 98103.Google Scholar
Horne Tooke, J. [1786]1805/2002. EPEA PTEROENTA, or the Diversions of Purley, 2 vols. London: J. Johnsons. 2002: repr. London: Bloomsbury.Google Scholar
Hostetter, A. B. 2011. When do gestures communicate? A meta-analysis. Psychological Bulletin 137: 297315.Google Scholar
Hostetter, A. B. & Alibali, M. W. 2008. Visible embodiment: Gestures as simulated action. Psychonomic Bulletin and Review 15: 495514.Google Scholar
Householder, F. W. 1952. Review of Methods in Structural Linguistics by Zellig S. Harris. Intl. Jrnl. of American Linguistics 18: 260–8.Google Scholar
Hovdhaugen, E., Karlsson, F., Henriksen, C., & Sigurd, B. 2000. The History of Linguistics in the Nordic Countries. Lund: Societas Scientiarum Fennica.Google Scholar
Hovelacque, A. 1877. The Science of Language: Linguistics, Philology, Etymology. London: Chapman & Hall.Google Scholar
Howatt, A. P. R. 1984. A History of English Language Teaching. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Hrabanus, M. 1996. De institutione clericorum [Instruction of the Clergy]; Studien und Edition (Freiburger Beiträge zur mittelalterlichen Geschichte 7). Frankfurt am Main: Peter Lang.Google Scholar
Huang, Y. 2000. Anaphora: A Cross-linguistic Study. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Huck, G. J. & Goldsmith, J. A. 1995. Ideology and Linguistic Theory: Noam Chomsky and the Deep Structure Debates. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Hudson, A. 2002. Outline of a theory of diglossia. Intl. Jrnl. of the Sociology of Language 157: 148.Google Scholar
Hudson, A. (ed.). 1978. Selections from English Wycliffite Writings. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Hudson, N. 1994. Writing and European Thought 1600–1830. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Hudson, R. 1984. Word Grammar. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Hudson, R. 1990. English Word Grammar. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Hudson, R. 2009. A history of the LAGB: The first fifty years. Jrnl. of Linguistics 45: 130.Google Scholar
Hugo, H. 1617. De prima scribendi origine. Antwerp: Plantijn.Google Scholar
Huibregtse, I. 2001. Effecten en didactiek van tweetalig voortgezet onderwijs in Nederland. PhD dissertation, University of Utrecht.Google Scholar
Hültenschmidt, E. 1983. Tendenzen und Entwicklungen der Sprachwissenschaft um 1800. Ein Vergleich zwischen Frankreich und Preussen. In Cerquiglini, B. & Gumbrecht, H. U. (eds.), Der Diskurs der Literatur – und Sprachhistorie, pp. 135–66. Frankfurt am Main: Suhrkamp Verlag.Google Scholar
Humblé, P. 2001. Dictionaries and Language Learners. Frankfurt am Main: Haag & Herchen.Google Scholar
Humboldt, W. von. [1792]1984. Ideen zu einem Versuch, die Gränzen der Wirksamkeit des Staats zu bestimmen. 1984: J. Coulthard, Jr. (trans.), The Sphere and Duties of Government (The Limits of State Action). London: John Chapman.Google Scholar
Humboldt, W. von. [1794]/1903–36. Über den Geschlechtsunterschied und dessen Einfluss auf die organische Natur. 1903–36: in Leitzmann, et al. (eds.), vol. i (1791–4).Google Scholar
Humboldt, W. von. [1795]/1903–36. Über Denken und Sprechen. 1903–36: In Leitzmann, et al. (eds.), vol. vii, pp. 581–3.Google Scholar
Humboldt, W. von. [1806–17]/1970. Über die cantabrische oder baskische Sprache. 1970: repr. of 1806–17 edn. In Adelung & Vater (eds.), vol. iv, pp. 276360.Google Scholar
Humboldt, W. von. [1827]/1903–36. Ueber den Dualis. 1903–36: in Leitzmann, et al. (eds.), vol. vii, pp. 430.Google Scholar
Humboldt, W. von. 1836–9a/1876–80/1988/1999. Über die Verschiedenheit des menschlichen Sprachbaues und ihren Einfluss auf die geistige Entwickelung des Menschengeschlechts. Berlin: F. Dümmler. 1876–80: F. Pott (ed.), 2 vols. Berlin: S. Calvary. 1988: P. Heath (trans.). On Language: The Diversity of Human Language-Structure and its Influence on the Mental Development of Mankind, 2 vols. Halle: Max Niemeyer. 1999: M. Losonsky (ed. and intro.), P. Heath (trans.), On Language: On the Diversity of Human Language Construction and its Influence on the Mental Development of the Human Species. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Humboldt, W. von. 1836a–9b. Über die Kawi-Sprache auf der Insel Java, 3 vols. Berlin: Akademie der Wissenschaften.Google Scholar
Humboldt, W. von. 1836b/1999. Introduction to Über die Kawi–Sprache auf der Insel Java [1836b], vol i. Berlin: F. Dümmler. 1999: repr. in M. Losonsky (ed., w. intro.), P. Heath (trans.), On Language: On the Diversity of Human Language Construction and its Influence on the Mental Development of the Human Species. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Humboldt, W. von. 1883–4. Steinthal, H. (ed.), Die sprachphilosophischen Werke Wilhelm von Humboldts. Berlin: F. Dümmler.Google Scholar
Humboldt, W. von. 1903–36. Leitzmann, A. et al. (eds.). Wilhelm von Humboldts Gesammelte Schriften, vols. i–xvii. Berlin: B. Behr.Google Scholar
Humboldt, W. von. 1994. Mexicanische Grammatik. Ringmacher, M. (ed.). Paderborn: Verlag F. Schöningh.Google Scholar
Hume, D. [1739–40]1978. Selby-Bigge, L. A. & Nidditch, P. H. (eds.). A Treatise of Human Nature. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Hunston, S. & Francis, G. 1999. Pattern Grammar: A Corpus-Driven Approach to the Lexical Grammar of English. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Hunt, R. W. 1941 Studies on Priscian in the eleventh and twelfth centuries. Medieval and Renaissance Studies 1: 194231, 2: 1–56.Google Scholar
Husserl, E. 1900–1/2001. Logische Untersuchungen, 2 vols. Halle: Max Niemeyer. 2001: N. Finlay (ed.), Logical Investigations, 2nd edn., 2 vols. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul.Google Scholar
Hutchins, J. 2006. Machine translation: History. In Brown, (ed.), vol. vii, pp. 375–83.Google Scholar
Hyangka. 596–918. Songs of the Motherland. [26 Old Korean poems dated between 596 and 918]. Primary source.Google Scholar
Hyman, L. 1975. On the change from SOV to SVO: Evidence from Niger-Congo. In Li, C. N. (ed.), Word Order and Word Order Change, pp. 113–47. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press.Google Scholar
Hymes, D. 1961. Alfred Louis Kroeber. Language 37: 128.Google Scholar
Hymes, D. 1962. The ethnography of speaking. In Gladwin, T. & Sturtevant, W. C. (eds.), Anthropology and Human Behavior, pp. 1353. Washington, DC: Anthropology Society of Washington.Google Scholar
Hymes, D. 1964a. Introduction: Toward ethnographies of communication. In Gumperz, J. J. & Hymes, D. (eds.), The Ethnography of Communication. Special issue of American Anthropologist 66: 134.Google Scholar
Hymes, D. (ed.). 1964b. Language in Culture and Society: A Reader in Linguistics and Anthropology. NY: Harper & Row.Google Scholar
Hymes, D. (ed.). 1971a. Pidginization and Creolization of Languages. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Hymes, D. 1971b. Sociolinguistics and the ethnography of speaking. In Ardener, E. (ed.), Social Anthropology and Language, pp. 4793. London: Tavistock.Google Scholar
Hymes, D. 1972a. Models of the interaction of language and social life. In Gumperz, & Hymes, (eds.), pp. 3571.Google Scholar
Hymes, D. 1972b/2001 On communicative competence. In Pride, & Holmes, (eds.), pp. 269–93. 2001: repr. in Duranti (ed.), pp. 53–73.Google Scholar
Hymes, D. 1974. Foundations in Sociolinguistics: An Ethnographic Approach. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press.Google Scholar
Hymes, D. 1981. “In Vain I Tried to Tell You”: Essays in Native American Ethnopoetics. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press.Google Scholar
Hymes, D. & Fought, J. 1975/1981. American structuralism. In Sebeok, T. (ed.), Historiography of Linguistics (Current Trends in Linguistics 13, part 2). The Hague: Mouton. 1981: American Structuralism (rev. vers.). The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Iber, C. 2007. Platon: Sophistes. Frankfurt am Main: Suhrkamp Verlag.Google Scholar
Illicˇ-Svitycˇ, V. M. 1971–84. Opyt sravnenija nostraticˇeskix jazykov, 3 vols. Moscow: Nauka.Google Scholar
Ilson, R. 1992. Lexicography. In Bright, (ed.), vol. ii, pp. 330–32.Google Scholar
Imbs, P. & Quemada, B. (eds.). 1971–94. Trésor de la langue française. Dictionnaire de la langue du XIXe et du XXe siècle (1789–1960). 16 vols. Paris: Éditions du Centre national de la recherche scientifique/Gallimard.Google Scholar
Ireland, M., E., Slatcher, R. B., Eastwick, P. W., Scissors, L. E., Finkel, E. J., & Pennebaker, J. W. 2011. Language style matching predicts relationship initiation and stability. Psychological Science 22: 3944.Google Scholar
Irvine, J. T. 1989. When talk isn’t cheap: Language and political economy. American Ethnologist 16: 248–67.Google Scholar
Irvine, M. 1994. The Making of Textual Culture: ‘Grammatica’ and Literary Theory. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Ishizaka, K. & Flanagan, J. L. 1972. Synthesis of voiced sounds from a two-mass model of the vocal cords. Bell System Technical Jrnl. 51: 1233–68.Google Scholar
Isidore of Seville. [c. 600] 1911. Isidori Hispaliensis Etymologiae sive originum libri XX. Lindsay, W. M. (ed.), 2 vols. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Iversen, E. 1958. Papyrus Carlsberg Nr. VII: Fragments of a hieroglyphic dictionary. Copenhagen: Munksgaard.Google Scholar
Izre’el, S. 1997. The Amarna Scholarly Tablets. Groningen: Styx.Google Scholar
Jackendoff, R. S. 1972. Semantic Interpretation in Generative Grammar. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Jackendoff, R. S. 1983. Semantics and Cognition. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Jackendoff, R. S. 1990. Semantic Structures. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Jackendoff, R. S. 1992. Languages of the Mind: Essays on Mental Representation. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Jackendoff, R. S. 1995. The boundaries of the lexicon. In Everaert, M. et al. (eds.), Idioms: Structural and Psychological Perspectives, pp. 133–65. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.Google Scholar
Jäger, L. 1975. Zu einer historischen Rekonstruktion der authentischen Sprach-Idee F. de Saussures. PhD dissertation, University of Düsseldorf.Google Scholar
Jaeger, T. F. & Snider, N. E. 2013. Alignment as a consequence of expectation adaptation: Syntactic priming is affected by the prime’s prediction error given both prior and recent experience. Cognition 127: 5783.Google Scholar
Jakobson, R. 1929/1971. Remarques sur l’évolution phonologique du russe comparée à celle des autres langues slaves. Travaux du Cercle Linguistique de Prague II. 1971: repr. in Jakobson 1971a, vol. i, pp. 6–116.Google Scholar
Jakobson, R. 1936/1971/1984. Beitrag zur allgemeinen Kasuslehre (Gesamtbedeutung der russischen Kasus). Travaux du cercle linguistique de Prague 6: 240–88. 1971: repr. in Jakobson 1971a, vol ii, pp. 23–71. 1984: Eng. trans., Contributions to the General Theory of Case: General meanings of the Russian cases. In Waugh & Halle (eds.), pp. 59–103.Google Scholar
Jakobson, R. 1939a/1984. Signe zéro. Cercle Linguistique de Copenhague (June). 1984: Zero sign. In Waugh & Halle (eds.), pp. 151–60.Google Scholar
Jakobson, R. 1939b/1962. Observations sur le classement phonologique des consonnes. Proceedings of the Third International Congress of Phonetic Sciences (Ghent), pp. 31–41. 1962: repr. in Jakobson 1962, vol. i, pp. 27–9.Google Scholar
Jakobson, R. 1941/1962/1968. Kindersprache, aphasie, und allgemeine Lautgesetze. Uppsala: Almqvist & Wiksell. 1962: repr. in Jakobson 1962, vol. i, pp. 328401. 1968: A. Keiler (trans.), Child Language, Aphasia, and Phonological Universals. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Jakobson, R. 1951/1962/1971. For the correct presentation of phonemic problems. Symposium V, pp. 328–35. Syracuse, NY. 1962/1971: repr. in Jakobson 1962/1971a, vol. ii, pp. 435–42.Google Scholar
Jakobson, R. 1956/1971. Serge Karcevskij (August 28, 1884 – November 7, 1955). Cahiers Ferdinand de Saussure 14: 913. 1971: repr. in Jakobson 1971a, vol. ii, pp. 517–21.Google Scholar
Jakobson, R. 1957a/1963/1971. Shifters, verbal categories and the Russian verb. Department of Slavic Languages and Literatures, Harvard University. 1963: N. Ruwet (trans.), Essais de linguistique générale. Paris: Éditions de Minuit. 1971: repr. in Jakobson 1971a, vol. ii, pp. 130–47.Google Scholar
Jakobson, R. 1957b/1971. Typological studies and their contribution to historical comparative linguistics. In Silverstein, E. (ed.), Proceedings of the VIIIth International Congress of Linguistics, pp. 1725. Oslo University Press. 1971: repr. in Jakobson 1971a, vol. i, pp. 523–32.Google Scholar
Jakobson, R. 1959/1971. Linguistic glosses to Goldstein’s ‘Wortbegriff.’ Jrnl. of Individual Psychology 15. 1971: repr. in Jakobson 1971a, vol. ii, pp. 267–71.Google Scholar
Jakobson, R. 1960. Closing statement: Linguistics and poetics. In Sebeok, (ed.), pp. 350–77.Google Scholar
Jakobson, R. 1962/1971a. Selected Writings,vol. i: Phonological Studies; vol. ii: Word and Grammar; vol. iii: Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry, 1st/2nd edns. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Jakobson, R. 1963/1971. Efforts toward a means-end model of language in interwar continental linguistics. In Mohrmann, et al. (eds.), pp. 104–8. 1971: repr. in Jakobson 1971a, vol. ii, pp. 522–6.Google Scholar
Jakobson, R. 1966a/1971. Quest for the essence of language. Diogenes 51. 1971: repr. in Jakobson 1971a, vol. ii, pp. 345–59.Google Scholar
Jakobson, R. 1966b/1968/1979. The role of phonic elements in speech perception. 18th International Congress of Psychology, Symposium 23: Models of Speech Perception. 1968: repr. in Zeitschrift fur Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft und Kommunicationsforschung 21: 9–20. 1979: repr. in Jakobson & Waugh 1979, appen. pp. 239–48.Google Scholar
Jakobson, R. 1971b. The ‘Kazan’ School of Polish linguistics and its place in the international development of phonology. In Jakobson 1971a, vol. ii, pp. 394428.Google Scholar
Jakobson, R. 1971c. Retrospect. In Jakobson 1971a, vol. ii, pp. 711–22.Google Scholar
Jakobson, R. 1971d. La première lettre de F. de Saussure sur les anagrammes. L’Homme 11: 1524. Repr. in Jakobson 1971a, vol. iii, pp. 98–135.Google Scholar
Jakobson, R. 1973. Main Trends in the Science of Language. London: Allen & Unwin.Google Scholar
Jakobson, R. (ed.). 1975/1985. N. S. Trubetzkoy’s Letters and Notes. The Hague: Mouton. 1985: 2nd edn. Berlin: Mouton.Google Scholar
Jakobson, R. 1977. A few remarks on Peirce, pathfinder in the science of language. In Selected Writings, vol. vii: Contributions to Comparative Mythology: Studies in Linguistics and Philology, pp. 248–53. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Jakobson, R. 1986. Six leçons sur le son et le sens. Paris: Éditions de Minuit.Google Scholar
Jakobson, R. 1990. On Language. Waugh, L. R. & Monville-Burston, M. (eds.). Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Jakobson, R., Fant, C. G. M., & Halle, M. 1952. Preliminaries to Speech Analysis: The Distinctive Features and their Correlates. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Jakobson, R. & Halle, M. 1956. Fundamentals of Language. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Jakobson, R., Karcevskij, S., & Trubetzkoy, N. 1928/1962/1971. Quelles sont les méthodes les mieux appropriées à un exposé complet et pratique de la phonologie d’une langage quelconque? Actes du 1er Congrès International de Linguistes à La Haye, du 10–15 avril, 1928. 1962/1971: repr. in Jakobson 1962/1971a, vol. i, pp. 3–6.Google Scholar
Jakobson, R. & Waugh, L. R. 1979. The Sound Shape of Language. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press.Google Scholar
James, C. 1980. Contrastive Analysis. Harlow: Longman.Google Scholar
Janda, R. D. 2001. Beyond ‘pathways’ and ‘unidirectionality’: On the discontinuity of language transmission and the counterability of grammaticalization. In Campbell, (ed.), pp. 265340.Google Scholar
Janda, R. D. & Joseph, B. D. 2003/2004. On language, change, and language change–or of history, linguistics, and historical linguistics. In Joseph, & Janda, (eds.), pp. 1–180.Google Scholar
Janko, R. 1995. Crates of Mallos, Dionysius Thrax and the tradition of Stoic grammatical theory. In Ayres, L. & Kidd, I. G. (eds.), The Passionate Intellect: Essays on the Transformation of Classical Traditions: Presented to Professor I. G. Kidd, pp. 213–33. New Brunswick, NJ: Transaction.Google Scholar
Jankowsky, K. R. [1972]1994. The Neogrammarians: A Re-evaluation of their Place in the Development of Linguistic Science. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Jankowsky, K. R. 1983. Review article on Beiträge zur Geschichte der deutschen Sprache und Literatur, vol. 100. Forum Linguisticum 7: 239–59.Google Scholar
Jankowsky, K. R. 2000. The consolidation of the neogrammarian framework. In Auroux, et al. (eds.), pp. 1350–67.Google Scholar
Jansen-Winkeln, K. 1995. Diglossie und Zweisphrachigkeit. Wiener Zeitschrift zur Kunde des Morgenlandes 85: 85115.Google Scholar
Janssen-van Dieten, A.-M. 2000. Hoe ‘gemeenschappelijk’ is het gemeenschappelijk europees referentiekader? Toegepaste Taalwetenschap in Artikelen 6: 3546.Google Scholar
Jastrow, M. 1897. The Weak and the Geminative Verbs in Hebrew by Abû Zakariyyâ Yaḥyâ ibn Dâwd of Fez, Known as Ḥayyūg˘, Leiden: E. J. Brill.Google Scholar
Jaszczolt, K. M. 2005. Default Semantics: Foundations of a Compositional Theory of Acts of Communication. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Jauffret, L. F. 1909–11. Des différents genres d’écritures, et histoire de l’écriture hiéroglyphique. Revue de l’École d’anthropologie de Paris, 1921.Google Scholar
Jeauneau, É. 2007. Tendenda vela. Excursions littéraires et digressions philosophiques à travers le Moyen Âge. Turnhout: Brepols.Google Scholar
Jeremiás, É. 2000. Arabic influence on Persian linguistics. In Auroux, et al. (eds.), pp. 329–33.Google Scholar
Jernudd, B. & Das Gupta, J. 1971. Towards a theory of language planning. In Rubin, J. & Jernudd, B. (eds.), Can Language Be Planned? pp. 195215. Honolulu, HI: East-West Center Press.Google Scholar
Jespersen, O. 1886. Til spörgsmålet om lydlove. Nordisk Tidsskrift for Filologi n.s. 7: 207–45.Google Scholar
Jespersen, O. [1886]1887. Zur Lautgesetzfrage (trans. fr. Danish). Internationale Zeitschrift für Allgemeine Sprachwissenschaft 3: 188216.Google Scholar
Jespersen, O. 1905. Growth and Structure of the English Language. Leipzig: G. B. Teubner.Google Scholar
Jespersen, O. 1909–49. A Modern English Grammar on Historical Principles, 7 vols. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. Vols. v–vii, Copenhagen: Munksgaard. Vols. v–vi, London: Allen & Unwin.Google Scholar
Jespersen, O. 1913. Sprogets logik. Copenhagen: Schultz.Google Scholar
Jespersen, O. 1922. Language, its Nature, Development, and Origin. London: Allen and Unwin.Google Scholar
Jespersen, O. 1924. The Philosophy of Grammar. London: Allen & Unwin.Google Scholar
Jespersen, O. 1937. Analytic Syntax. London: Allen & Unwin.Google Scholar
Jespersen, O. 1941. Efficiency in Linguistic Change. Copenhagen: Munksgaard.Google Scholar
Jeudy, C. 1974. L’Ars de nomine et verbo de Phocas: Manuscrits et commentaire médiévaux. Viator(Berkeley) 5: 61156.Google Scholar
Jha, N. & Rajaram, N. S. 2000. The deciphered Indus Script: Methodology, Readings, Interpretations. New Delhi: Aditya Prakashan.Google Scholar
Jiménez, P. & Lorenzo- Sáenz-Badillos, Á. 2002. Abraham ibn ‘Ezra, Sefer moznayim, introducción, en castellano e inglés, edición crítica del texto hebreo y versión castellana. Córdoba: El Almendro, D.L.Google Scholar
Jiménez Sánchez, M. 1996. Sĕ‘adyah ibn Danān Sefer ha-šorašim, introducción, edición e índices. Universidad de Granada.Google Scholar
Jiménez Sánchez, M. 2004. Sĕ‘adyah Ibn Danān: Libro de Raíces, Diccionario de hebreo bíblico. Universidad de Granada.Google Scholar
Johnson, J. 1994. Ancient Egyptian linguistics. In Lepschy, (ed.), vol. i, pp. 6376.Google Scholar
Johnson, K. 1982. Communicative Syllabus Design and Methodology. NY: Pergamon.Google Scholar
Johnson, K. 1997. Speech perception without speaker normalization. In Johnson, K. & Mullenix, J. W. (eds.), Talker Variability in Speech Processing, pp. 145–65. Orlando, FL: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Johnson, M. (ed.). 1978. Recycling the Prague Linguistic Circle. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma.Google Scholar
Jolivet, J. 1982. Arts du langage et théologie chez Abélard, 2nd edn. Paris: J. Vrin.Google Scholar
Jones, D. 1909. The Pronunciation of English. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Jones, D. 1911. The Pronunciation and Orthography of the Chindau Language. University of London Press.Google Scholar
Jones, D. 1917. An English Pronouncing Dictionary. London: Dent.Google Scholar
Jones, D. 1918. An Outline of English Phonetics. Leipzig: G. B. Teubner.Google Scholar
Jones, D. 1950/1962/1967. The Phoneme: Its Nature and Use, 1st/2nd/3rd edns. Cambridge: W. Heffer & Sons.Google Scholar
Jones, D. 1957. The History and Meaning of the Term “Phoneme.” London: International Phonetic Association.Google Scholar
Jones, D. & Michaelis, H. 1913. A Phonetic Dictionary of the English Language. Hanover and Berlin: Carl Meyer.Google Scholar
Jones, D. & Passy, P. 1912. The Principles of the International Phonetic Association. London: International Phonetic Association. Jones, D. & Perera, H. S. 1919. A Colloquial Sinhalese Reader. Manchester University Press.Google Scholar
Jones, D. & Plaatje, S. T. 1916. A Sechuana Reader. London University Press.Google Scholar
Jones, D. & Stéphan, E. M. 1927. Colloquial French. London: The Gramophone Co.Google Scholar
Jones, D. & Trofimov, M. V. 1923. The Pronunciation of Russian. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Jones, D. & Ward, D. 1969. The Phonetics of Russian. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Jones, D. & Woo, K. T. 1912. A Cantonese Phonetic Reader. University of London Press.Google Scholar
Jones, Sir W. 1771. A Grammar of the Persian Language. London: W. & J. Richardson, printer.Google Scholar
Jones, Sir W. 1788a/1993. The third anniversary discourse, delivered February 2, 1786: On the Hindus. Asiatick Researches 1: 415–31. 1993: repr. in M. J. Franklin (ed.), Sir William Jones: Selected Poetical and Prose Works, pp. 355–70. Cardiff: University of Wales Press.Google Scholar
Jones, Sir W. 1788b. Orthography of Asiatick words in Roman letters. Asiatick Researches 1: 156.Google Scholar
Joos, M. (ed.). 1957/1958/1966. Readings in Linguistics: The Development of Descriptive Linguistics in America since 1925, 1st/2nd edns. NY: American Council of Learned Societies. 1966: 4th edn. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Joseph, B. D. & Janda, R. D. (eds.). 2003. The Handbook of Historical Linguistics. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Joseph, J. E. 1987. Eloquence and Power: The Rise of Language Standards and Standard Languages. NY: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Joseph, J. E. 1990. Bloomfield’s Saussureanism. Cahiers Ferdinand de Saussure 43: 4353.Google Scholar
Joseph, J. E. 1991. Review of Humboldt 1988. Language 67: 843–51.Google Scholar
Joseph, J. E. 1999. A matter of Consequenz: Humboldt, race and the genius of the Chinese language. Historiographia Linguistica 26: 89148.Google Scholar
Joseph, J. E. 2002. From Whitney to Chomsky: Essays in the History of American Linguistics. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Joseph, J. E. 2012. Saussure. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Joseph, J. E. & Taylor, T. J. 1990. Ideologizing Saussure: Bloomfield’s and Chomsky’s readings of the Cours de linguistique générale. In Joseph, J. E. & Taylor, T. J. (eds.), Ideologies of Language, pp. 5178. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Jucker, A. & Ziv, Y. (eds). 1998. Discourse Markers: Description and Theory. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Julien, M-H. & Perelman, F. 1999. Clavis des auteurs latins du moyen âge (territoire français, 735–987), vol. iii (Corpus Christianorum Clavis Scriptorum Latinorum Medii Aevi), bilingual edn. Turnhout: Brepols.Google Scholar
Jun, S.-A. 1995. Asymmetrical prosodic effects on the laryngeal gesture in Korean. In Connell, B. & Arvaniti, A. (eds.), Phonology and Phonetic Evidence: Papers in Laboratory Phonology IV, pp. 235–53. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Junge, F. 1984. Zur ‘Sprachwissenschaft’ der Ägypter. In Junge, F. (ed.), Studien zu Sprache und Religion Ägyptens zu Ehren von Wolfhart Westendorf, vol. i, pp. 257–72. Göttingen: Hubert & Co.Google Scholar
Jurafsky, D. & Martin, J. H. 2008. Speech and Language Processing: An Introduction to Natural Language Processing, Speech Recognition, and Computational Linguistics, 2nd edn. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.Google Scholar
Just, M. A. & Carpenter, P. A. 1992. A capacity theory of comprehension: Individual differences in working memory. Psychological Review 98: 122–49.Google Scholar
Just, M. A., Carpenter, P. A., Keller, T. A., Eddy, W. F., & Thulborn, K. R. 1996. Brain activation modulated by sentence comprehension. Science 274: 114–16.Google Scholar
Kachru, B. 1996. English as lingua franca. In Goebl, H. et al. (eds.), Kontaktlinguistik/Contact Linguistics/Linguistique de contact, pp. 906–13. Berlin: de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Kahl, J. 1994. Das System der ägyptischen Hieroglyphenschrift in der 0.–3. Dynastie. Wiesbaden: Harrasowitz.Google Scholar
Kahl, J. 1999. Siut-Theben. Zur Wertschätzung von Traditionen im alten Ägypten (Probleme der Ägyptologie 13). Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar
Kahn, D. 1976/1980. Syllable-Based Generalizations in English Phonology. PhD dissertation, MIT. Pub. 1980, NY: Garland Press.Google Scholar
Kahrs, E. 1999. Indian Semantic Analysis: The Nirvacana Tradition. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Kamp, H. 1981. A theory of truth and semantic representation. In Groenendijk, J. A. G. et al. (eds.), Formal Methods in the Study of Language, pp. 277322. Amsterdam: Mathematisch Centrum.Google Scholar
Kamp, H. 1995. Discourse representation theory. In Verschueren, J. & Östman, J.-O. (eds.), Handbook of Pragmatics, pp. 253–57. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Kamp, H. & Reyle, U. 1993. From Discourse to Logic: Introduction to Modeltheoretic Semantics of Natural Language, Formal Logic and Discourse Representation Theory. Dordrecht: Kluwer.Google Scholar
Kant, I. [1781]1979. Kritik der reinen Vernunft. Leipzig: Verlag Philipp Reclam.Google Scholar
Kant, I. [1783]1979. Prolegomena zu einer jeden künftigen Metaphysik. Leipzig: Verlag Philipp Reclam.Google Scholar
Kant, I. [1798]1964. Anthropologie in pragmatischer Hinsicht. In Werke, 12 vols., vol. xii, part 2, pp. 399690. Frankfurt am Main: Suhrkamp.Google Scholar
Kaplan, D. 1989. Demonstratives: An essay on the semantics, logic, metaphysics, and epistemology of demonstratives and other indexicals. In Almog, J. et al. (eds.), Themes from Kaplan, pp. 481563. NY: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Kaptein, N. 2000. Arabic influence on Malay linguistics. In Auroux, et al. (eds.), pp. 333–6.Google Scholar
Karcevski, S. 1927/2004. Système du verbe russe: Essai de linguistique synchronique. Prague: Legiografie. 2004: new edn., I. Fougeron, J. Breuillard, & G. Fougeron (eds.). Paris: Institut d’études slaves.Google Scholar
Karsten, G. E. 1894. The psychological basis of phonetic law and analogy. Publications of the Modern Language Association of America 9: 312–41.Google Scholar
Kaschak, M. P. & Glenberg, A. M. 2000. Constructing meaning: The role of affordances and grammatical constructions in sentence comprehension. Journal of Memory and Language, 43: 508–29.Google Scholar
Kaster, R. A. 1987. Islands in the stream: The grammarians of late antiquity. In Taylor, (ed.), pp. 149–68.Google Scholar
Kaster, R. A. 1997. Guardians of Language: The Grammarian and Society in Late Antiquity. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Kātyāyana. [c. 3rd c. bce]1975. Bhāṣika-sūtra, w. the comm. of Mahāsvāmin and Anantabhaṭṭa. 1975: Chaubey, B. B. (ed.). Hoshiarpur: Vishveshvarananda Vishva Bandhu Institute of Sanskrit and Indological Studies, Punjab University.Google Scholar
Kātyāyana. [c. 2nd c. bce]1880–5/1962–72. Vārttikas on Pāṇini’s Aṣṭādhyāyı̄, incorp. into Patañjali’s Mahābhāṣya. 1880–5: F. Kielhorn (ed.), 3 vols. 1962–72: 3rd edn., K. V. Abhyankar (ed.). Pune: Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute.Google Scholar
Katz, J. J. 1966. The Philosophy of Language. NY: Harper & Row.Google Scholar
Katz, J. J . 1967. Recent issues in semantic theory. Foundations of Language 3: 124–94.Google Scholar
Katz, J. J. 1972. Semantic Theory. NY: Harper and Row.Google Scholar
Katz, J. J. 1975a. The dilemma between orthodoxy and identity. Philosophia 5: 287–98.Google Scholar
Katz, J. J. 1975b. Logic and language: An examination of recent criticisms of intensionalism. In Gunderson, (ed.), pp. 36130.Google Scholar
Katz, J. J. 1977a. The advantage of semantic theory over predicate calculus in the representation of logical form in natural language. The Monist 60: 380405. Special issue, R. B. Marcus (ed.), New Directions in Semantics.Google Scholar
Katz, J. J. 1977b. Propositional Structure and Illocutionary Force. NY: Thomas Crowell.Google Scholar
Katz, J. J. 1981. Literal meaning and logical theory. Jrnl. of Philosophy 78: 203–33.Google Scholar
Katz, J. J. & Fodor, J. A. 1963. The structure of a semantic theory. Language 39: 170210.Google Scholar
Katz, J. J. & Nagel, R. I. 1974. Meaning postulates and semantic theory. Foundations of Language 11: 311–40.Google Scholar
Katz, J. J. & Postal, P. M. 1964. An Integrated Theory of Linguistic Descriptions. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Kaula, I. [1833–93]1985. Kāśmı̄raśabdāmr̥ta. Shastri, A. R. (ed. and trans. into Hindi). Delhi: Nag Publishers.Google Scholar
Kay, P. & Fillmore, C. J. 1999. Grammatical constructions and linguistic generalizations: The What’s X doing Y? construction. Language 75: 133.Google Scholar
Kay, P. & Maffi, L. 1999. Color appearance and the emergence and evolution of basic color lexicons. American Anthropologist 101: 743–60.Google Scholar
Kaye, A. S. 1995. Adaptations of Arabic script. In Daniels, P. T. & Bright, W. (eds.), The World’s Writing Systems, pp. 743–62. London: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Keating, E. 1998. Power Sharing: Language, Rank, Gender and Social Space in Pohnpei, Micronesia. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Keating, P. A. 1990. The window model of coarticulation: articulatory evidence. In Kingston, & Beckman, (eds.), pp. 451–70.Google Scholar
Keenan, E. L. (ed.). 1975. Formal Semantics of Natural Language: Papers from a Colloquium Sponsored by the King’s College Research Centre, Cambridge. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Keenan, E. L. & Comrie, B. 1977. Noun phrase accessibility and universal grammar. Linguistic Inquiry 8: 6399.Google Scholar
Keenan, E. & Ochs, E. 1973. A sliding sense of obligatoriness: The poly-structure of Malagasy oratory. Language in Society 2: 225–43.Google Scholar
Keil, H. (ed.). 1857–80/1961/2009. Grammatici Latini, 8 vols. Leipzig: G. B. Teubner. 1961: repr. Hildesheim: Georg Olms. 2009: repr. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Keiler, A. R. 1970. A Phonological Study of the Indo-European Laryngeals. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Kelly, J. L. & Local, J. 1989. Doing Phonology. Manchester University Press.Google Scholar
Kelly, J. L. & Lochbaum, C. C. 1962/1973. Speech synthesis. In Proceedings of the Fourth International Congress on Acoustics, pp. 1–4. 1973: repr. in J. L. Flanagan & L. R. Rabiner (eds.), Speech Synthesis, pp. 127–30. Stroudsburg, PA: Dowden, Hutchinson & Ross.Google Scholar
Kelly, J. L. & Plug, L. (eds.). 2005. Firthian phonology: Prospect and retrospect. York Papers in Linguistics 2(4). Department of Language and Linguistic Science, University of York.Google Scholar
Kelly, L. G. 1969. Twenty-five Centuries of Language Teaching. Rowley, MA: Newbury House.Google Scholar
Kelly, L. G. 1990. Compositioand the verb in Grammatica Speculativa. In Bursill-Hall, R. et al. (eds.), De ortu grammaticae: Studies in Medieval Grammar and Linguistic Theory in Memory of Jan Pinborg, pp. 147–60. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Kelly, L. G. 1999. Modus significandi rhetoricus: Jean Gerson against dialectic. Studies in Medieval and Renaissance Teaching 7: 4359.Google Scholar
Kelly, L.G. 2002. The Mirror of Grammar: Theology, Philosophy and the Modistae. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Kelso, J. A. S., Saltzman, E. L., & Tuller, B. 1986. The dynamical perspective on speech production: Data and theory. Jrnl. of Phonetics 14: 2959.Google Scholar
Kemmer, S. & Barlow, M. 2000. Introduction: A usage-based conception of language. In Barlow, M. & Kemmer, S. (eds.), Usage-Based Models of Language, pp. viixxviii. Stanford, CA: CSLI Publications.Google Scholar
Kemp, J. A. 1981. Introduction to Richard Lepsius. In Kemp, J. (ed.), Standard Alphabet for Reducing Unwritten Languages and Foreign Graphic Systems to a Uniform Orthography in European Letters, pp. 187; repr. of R. Lepsius (1863). Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Kemp, J. A. 1986. The Tekhnē Grammatikē of Dionysius Thrax. In Taylor, (ed.), pp. 169–89.Google Scholar
Kempelen, W. von. 1791. Mechanismus der menschlichen Sprache nebst Beschreibung einer sprechenden Maschine. Vienna: Degen.Google Scholar
Kenny, A. 2006. Wittgenstein. Malden, MA: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Kenstowicz, M. 1994. Phonology in Generative Grammar. Cambridge, MA: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Kerbrat-Orecchioni, C. 2005. Le Discours en interaction. Paris: Armand Colin.Google Scholar
Kerswill, P. 2006. Social class. In Llamas, C. et al. (eds.), The Routledge Companion to Sociolinguistics, pp. 5161. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Keśirāja. [13th c. ce]1976. Śabdamaṇidarpaṇa. 1976: Kulli, J. S. (ed.). Dharwar: Karnataka University.Google Scholar
Key, T. H. 1874. Language: Its Origin and Development. London: G. Bell & Sons.Google Scholar
Khan, G. 2000. The Early Karaite Tradition of Hebrew Grammatical Thought: Including a Critical Edition, Translation and Analysis of the Diqduq of ’Abū Ya‘qūb Yūsuf ibn Nūḥ on the Hagiographa. Leiden: Koninklijke Brill NV.Google Scholar
Khan, G., Gallego, Á., & Olszowy-Schlanger, J. 2003. The Karaite Tradition of Hebrew Grammatical Thought in its Classical Form: A Critical Edition and English Translation of al-Kitāb al-kāfı̄ fı̄ al-luġa al-‘Ibrāniyya by ’Abū al-Faraj Hārūn ibn al-Faraj, Leiden: Koninklijke Brill NV.Google Scholar
Kibbee, D. A. 1991. For to speke frenche trewely: The French Language in England, 1000–1600: Its Status, Description and Instruction. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Kilgarriff, A. Rychlý, P., Smrz, P., & Tugwell, D. 2004. The Sketch Engine. Proceedings of EURALEX 2004, Lorient, France, pp. 105–16.Google Scholar
Kilgarriff, A. & Rychlý, P. 2010. Semi-automatic dictionary drafting. In de Schryvez, G.-M. (ed.), A Way with Words: Recent Advances in Lexical Theory and Analysis. A Festschrift for Patrick Hanks, pp. 299312. Kampala: Menha Publishers.Google Scholar
Kilwardby, R. [c. 1235]1976. De ortu scientiarum. Judy, A. G. (ed.) (Auctores Britannici Medii Aeviiv). London: British Academy and Pontifical Institute of Medieval Studies.Google Scholar
Kim, C. 1983. Hyangka-wa Manyepcip ka-uy phyokipep pikyo yenkwu [‘A Comparative Study of the Orthography in the Hyangka and the Man’yŎshū’]. Seoul: Cipmuntang.Google Scholar
Kim, W. 1980. Hyangka haytokpep yenkwu [‘A Study of the Decipherment of Hyangka’]. Seoul: Tayhakkyo chwulphanpu.Google Scholar
Kimhi (Qinhı̄), D. 1540. Liber Michlol grammatices lingvae sanctae R. Dauid Kimhi: quo eam integram docet, & absoluit per Agathium Guidacerium. Paris: In Collegio Italorum.Google Scholar
Kingston, J. & Beckman, M. (eds.). 1990. Papers in Laboratory Phonology I. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Kintsch, W. 1988. The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review 95: 163–82.Google Scholar
Kiparsky, P. 1968a/1973. How Abstract is Phonology? Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Linguistics Club. 1973: repr. in O. Fujimura (ed.), Three Dimensions in Linguistic Theory, pp. 5–66. Tokyo: Taikusha.Google Scholar
Kiparsky, P. 1968b. Linguistic universals and linguistic change. In Bach, & Harms, (eds.), pp. 170202.Google Scholar
Kiparsky, P. 1982a. From cyclic phonology to lexical phonology. In van der Hulst, H. & Smith, N. (eds.), The Structure of Phonological Representations, pp. 131–75. Dordrecht: Foris.Google Scholar
Kiparsky, P. 1982b. Lexical phonology and morphology. In Yang, I.-S. (ed.), Linguistics in the Morning Calm, pp. 391. Seoul: Hanshin.Google Scholar
Kircher, A. 1663. Polygraphia nova et universalis. Rome: Varesius.Google Scholar
Kisseberth, C. 1970. On the functional unity of phonological rules. Linguistic Inquiry 1: 291306.Google Scholar
Kisseberth, C. 1984. Digo tonology. In Clements, G. N. & Goldsmith, J. (eds.), Autosegmental Studies in Bantu Tone, pp. 105–82. Dordrecht: Foris.Google Scholar
Klaassen, R. 2001. The International University Curriculum: Challenges in English-Medium Engineering Education. Technische Universiteit Delft.Google Scholar
Klatt, D. H. 1979. Speech perception: A model of acoustic-phonetic analysis and lexical access. Jrnl. of Phonetics 7: 279312.Google Scholar
Klatt, D. H. 1980. Software for a cascade/parallel formant synthesizer. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 67: 971–95.Google Scholar
Kleene, S. C. 1952. Introduction to Metamathematics. Amsterdam: North-Holland.Google Scholar
Klein, W. 2001. Lexicology and lexicography. In Smelser, N. J. & Baltes, P. B. (eds.), Intl. Encyclopedia of the Social & Behavioral Sciences, vol. xiii, pp. 8764–8. Amsterdam: Elsevier.Google Scholar
Kloss, H. 1969. Research Possibilities on Group Bilingualism: A Report. Université Laval, Québec.Google Scholar
Klöter, H. 2011. The Language of the Sangleys – A Chinese Vernacular in Missionary Sources of the Seventeenth Century. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar
Klotz, D. & Stauder, A. (eds.). 2020. Enigmatic writing in the Egyptian New Kingdom, vol. i: Revealing, Transforming, and Display in Egyptian Hieroglyphs (Series: Zeitschrift für ägyptische Sprache und Altertumskunde, Beihefte, 12.1). Berlin: de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Kluender, K. R., Lotto, A. J., Holt, L. L., & Bloedel, S. L. 1998. Role of experience for language-specific functional mappings of vowel sounds. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 104: 3568–82.Google Scholar
Kluge, F. 1879. Beiträge zur Geschichte der germanischen Conjugation. Strassburg: K. J. Trübner.Google Scholar
Kneepkens, C. H. 1978. Master Guido and his view on government in twelfth-century linguistic thought. Vivarium 16: 108–41.Google Scholar
Kneepkens, C. H. 1995. The Priscianic tradition. In Ebbesen, (ed.), pp. 239–64.Google Scholar
Knowles, F. E. 1989. The computer in lexicography. In Hausmann, et al. (eds.), vol. ii, pp. 1645–72.Google Scholar
Knowlson, J. R. 1965. The idea of gesture as a universal language in the xviith and xviiith centuries. Jrnl. of the History of Ideas 26: 495508.Google Scholar
Knowlson, J. R. 1975. Universal Language Schemes in England and France 1600–1800. Toronto University Press.Google Scholar
Koch, W. A. 1966. Recurrence and a Three-Modal Approach to Poetry. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Koch, W. A. 1981. Roman Jakobson. In Schnelle, H. (ed.), Sprache und Gehirn: Roman Jakobson zu Ehren, pp. 223–35. Frankfurt: Suhrkamp.Google Scholar
Koerner, E. F. K. 1973a. The Importance of F. Techmer’s Internationale Zeitschrift für Allgemeine Sprachwissenschaft in the Development of General Linguistics. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Koerner, E. F. K. 1973b. Ferdinand de Saussure: Origin and Development of his Linguistic Thought in Western Studies of Language. Braunschweig: Vieweg.Google Scholar
Koerner, E. F. K. 1974. Preface to the new edition. In Pott, A. F. [1887]1974: Zur Literatur der Sprachenkunde Europas, pp. vii–xvi. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Koerner, E. F. K. 1988. Saussurean Studies. Geneva: Slatkine.Google Scholar
Koerner, E. F. K. 1991. Editorial note to P. Wegener, Untersuchungen über die Grundfragen des Sprachlebens. Repr. edn. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Koerner, E. F. K. 2001. Linguistics and ideology in 19th and 20th century studies of language. In Dirven, R. et al. (eds.), Language and Ideology: Theoretical Cognitive Approaches, pp. 253–76. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Koerner, E. F. K. 2002. William Labov and the origins of sociolinguistics. Folia Linguistica Historica 22: 140.Google Scholar
Koerner, E. F. K. & Asher, R. E. (eds.). 1995. Concise History of the Language Sciences: From the Sumerians to the Cognitivists. Oxford: Pergamon Press.Google Scholar
Kohen, M. 2000. ha-Haqdamot ha-diqduqiyot lĕ-Sefer ha-Šorašim šel Rabi Se‘adyah ben-Maimon Ibn-Danan: balšan, mešorer wĕ-historyon bi-tequfat geruš Sefarad. Jerusalem: Kfir Press, Meqor Baruch Publications.Google Scholar
Kohler, K. J. 1966. Is the syllable a phonetic universal? Jrnl. of Linguistics 2: 207–8.Google Scholar
Kokóvtsov, P. K. 1890. Yeter ha-pĕliṭah min Kitāb al-muwāzana bayn al-luġa al-‘ibrāniyya wa-l-‘arabiyya ašer ḥibro Abū Ibrahı̄m Yiṣḥaq ben Barūn ha-sefardı̄. St. Petersburg: Bi-defus A. Behrman u-Tsevi Rabinoṿit˙ts.Google Scholar
Kokóvtsov, P. K. 1916/1970. Novie Materiali dlya jarakteristiki Jehudi Jayudzam Samuila Naguida i nekotorij druguij predstaviteley yevreiskoy filologicheskoy nauki v X, XI i XII veke. Saint Petersburg: Bi-defus A. Behrman u-Tsevi Rabinoṿit˙ts. 1970. Repr. as Me-Sifre ha-balšanut ha-‘ivrit byme ha-benayim, by N. Allony. Jerusalem: Kedem.Google Scholar
Kolers, P. 1966. Reading and talking bilingually. American Jrnl. of Psychology 3: 357–76.Google Scholar
Komatsu, E. 1993 (ed.). Third Course of Lectures on General linguistics (1910–1911): From the Notebooks of Émile Constantin. Harris, R. (trans.). Oxford: Pergamon Press.Google Scholar
Komatsu, E. & Wolf, G. (eds. and trans.). 1996. First Course of Lectures on General Linguistics from the Notebooks of Albert Riedlinger (1907). Oxford: Pergamon Press.Google Scholar
Komatsu, E. & Wolf, G. (eds. & trans.) 1997. Second Course of Lectures on General Linguistics (1908–1909) from the Notebooks of Albert Riedlinger and Charles Patois. Oxford: Pergamon Press.Google Scholar
Kortmann, B. 2004. Dialectology Meets Typology: Dialect Grammar from a Cross-linguistic Perspective. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Kövecses, Z. 2002. Metaphor: A Practical Introduction. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Kozhevnikov, V. A. & Chistovich, L. A. 1965. Speech: Articulation and Perception. Engl. trans. US Dept. of Commerce, Clearing House for Federal Scientific and Technical Information.Google Scholar
Kramadı̄s΄vara. [thirteenth c. ce]. Saṃkṣiptasāra-Vyākaraṇa, w. two comm. 1995–2000. R. S. Saini, (ed.). Delhi: Bharatiya Vidya Prakashan.Google Scholar
Krashen, S. 1981. Second Language Acquisition and Second Language Learning. Oxford: Pergamon.Google Scholar
Kress, G. 1988. Social Semiotics. Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press.Google Scholar
Kress, G. & Hodge, R. 1979. Language as Ideology. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Kress, G. & van Leeuwen, T. 1996/2006. Reading Images: The Grammar of Visual Design, 1st/2nd edns. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Kress, G. & van Leeuwen, T. 2001. Multimodal Discourse: The Modes and Media of Contemporary Communication. London: Arnold.Google Scholar
Kretschmer, P. 1927. Sprache. In Gercke, A. & Norden, E. (eds.), Einleitung in die Altertumswissenschaft, pp. 1–121. Leipzig: G. B. Teubner.Google Scholar
Kretzmann, N. 1977. The main thesis of Locke’s semiotic theory. In Tipton, I. C. (ed.), Locke on Human Understanding, pp. 123–40. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Kripke, S. 1959. A completeness theorem in modal logic. Jrnl. of Symbolic Logic 24: 115.Google Scholar
Kripke, S. 1963a. Semantical considerations on modal logic. Proceedings of a Colloquium on Modal and Many-valued Logics, pp. 8394. Helsinki: Acta Philosophica Fennica.Google Scholar
Kripke, S. 1963b. Semantic analysis of modal logic, I. Normal propositional calculi. Zeitschrift für mathematische Logik und Grundlagen der Mathematik 9: 6796.Google Scholar
Kripke, S. 1972/1980. Naming and Necessity. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. 1980: repr. in D. Davidson & G. Harman (eds.), Semantics of Natural Language, pp. 253–355. Dordrecht: D. Reidel.Google Scholar
Kripke, S. 1982. Wittgenstein on Rules and Private Language. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Kristeva, J. 1969. Semeiotiké: Recherches pour une sémioanalyse. Paris: Éditions du Seuil.Google Scholar
Kroch, A. 1989. Reflexes of grammar in patterns of language change. Language Variation and Change 1: 199244.Google Scholar
Kroeber, A. L. 1925. Handbook of the Indians of California (United States Bureau of American Ethnology Bulletin 78). Washington, DC: Government Printing Office.Google Scholar
Kroll, J. F. & de Groot, A. 2005. Handbook of Bilingualism: Psycholinguistic Approaches. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Kroskrity, P. V. 1993. Language, History, and Identity: Ethnolinguistic Studies of the Arizona Tewa. Tucson, AZ: University of Arizona Press.Google Scholar
Kroskrity, P. V. (ed.). 2000. Regimes of Language: Ideologies, Politics and Identities. Santa Fe, NM: School of American Research Press.Google Scholar
Kroskrity, P. V. 2004. Language ideologies. In Duranti, A. (ed.), A Companion to Linguistic Anthropology, pp. 496517. Malden, MA: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Kruszewski, M. 1881 and 1883/1995. 1881: i. On sound alternation [includes ‘General principles of linguistic research’] (trans. fr. Germ. by R. Austerlitz). 1995: in E. F. K. Koerner (ed.), Writings in General Linguistics, pp. 24–30. 1883: ii. Outline of linguistic science (trans. fr. Russ. by G. M. Eramian). 1995: in E. F. K. Koerner (ed.), Writings in General Linguistics, pp. 43–174. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Kruszewski, M. 1884–90/1973. Prinzipien der Sprachentwicklung. Internationale Zeitschrift für allgemeine Sprachwissenschaft, 15. 1973: repr. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Krzeszowski, T. P. 1990. Contrasting Languages: The Scope of Contrastive Linguistics. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Kühner, R. 1834. Ausführliche Grammatik der griechischen Sprache. Hanover: Verlag-Hahn.Google Scholar
Kühner, R. 1834–5. Ausführliche Grammatik der lateinischen Sprache, 2 vols. Hanover: Verlag-Hahn.Google Scholar
Kucˇera, H. 1961. The Phonology of Czech. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Kuhl, P. K. 1991. Human adults and human infants show a “perceptual magnet effect” for the prototypes of speech categories, monkeys do not. Perception and Psychophysics 50: 93107.Google Scholar
Kuhl, P. K. 1992. Infants’ perception and representation of speech: Development of a new theory. In Ohala, J. J. et al. (eds.), 1992 International Conference on Spoken Language Processing, vol. i, pp. 449–56.Google Scholar
Kuhl, P. K. & Miller, J. D. 1975. Speech perception by the chinchilla: Voiced–voiceless distinction in alveolar plosive consonants. Science 190: 6972.Google Scholar
Kuhn, T. 1962. The Structure of Scientific Revolutions. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Kuipers, J. 1998. Language, Identity, and Marginality in Indonesia: The Changing Nature of Ritual Speech on the Island of Sumba. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Kulick, D. 1992. Language Shift and Cultural Reproduction: Socialization, Self, and Syncretism in a Papua New Guinean Village. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Kuryłowicz, J. 1927. ə indo-européen et ḫ hittite. In W. Taszycki, & Doroszewski, W. (eds.), Symbolae grammaticae in honorem Ioannis Rozwadowski I, pp. 95104. Krakow: Jagiellonian University Press.Google Scholar
Kuryłowicz, J. 1947. La nature des procès dits analogiques. Acta Linguistica 5: 1537.Google Scholar
Kuryłowicz, J. 1960. Esquisses linguistiques. Wrocław: Polska Akademia Nauk.Google Scholar
Kuryłowicz, J. 1965. The evolution of grammatical categories. Diogenes 51: 5571.Google Scholar
Kusch, M. 1995. Psychologism: A Case Study in the Sociology of Philosophical Knowledge. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Labbé, P. 1663. Grammatica linguae universalis. Paris: J. Roger.Google Scholar
Labov, W. 1963. The social motivation of sound change. Word 19: 273309.Google Scholar
Labov, W. 1966. The Social Stratification of English in New York City. Washington, DC: Center for Applied Linguistics.Google Scholar
Labov, W. 1970. The Study of Nonstandard English. Champaign, IL: National Council of Teachers.Google Scholar
Labov, W. 1971. The notion of ‘system’ in Creole studies. In Hymes, (ed.), pp. 447–72.Google Scholar
Labov, W. 1972a. Language in the Inner City: Studies in the Black English Vernacular. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press.Google Scholar
Labov, W. 1972b. Sociolinguistic Patterns. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press.Google Scholar
Labov, W. 1978. Denotational structure. In Farkas, D. et al. (eds.), Papers from the Parasession on the Lexicon, pp. 220–60. Chicago Linguistic Society.Google Scholar
Labov, W. 1981. Resolving the neogrammarian controversy. Language 57: 267308.Google Scholar
Labov, W. 1990. The intersection of sex and social class in the course of linguistic change. Language Variation and Change 2: 205–54.Google Scholar
Labov, W. 1994. Principles of Linguistic Change, vol. i: Internal Factors. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Labov, W. 2001. Principles of Linguistic Change, vol. ii: Social Factors, Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Labov, W. 2010. Principles of Linguistic Change, vol. iii: Cognitive and Cultural Factors. Oxford: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar
Labov, W. & Fanshel, D. 1977. Therapeutic Discourse: Psychotherapy as Conversation. NY: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Labov, W. & Waletsky, J. 1967. Narrative analysis. In Helm, J. (ed.), Essays on the Verbal and Visual Arts, pp. 1244. Seattle, WA: American Ethnological Society.Google Scholar
Lacan, J. 1966. Écrits. Paris: Editions du Seuil.Google Scholar
Lacan, J. 2001. Autres écrits. Miller, J.-A. (ed.). Paris: Editions du Seuil.Google Scholar
Ladd, D. R. & Morton, R. 1997. The perception of intonational emphasis: Continuous or categorical? Jrnl. of Phonetics 25: 313–42.Google Scholar
Ladefoged, P. 1964. A Phonetic Study of West African Languages. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Ladefoged, P., de Clerk, J. L., & Harshman, R. 1972. Control of the tongue in vowels. In Rigault, A. & Charbonneau, R. (eds.), Proceedings of the Seventh International Congress of Phonetic Sciences, pp. 349–54. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Ladefoged, P. & Johnson, K. 2014. A Course in Phonetics, 7th edn. Boston, MA: Wadsworth Cengage Learning.Google Scholar
Ladefoged, P. & Maddieson, I. 1996. The Sounds of the World’s Languages. Cambridge, MA: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Ladefoged, P. & Traill, A. 1984. Linguistic phonetic description of clicks. Language 60: 120.Google Scholar
Lado, R. 1957. Linguistics across Cultures. Ann Arbor, MI: University of Michigan Press.Google Scholar
Lado, R. 1964. Language Teaching: A Scientific Approach. NY: McGraw-Hill.Google Scholar
Lakoff, G. 1965/1970. On the Nature of Syntactic Irregularity. Report NSF-16. Cambridge MA: The Computation Laboratory of Harvard University. 1970: pub. as Irregularity in Syntax. NY: Holt, Rinehart & Winston.Google Scholar
Lakoff, G. 1971. On generative semantics. In Steinberg, D. & Jakobovits, L. (eds.), Semantics: An Interdisciplinary Reader in Philosophy, Linguistics, and Psychology, pp. 232–96. NY: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Lakoff, G. 1972a. Hedges: A study of meaning criteria and the logic of fuzzy concepts. In Peranteau, P. M. et al. (eds.), Papers from the Eighth Regional Meeting of the Chicago Linguistic Society, pp. 183228. Chicago Linguistic Society.Google Scholar
Lakoff, G. 1972b. Linguistics and natural logic. In Davidson, D. & Harman, G. (eds.), Semantics of Natural Language, pp. 545665. Dordrecht: D. Reidel.Google Scholar
Lakoff, G. 1973. Fuzzy grammar and the performance/competence terminology game. Papers from the Ninth Regional Meeting of the Chicago Linguistic Society, pp. 271–91. Chicago Linguistic Society.Google Scholar
Lakoff, G. 1987. Women, Fire, and Dangerous Things: What Categories Reveal about the Mind. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Lakoff, G. 1991. Cognitive versus generative linguistics: new commitments influence results. Language and Communication 11: 5362.Google Scholar
Lakoff, G. 2003. Framing the Dems. The American Prospect 14: 32.Google Scholar
Lakoff, G. & Johnson, M. 1980. Metaphors we Live by. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Lakoff, G. & Johnson, M. 1999. Philosophy in the Flesh: The Embodied Mind and its Challenge to Western Thought. NY: Basic Books.Google Scholar
Lakoff, G. & Ross, J. R. [1967]1976. Is deep structure necessary? In McCawley, (ed.), pp. 159–64.Google Scholar
Lakoff, G. & Turner, M. 1989. More than Cool Reason: A Field Guide to Poetic Metaphor. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Lakoff, R. 1973. The logic of politeness: Or minding your P’s and Q’s. In Corum, C. et al. (eds.), Papers from the Ninth Regional Meeting of the Chicago Linguistic Society, pp. 292305. Chicago Linguistic Society.Google Scholar
Lakoff, R. 1975. Language and Women’s Place. NY: Harper & Row.Google Scholar
Lakoff, R. 1979. Stylistic strategies within a grammar of style. In Orasanu, J. et al. (eds.), Annals of the New York Academy of Science: Language, Sex, and Gender 327, pp. 5378.Google Scholar
Laks, B. 2002. Le comparatisme de la généalogie à la génétique. Langages 146: 1946.Google Scholar
Lallot, J. 2003. À propos des syncatégorèmes: Consignification et signification adjacente dans la tradition logico-grammaticale grecque. Histoire Épistémologie Langage 25: 932.Google Scholar
Lambek, J. 1958. The mathematics of sentence structure. American Mathematical Monthly 65: 154–70.Google Scholar
Lamy, B. [1675]1998. La Rhétorique ou l’Art de parler. Timmermans, B. (ed.). crit. edn. Paris: Presses universitaires de France.Google Scholar
Lancaster–Oslo–Bergen Corpus. 1970–8. [G. Leech & S. Johansson, project leaders]. Lancaster University, Universities of Oslo and Bergen.Google Scholar
Lancelin, P. F. 1801. Introduction à l’analyse des sciences, ou de la génération, des fondemens, et des instrumens de nos connoissances. Paris: Bossange, Masson & Besson.Google Scholar
Lancelot, C. & Arnauld, A. [1660]1966. Grammaire générale et raisonnée. 1966: Brekle, H. E. (ed.), repr. of 1676 edn. Stuttgart-Bad Cannstatt: Friedrich Frommann Verlag.Google Scholar
Land, S. K. 1977. Adam Smith’s ‘Considerations concerning the First Formation of Languages.’ Jrnl. of the History of Ideas 38: 677–90.Google Scholar
Landau, S. I. 2001. Dictionaries: The Art and Craft of Lexicography, 2nd edn. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Landsberger, B. & Hallock, R. 1956. Part ii: Old Babylonian grammatical texts, Part iii: Neobabylonian grammatical texts. In Landsberger, B. et al. (eds.), Materialien zum sumerischen Lexikon IV, pp. 45202. Rome: Pontificium Institutum Biblicum.Google Scholar
Langacker, R. W. 1969. On pronominalization and the chain of command. In Reibel, D. A. & Schane, S. A. (eds.), Modern Studies in English: Readings in Transformational Grammar, pp. 160–86. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.Google Scholar
Langacker, R. 1977. Syntactic reanalysis. In Li, C. N. (ed.), Mechanisms of Syntactic Change, pp. 57139. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press.Google Scholar
Langacker, R. 1987. Foundations of Cognitive Grammar, vol. i. Stanford University Press.Google Scholar
Langacker, R. 1991a. Concept, Image, and Symbol: The Cognitive Basis of Grammar. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Langacker, R. 1991b. Foundations of Cognitive Grammar, vol. ii. Descriptive Application. Stanford University Press.Google Scholar
Langacker, R. 2008. Cognitive Grammar: A Basic Introduction. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Langendoen, D. T. 1968. The London School of Linguistics: A Study of the Linguistic Theories of B. Malinowski and J. R. Firth. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Language Activator. 2002. Longman Language Activator, new edn. Harlow: Pearson Education.Google Scholar
Lantolf, J. 2000. Sociocultural Theory and Second Language Learning. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Lantolf, J. & Appel, G. (eds.). 1994. Vygotskian Approaches to Second Language Research. Norwood, NJ: Ablex.Google Scholar
Lapidge, M. 2004. Tatwine. In Oxford Dictionary of National Biography, vol. liii, pp. 831–2. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
LaPointe, L. L. 2012. Paul Broca and the Origins of Language in the Brain. San Diego, CA: Plural Publishing.Google Scholar
Large, A. 1985. The Artifical Language Movement. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Laromiguière, P. 1805. Paradoxes de Condillac, ou Réflexions sur la langue des calculs. Paris: Guillemonet.Google Scholar
Larsen-Freeman, D. 1997. Chaos/complexity science and second language acquisition. Applied Linguistics 18: 141–65.Google Scholar
Lass, R. 1978. Mapping constraints in phonological reconstruction: On climbing down trees without falling out of them. In Fisiak, J. (ed.), Recent Developments in Historical Linguistics, pp. 245–86. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Lass, R. 1997. Historical Linguistics and Language Change. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Lassen, C. 1847. Indische Alterthumskunde, vol. i. Bonn: Koenig.Google Scholar
Latham, R. G. 1851. The Germania of Tacitus, with Ethnological Dissertations and Notes. London: Taylor, Walton & Maberly.Google Scholar
Laurie, S. S. 1899. Lectures on Language and Linguistic Method in the School: Delivered in the University of Cambridge, Easter Term. London: Oliver & Boyd.Google Scholar
Lauwers, P. 1998. Jules Gilliéron: Contrainte et liberté dans le changement linguistique. Orbis 40: 6395.Google Scholar
Lave, J. & Wenger, E. 1991. Situated Learning: Legitimate Peripheral Participation. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Law, V. 1982. The Insular Latin Grammarians. Woodbridge: Boydell Press.Google Scholar
Law, V. 1987. An unnoticed late Latin grammar: The Ars minor of Scaurus? Rheinisches Museum für Philologie 130: 6789.Google Scholar
Law, V. 1990. Indian influence on early Arab phonetics – or coincidence? In Carter, M. G. & Versteegh, K. (eds.), Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar,vol. ii, pp. 215–27. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Law, V. (ed.). 1993. History of Linguistic Thought in the Early Middle Ages. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Law, V. 1995. Wisdom, Authority and Grammar in the Seventh Century: Decoding Virgilius Maro Grammaticus. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Law, V. 1997. Grammar and Grammarians in the Early Middle Ages. London: Longmans.Google Scholar
Law, V. 2003. The History of Linguistics in Europe: From Plato to 1600. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Lawrence, W. 1953. The synthesis of speech from signals which have a low information rate. In Jackson, W. (ed.), Communication Theory, pp. 460–69. London: Butterworths.Google Scholar
Lazard, G. 1995. Typological research on actancy: The Paris RIVALC group. In Shibatani, & Bynon, (eds.), pp. 167213.Google Scholar
Lee, K.-M. & Ramsey, S.R. 2011. A History of the Korean Language. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Lee, P. 1996. The Whorf Theory Complex: A Critical Reconstruction. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Leech, G. 1969. Towards a Semantic Description of English. London: Longman.Google Scholar
Leech, G. 1983. Principles of Pragmatics. London: Longman.Google Scholar
Leech, G. 2008. Language in Literature: Style and Foregrounding. Harlow: Pearson Longman.Google Scholar
Leech, G. & Short, M. 1981/2007. Style in Fiction: A Linguistic Introduction to English Fictional Prose, 1st/2nd edns. London: Longman.Google Scholar
Lees, R. B. & Klima, E. S. 1963. Rules for English pronominalization. Language 39: 1728.Google Scholar
Leff, G. 1975. William of Ockham: The Metamorphosis of Scholastic Discourse. University of Manchester Press.Google Scholar
Lehiste, I. (ed.). 1967. Readings in Acoustic Phonetics. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Lehmann, C. 1982/1995. Thoughts on Grammaticalization: A Programmatic Sketch, vol. i. Cologne: Institut für Sprachwissenschaft. 1995: rev. repr. Munich: Lincom Europa.Google Scholar
Lehmann, W. P. 1973. A structural principle of language and its implications. Language 49: 4766.Google Scholar
Lehmann, W. P. 1974. Proto-Indo-European Syntax. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press.Google Scholar
Lehnart, W. & Ringle, M. H. (eds). 1982. Strategies for Natural Language Processing. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.Google Scholar
Lehrer, A. 1974. Semantic Fields and Lexical Structure. Amsterdam: North-Holland.Google Scholar
Lehrer, A. & Kittay, E. F. (eds.). 1992. Frames, Fields, and Contrasts. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.Google Scholar
Leibniz, G. W. 1666. Dissertatio de arte combinatoria. Leipzig: Fick & Seubold.Google Scholar
Leibniz, G. W. [1765]1966. Brunschwig, J. (ed.), Nouveaux essais sur l’entendement humain. Paris: Garnier-Flammarion.Google Scholar
Leibniz, G. W. [1765]1981. Remnant, P. & Bennett, J. (eds.), New Essays on Human Understanding. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Leibniz, G. W. 1956. Loemker, L. E. (ed.), Philosophical Papers and Letters. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Leitz, C. 2008. Les trente premiers versets de la Litanie d’Osiris à Esna (Esna 217). Revue d’Égyptologie 59: 231–66.Google Scholar
Liebrucks, B. 1977. Drei Revolutionen der Denkart. Wiesbaden: Franz Steiner Verlag.Google Scholar
Lelekov-Boissard, T. & Dominey, P. F. 2002. Human brain potentials reveal similar processing of non-linguistic abstract structure and linguistic syntactic structure. Neurophysiologie Clinique/Clinical Neurophysiology 32: 7284.Google Scholar
Lenneberg, E. H. 1967. Biological Foundations of Language. NY: John Wiley & Sons.Google Scholar
Lenning, M. 1978. Acoustic measurement of linguistic change: The modern Paris vowel system. PhD dissertation. University of Pennsylvania.Google Scholar
Leopold, W. 1939/1947/1949a/1949b. Speech Development of a Bilingual Child: A Linguist’s Record. 1939: vol. i: Vocabulary Growth in the First Two Years. 1947: vol. ii: Sound Learning in the First Two Years. 1949a: vol. iii: Grammar and General Problems. 1949b: vol. iv: Diary from Age Two. Evanston, IL: Northwestern University Press.Google Scholar
Le Page, R. & Tabouret-Keller, A. 1985. Acts of Identity: Creole-Based Approaches to Ethnicity and Language. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Lepore, E. & Ludwig, K. 2005. Donald Davidson: Meaning, Truth, Language and Reality. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Lepschy, G. C. 1966/1968/1970. La linguistica strutturale. Turin: G. Einaudi. 1968: La Linguistique structurale. Paris: Éditions Payot. 1970: A Survey of Structural Linguistics. London: Faber & Faber.Google Scholar
Lepschy, G. C. (ed.). 1994. History of Linguistics, vol. i: The Eastern Traditions of Linguistics; vol. ii: Classical and Medieval Linguistics. London: Longman.Google Scholar
Lepsius, R. 1855. Das allgemeine linguistische Alphabet: Grundsätze der Übertragung fremder Schriftsysteme und bisher noch ungeschriebener Sprachen in europäische Buchstaben. Berlin: W. Hertz.Google Scholar
Lepsius, K. R. & Whitney, W. D. 1865. On the relation of vowels and consonants. Jrnl. of the American Oriental Society 8: 357–73.Google Scholar
Leskien, A. 1876/1963. Die Declination im Slavisch-Litauischen und Germanischen. Leipzig: S. Hirzel. 1963: repr. Leipzig: Zentral-Antiquariat der DDR.Google Scholar
Lesniewski, S. 1929/1992. Grundzüge eines neuen Systems der Grundlagen der Mathematik. Fundamenta Mathematicae 13: 181. 1992: S. J. Surma et al. (trans.), Fundamentals of a new system of the foundations of mathematics. In S. J. Surma et al. (eds.), Collected Works, 2 vols., pp. 410–605. Dordrecht: Kluwer.Google Scholar
Levelt, W. J. M. 1989. Speaking: From Intention to Articulation. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Lévi-Strauss, C. 1949/1969. Les Structures élémentaires de la parenté. Paris: Presses universitaires de France. 1969: trans., rev. edn., The Elementary Structures of Kinship. Boston: Beacon Press.Google Scholar
Lévi-Strauss, C. 1958/1963. Anthropologie structurale. Paris: Plon. 1963: trans., Structural Anthropology. NY: Basic Books.Google Scholar
Lévi-Strauss, C. 1962. La Pensée sauvage. Paris: Plon.Google Scholar
Lévi-Strauss, C. 1964–71. Mythologiques. 4 vols. Paris: Plon.Google Scholar
Levin, A. 1985. The distinction between nominal and verbal sentences according to the Arab grammarians. Zeitschrift für arabische Linguistik 15: 118–27.Google Scholar
Levinson, S. C. 1983. Pragmatics. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Levinson, S. C. 1992. Primer for the field investigation of spatial description and conception. Pragmatics 2: 547.Google Scholar
Levinson, S. C. 1995. Three levels of meaning. In Palmer, F. R. (ed.), Grammar and Meaning: Essays in Honour of Sir John Lyons, pp. 90115. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Levinson, S. C. 2000a. Presumptive Meanings: The Theory of Generalized Conversational Implicature. Cambridge MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Levinson, S. C. 2000b. Yelî Dnye and the theory of basic color terms. Jrnl. of Linguistic Anthropology 10: 355.Google Scholar
Levinson, S. C. 2003. Space in Language and Cognition. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Lew, R. 2007. Linguistic semantics and lexicography: A troubled relationship. In Fabiszak, M. (ed.), Language and Meaning: Cognitive and Functional Perspectives, pp. 217–24. Frankfurt am Main: Peter Lang.Google Scholar
Lew, R. 2010. Multimodal lexicography: The representation of meaning in electronic dictionaries. Lexikos 20: 290306.Google Scholar
Lew, R. 2011. Online dictionaries of English. In Fuertes-Olivera, P. A. & Bergenholtz, H. (eds.), e-Lexicography: The Internet, Digital Initiatives and Lexicography, pp. 230–50. London: Continuum.Google Scholar
Lewis, C. I. & Cooper, H. L. 1932. Symbolic Logic. NY: Century Co.Google Scholar
Lewis, R. 2007. Language, Mind and Nature: Artificial Languages in England from Bacon to Locke. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Lewy, E. [1942]1964. Der Bau der europäischen Sprachen, 2nd edn. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer.Google Scholar
Lexis, W. (ed.). 1904. Die Universitäten im Deutschen Reich. Berlin: Asher & Co.Google Scholar
Li, C. N. (ed.). 1975. Word Order and Word Order Change. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press.Google Scholar
Li, C. N. (ed.). 1976. Subject and Topic. NY: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Li, C. N. (ed.). 1977. Mechanisms of Syntactic Change. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press.Google Scholar
Liberman, A. M., Cooper, F. S., Shankweiler, D. P., & Studdert-Kennedy, M. 1967. Perception of the speech code. Psychological Review 74: 431–61.Google Scholar
Liberman, A. M., Delattre, P. C., Gerstman, L. T., & Cooper, F. S. 1956. Tempo of frequency change as a cue for distinguishing classes of speech sounds. Jrnl. of Experimental Psychology 52: 127–37.Google Scholar
Liberman, A. M., Harris, H. S., Hoffman, K. S., & Griffith, B. C. 1957. The discrimination of speech sounds within and across phoneme boundaries. Jrnl. of Experimental Psychology 54: 358–68.Google Scholar
Liberman, A. M. & Mattingly, I. G. 1985. The motor theory of speech perception revised. Cognition 21: 136.Google Scholar
Liberman, M. 1975/1979. The Intonational System of English. PhD dissertation, MIT. 1979: pub. NY: Garland Press.Google Scholar
Liberman, M. & Prince, A. 1977. On stress and linguistic rhythm. Linguistic Inquiry 8: 249336.Google Scholar
Liddell, H. G. & Scott, R. 1843. A Greek–English Dictionary. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Lieberman, P., Sawashima, M., Harris, K. S., & Gay, T. 1970. The articulatory implementation of the breath-group and prominence: Crico-thyroid muscular activity in intonation. Language 46: 312–27.Google Scholar
Lightfoot, D. W. 1979. Principles of Diachronic Syntax. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Lightfoot, D. W. 1999. The Development of Language: Acquisition, Change, and Evolution. Malden, MA: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Lı̄lātilakam. [14th c. ce]1974. Nayar, V. K. (ed.) w. comm. Kottayam: National Bookstall.Google Scholar
Liljencrants, J. 1967. The OVE III speech synthesiser. Speech Transmission Laboratory Quarterly Progress and Status Report 8: 7681. Stockholm: KTH [Royal Institute of Technology].Google Scholar
Limaye, V. P. & Wadekar, R. D. (eds.). 1958. Aṣṭādas΄a-Upaniṣadaḥ [Eighteen Upaniṣads]. Pune: Vaidika Saṃs΄odhana Maṇḍala.Google Scholar
Linda, M. 1996. Kommentiertes Verzeichnis des Vorlesungen F. de Saussures an der Universität Genf (1891–1913). Cahiers Ferdinand de Saussure 49: 6584.Google Scholar
Lindau, M. 1978. Vowel features. Language 54: 541–63.Google Scholar
Lindblom, B. 1996. Role of articulation in speech perception: Clues from production. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 99: 1683–92.Google Scholar
Lindström Tiedemann, T. 2006. Linguistics as a university subject: Early history, in Europe. In Brown, (ed.), pp. 2340.Google Scholar
Lipka, L. 1989. The state of the art in lexicology. In Müllenbrock, H.-J. & Noll-Wiemann, R. (eds.), Anglistentag 1988 Göttingen.Vorträge (Tagungsberichte des Anglistentags Verbands deutscher Anglisten 10), pp. 250–63. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer.Google Scholar
Lipka, L. 1992. An Outline of English Lexicology. Lexical Structure, Word Semantics, and Word-Formation, 2nd edn. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer.Google Scholar
Lippi-Green, R. 1997/2011. English with an Accent: Language, Ideology, and Discrimination in the United States. London: Psychology Press. 2011: 2nd edn. NY: Routledge.Google Scholar
Lisker, L. & Abramson, A. S. 1964. A cross-language study of voicing in initial stops: Acoustical measurements. Word 20: 384422.Google Scholar
Lisker, L. & Abramson, A. S. 1970. The voicing dimension: Some experiments in comparative phonetics. In Proceedings of the Sixth International Congress of Phonetic Sciences, pp. 563–67. Academia Prague.Google Scholar
Littlewood, W. 1981. Communicative Language Teaching: An Introduction. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Liu, Q. [1711]1954. Zhu zi bianlüe. Beijing: Zhonghua shuju.Google Scholar
Local, J. 1992. Modeling assimilation in nonsegmental, rule-free synthesis. In Docherty, & Ladd, (eds.), pp. 190228.Google Scholar
Locke, J. [1671]1936. An Early Draft of Locke’s Essay. Aaron, R. & Gibb, J. (eds.), pp. 174. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Locke, J. [1690]/1971–4/1975. 1971–4: An Essay Concerning Human Understanding. Yolton, J. W. (ed.), 2 vols. London: J. M. Dent. 1975: Nidditch, P. H. (ed.). Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Lodwick, F. [1647]2011. A Common Writing. Intro. and comm. by Henderson, F. & Poole, W. (eds.). Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Lodwick, F. 1652/1972. The Groundwork, or Foundation Laid, (or so Intended) for the Framing of a New Perfect Language and an Universall or Common Writing.London: For the author. 1972: in V. Salmon (ed.), The Works of Francis Lodwick: A Study of his Writings in the Intellectual Context of the Seventeenth Century, pp. 203–22. London: Longman.Google Scholar
London–Lund Corpus of Spoken English. 1959/1975. [S. Greenbaum & J. Svartvik]. University College of London & Lund University.Google Scholar
Long, A. A. & Sedley, D. N. 1989. The Hellenistic Philosophers, 2 vols. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Longacre, R. 1983/1996. The Grammar of Discourse, 1st/2nd edns. NY: PlenumGoogle Scholar
Longman Dictionary of Contemporary English [LDOCE]. 1978/2009. 1st edn. London: Longman. 2009: 5th edn. Harlow: Pearson Education.Google Scholar
Lo Piparo, F. 1979. Lingua, intelletuali, egemonia in Gramsci. Bari: Editori Laterza.Google Scholar
Lord, C. 1993. Historical Change in Serial Verb Constructions. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Losonsky, M. 2001. Enlightenment and Action from Descartes to Kant: Passionate Thought. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Losonsky, M. 2007. Language, meaning, memory, and mind in Locke’s Essay. In Newman, L. (ed.), The Cambridge Companion to Locke’s ‘Essay concerning Human Understanding’, pp. 286312. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Lotman, J. M. [1972]1976. The Analysis of the Poetic Text. (1972: Russ. orig.). Ann Arbor, MI: University of Michigan.Google Scholar
Lottner, C. 1862. Ausnahmen der ersten Lautverschiebung. Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung auf dem Gebiete des Deutschen, Griechischen, und Lateinischen 11: 161205.Google Scholar
Lounsbury, F. G. 1956. A semantic analysis of the Pawnee kinship usage. Language 32: 158–94.Google Scholar
Louvain International Database of Spoken English Interlanguage. 1995. [S. Granger, project director]. Université Catholique de Louvain.Google Scholar
Love, N. 1988. The linguistic thought of J. R. Firth. In Harris, (ed.), pp. 148–64.Google Scholar
Lozanov, G. 1992. Suggestology and Outlines of Suggestopedy. Philadelphia, PA: Gordon & Breach.Google Scholar
Lu, F. [7th c.] Qie yun. Repr. as Tang xie quan ben Wang Renxu bu que Qie yun jiaojian by Long Yuchun. Hong Kong: The Chinese University Press.Google Scholar
, S. 1944. Wenyan xuzi [‘Empty Words of the Classical Language’]. Beijing: Kaiming shudian.Google Scholar
Lu, Y. [1311/1324]/1988. Yu zhu [‘Grammatical Particles’]. 1988: repr. as Zhuyuci ji zhu by Wang Kezhong. Beijing: Zhonghua shuju.Google Scholar
Lubker, J. & Gay, T. 1982. Anticipatory labial coarticulation: Experimental, biological, and linguistic variables. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 71: 437–48.Google Scholar
Lucy, J. A. 1992a. Grammatical Categories and Cognition: A Case Study of the Linguistic Relativity Hypothesis. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Lucy, J. A. 1992b. Language Diversity and Thought: A Reformulation of the Linguistic Relativity Hypothesis. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Luhtala, A. 1993. Syntax and dialectic in Carolingian commentaries on Priscian’s Institutiones grammaticae. In Law, (ed.), pp. 145–85.Google Scholar
Luhtala, A. 2003. A Priscian commentary attributed to Eriugena. History of Linguistics 1999. Proceedings of the VIIth International Conference on the History of Language Sciences. In S. Auroux (ed.), Studies in the History of Language Sciences, pp. 19–30. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Luther, M. [1530]1909/1955/1983. Ein Sendbrief von Dolmetschen und Fürbit fer heiligenn. In Dr. Martin Luthers Werke. Weimar: Hermann Böhlaus Nachfolger, vol. xxx, part ii, pp. 63246. 1955/repr. 1983: C. Jacobs (trans.), rev. Bachman, E., ‘On translating: An open letter.’ In Luther’s Works, American edition, vol. xxv, 177–202. St. Louis, MO: Concordia.Google Scholar
Luther, M. 1953, Biblia, das ist, die gantze Heilige Schrifft Deudsch. Mart. Luth [‘The Bible, that is the Entire Holy Scripture [in] German. Mart. Luth’]. Wittenberg: Hans Lufft.Google Scholar
Lyons, J. 1964. Structural Semantics: An Analysis of Part of the Vocabulary of Plato. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.Google Scholar
Lyons, J. 1968. Introduction to Theoretical Linguistics. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Lyons, J. 1975. Deixis as the source of reference. In Keenan, (ed.), pp. 6183.Google Scholar
Lyons, J. 1977. Semantics, 2 vols. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Lyons, J. 2002. John Lyons. In Brown, & Law, (eds.), pp. 170–99.Google Scholar
M-664/M-669. 1771. En supposant les hommes abandonnés à leurs facultés naturelles, sont-ils en état d’inventer le langage, et par quels moyens parviendront-ils d’eux-mêmes à cette invention? [M-664, M-669 in answer, cited according to their assigned numbers in the archive.] Archiv der Berlin-Brandenburgischen Akademie der Wissenschaften.Google Scholar
Ma, J. [1898]1986. Ma shi wen tong. Repr. Shanghai: Jiaoyu Chubanshe.Google Scholar
Maat, J. 2004. Philosophical Languages in the Seventeenth Century: Dalgarno, Wilkins, Leibniz. Dordrecht: Kluwer.Google Scholar
Macaulay, A. 1747. Polygraphy or Shorthand. London: for the author.Google Scholar
Macaulay, R. K. S. 1977. Language, Social Class, and Education: A Glasgow Study. Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar
MacCorquodale, K. 1969. B. F. Skinner’s verbal behavior: A retrospective appreciation. Jrnl. of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior 12 : 831–41.Google Scholar
MacDonald, M. C., Pearlmutter, N. J., & Seidenberg, M. S. 1994. The lexical nature of syntactic ambiguity resolution. Psychological Review 101 : 676703.Google Scholar
Mach, E. 1886. Beiträge zur Analyse der Empfindungen. Jena: Gustav Fischer.Google Scholar
Macken, M. A. & Barton, D. 1980. The acquisition of the voicing contrast in English: A study of voice onset time in word-initial stop consonants. Jrnl. of Child Language 7: 4174.Google Scholar
MacLaury, R. E. 1997. Color and Cognition in Mesoamerica: Constructing Categories as Vantages. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press.Google Scholar
MacMahon, A. 1986. The International Phonetic Association: The first 100 years. Jrnl. of the Intl. Phonetic Association 16: 3038.Google Scholar
MacMahon, M. K. C. 1981. Henry Sweet’s system of shorthand. In Abercrombie, D. et al. (eds.). Towards a History of Phonetics, pp. 265–81. Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar
Macnamara, J. 1967. The bilingual’s linguistic performance: A psychological overview. Jrnl. of Social Issues 23: 5977.Google Scholar
Macnamara, J. & Kushnir, S. 1971. The linguistic independence of bilinguals: The input switch. Jrnl. of Verbal Learning & Verbal Behavior 10: 480–7.Google Scholar
MacWhinney, B. (ed.). 1999. The Emergence of Language. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.Google Scholar
MacWhinney, B. 2000a, b. The CHILDES Project: Tools for Analyzing Talk. 2000a: Transcription Format and Programs, vol. i, 3rd edn. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. 2000b: The Database, vol. ii, 3rd edn. NY: Psychology Press.Google Scholar
MacWhinney, B. 2001. First language acquisition. In Aronoff, & Rees-Miller, (eds.), pp. 466–87.Google Scholar
MacWhinney, B. & Snow, C. 1984 [earlier transcripts 1960s]. CHILDES (Child Language Data Exchange System). Pittsburgh, PA: Carnegie Mellon University.Google Scholar
Maddieson, I. 1984. Patterns of Sounds. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Maeda, S. 1982. A digital simulation method of the vocal-tract system. Speech Communication 1: 199229.Google Scholar
Maengel, M. 1989. Zeichen, Sprache, Symbol. Herders semiologische Gratwanderung mit einem Seitenblick auf Rousseaus Schlafwandeln. In Gessinger, J. & von Rahden, W. (eds.), Theorien vom Ursprung der Sprache, pp. 37589. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Magen, H. S. 1997. The extent of vowel-to-vowel coarticulation in English. Jrnl. of Phonetics 25: 187205.Google Scholar
Maimieux, J. de. 1797. Pasigraphie. Paris: Im Bureau der Pasigraphie.Google Scholar
Maine de Biran, M.-F.-P. [1802]1987. Influence de l’habitude sur la faculté de penser (= Œuvres de Maine de Biran, vol. ii. Romeyer-Dherbey, G., ed.). Paris: J. Vrin.Google Scholar
Maine de Biran, M.-F.-P. [1807]1995. De l’aperception immédiate (Mémoire de Berlin 1807). 1995: Radrizzani, I. (ed.), Œuvres de Maine de Biran, vol. iv. Paris: J. Vrin.Google Scholar
Maine de Biran, M.-F.-P. [1812]2001. Essai sur les fondements de la psychologie. Paris: J. Vrin.Google Scholar
Maine de Biran, M.-F.-P. [1802]1988. Mémoire sur la décomposition de la pensée. Paris: J. Vrin.Google Scholar
Maingueneau, D. 1994. L’Énonciation en linguistique française. Paris: Hachette.Google Scholar
Maingueneau, D. 1997. L’Analyse du discours. Paris: Hachette.Google Scholar
Maingueneau, D. & Cossutta, F. 1995. L’analyse des discours constituants. Langages 117: 112–25.Google Scholar
Makkai, A. 1972. Idiom Structure in English. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Makoni, S. & Meinhof, U. 2004. Western perspectives in applied linguistics in Africa. AILA Review 17: 77104.Google Scholar
Makoni, S. & Pennycook, A. (eds.) 2007. Disinventing and Reconstituting Languages. NY: Multilingual Matters.Google Scholar
Malcolm, N. 1989. Wittgenstein on language and rules. Philosophy 64: 528.Google Scholar
Malinowski, B. 1923. The problem of meaning in primitive languages. In Ogden, C. K. & Richards, I. A. (eds.), The Meaning of Meaning: A Study of the Influence of Language upon Thought and the Science of Symbolism, pp. 296336. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co.Google Scholar
Mallinson, G. & Blake, B. 1981. Language Typology. Amsterdam: North-Holland.Google Scholar
Maman, A. 2004. Comparative Semitic Philology in the Middle Ages: From Sa‘adiah Gaon to Ibn Barūn (10th–12th). D. Lyons (trans. fr. Hebrew). Leiden: E. J. Brill.Google Scholar
Maman, A. & Ben-Porat, E. 2012. Kitāb al-nutaf R. Yehuda Ḥayyūj’s Philological Commentary to the Books of Prophets in ‘Ali ibn Suleymān’s Compedium. Intro., annot. edn. and (Hebrew) trans. Jerusalem: ha-Aḳademyah la-lashon ha-‘Ivrit.Google Scholar
Mançano, M. de. 1620. Arte de la lengua Chiõ Chiu [‘Grammar of the Chiõ Chiu language’], ms: University of Barcelona Library.Google Scholar
Mańczak, W. 1980. Laws of analogy. In Fisiak, J. (ed.), Historical Morphology, pp. 283–8. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Mandelbaum, D. G. (ed.). 1985. Selected Writings of Edward Sapir in Language, Culture and Personality. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Mandeville, B. [1724]1924. The Fable of the Bees. Kaye, F. B. (ed.). Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Mann, W. & Thompson, S. 1988. Rhetorical Structure Theory: Towards a functional theory of text organization. Text 8: 243–81.Google Scholar
Mann, W., Matthiessen, C., & Thompson, S. 1992. Rhetorical Structure Theory and text analysis. In Mann, W. & Thompson, S. (eds.), Discourse Description: Diverse Linguistic Analyses of a Fund-raising Text, pp. 3978. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Mansour, G. 1993. Multilingualism and Nation Building. Clevedon: Multilingual Matters.Google Scholar
Manuel, S. Y. 1995. Speakers nasalize/ð/after/n/, but listeners still hear/ð/. Jrnl. of Phonetics 23: 453–76.Google Scholar
Man’yŎshū. 759–82. A collection of myriad words. [Old Japanese Poetic anthology compiled between 759 and 782]. Unpub.Google Scholar
Marinetti, A. & Meli, M. 1986. Ferdinand de Saussure. Le leggende germaniche. Este: Zielo.Google Scholar
Marmo, C. 1995. A pragmatic approach to language in Modism. In Ebbesen, (ed.), pp. 169–83.Google Scholar
Marshman, J. 1814. Clavis sinica. Serampore: Mission Press.Google Scholar
Martin, J. R. 1997. Analysing genre: Functional parameters. In Christie, F. & Martin, J. R. (eds.), Genres and Institutions: Social Processes in the Workplace and School, pp. 339. London: Cassell.Google Scholar
Martin, J. R. 2002. Meaning beyond the clause: SFL perspectives. Annual Review of Applied Linguistics 22: 5274.Google Scholar
Martin, L. T. 1984. Bede as a linguistic scholar. American Benedictine Review 35: 204–17.Google Scholar
Martinet, A. 1949. Phonology as Functional Phonetics. London: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Martinet, A. 1955. Économie des changements phonétiques: Traité de phonologie diachronique. Berne: A Francke.Google Scholar
Martinet, A. 1960. Éléments de linguistique générale. Paris: Armand Colin.Google Scholar
Martinet, A. 1962. A Functional View of Language. Oxford: Clarendon PressGoogle Scholar
Martinet, A. 1965. La Linguistique synchronique. Paris: Presses universitaires de France.Google Scholar
Martinet, A. (ed.). 1968. Le Langage. Paris: Gallimard.Google Scholar
Martínez Delgado, J. 2004. Yaḥyà Ibn Dāwūd: El libro de Ḥayyūğ (Versión original árabe siglo X). Introducción y Traducción. Universidad de Granada.Google Scholar
Martínez Delgado, J. 2006. La semitística comparada en Alandalús. De los orígenes a Ibn Barūn. Zaragoza: Instituto de Estudios Islámicos y del Oriente Próximo.Google Scholar
Martínez Delgado, J. 2007. Fragmento de un glosario judeo-árabe del Libro de Génesis. Collectanea Christiana Orientalia 4: 5571.Google Scholar
Martínez Delgado, J. (trans./ed.). 2008. El Kitāb al-taḏkı̄r wa-l-ta’nı̄ṯ de Mošeh Ibn Ğiqatela (S. xi). Miscelánea de Estudios Árabes y Hebraicos (Sección de Árabe-Islam) 57: 207–38.Google Scholar
Martínez Delgado, J.. 2010. Šĕlomo ben Mobarak ben Ṣa‘ı̄r, Kitāb at-Taysı̄r, El Libro de la Facilitación Kitāb at-Taysı̄r (Diccionario de Hebreo Bíblico en Judeoárabe). Editorial Universidad de Granada.Google Scholar
Martínez Delgado, J. 2016. Risālat al-tanbı̄h by Ibn Ĝanāḥ: An edition, translation and study. Jerusalem Studies in Arabic and Islam 43: 309–55.Google Scholar
Martini, M. S. J. [1653]1998. Opere minori, vol. ii. Trento: Università degli studi di Trento.Google Scholar
Martinus, Dacus, [Morten Mogensen], . [1290?]1961. Modi significandi. In Roos, H. (ed.), Martini Daci Opera, Corpus Philosophorum Danicorum Medii Aevi II, pp. 1–118. Copenhagen: Gads Forlag.Google Scholar
Marty, A. 1908. Untersuchungen zur Grundlegung der allgemeine Grammatik und Sprachphilosophie. Halle: Max Niemeyer.Google Scholar
Marx, K. & Engels, F. [1845–6]1969. Die Deutsche Ideologie. In Feuerbach, I., Werke, vol. iii, pp. 5–530. Berlin: Dietz Verlag.Google Scholar
Masamune, A. (ed.) 1962a. WamyŎ ruijū shŎ [‘A thematic compendium of Japanese words’]. Tokyo: Kazama shobŎ.Google Scholar
Masamune, A. (ed.) 1962b. WamyŎ ruijū shŎ sakuin [‘An index to the Compendium of Japanese words’]. Tokyo: Kazama shobŎ.Google Scholar
Maschler, Y. 1994. Metalanguaging and discourse markers in bilingual conversation. Language in Society 23: 325–66.Google Scholar
Maslova, E. 2000. A dynamic approach to the verification of distributional universals. Linguistic Typology 3/4: 307–33.Google Scholar
Maslova, E. 2003. A case for implicational universals. Linguistic Typology 7: 101–8.Google Scholar
Mathesius, V. 1923. Několik slov o podstatěvěty [‘Some words on the essence of the sentence’]. Časopis pro moderní filologii a literatury 10: 16.Google Scholar
Mathesius, V. [1927]1983. Functional linguistics. In Vachek, (ed.), pp. 121–42.Google Scholar
Mathesius, V. 1928. On linguistic characterology with illustrations from Modern English. Actes du Premier Congrès international de Linguistes à La Haye, pp. 5663.Google Scholar
Mathesius, V. 1936a/1964. On some problems of the systematic analysis of grammar. Travaux du Cercle Linguistique de Prague 6: 95107. 1964: repr. in Vachek (ed.), pp. 306–19.Google Scholar
Mathesius, V. 1936b/1966. Deset let Pražského linguistického kroužku. Slovo a Slovesnost 2: 137–45. 1966: Ten years of the Prague Linguistic Circle, in Vachek (ed.), pp. 137–50.Google Scholar
Mathesius, V. 1939. O takzvaném aktuálním cˇlenění věty [‘About the so-called functional sentence perspective’]. Slovo a slovesnost 5: 171–4.Google Scholar
Mathesius, V. 1961/1975. 1961: Obsahovy rozbor soucˇasné anglicˇtiny na základě obecně linguistickém. Prague: ČSAV. 1975: J. Vachek (ed.), L. Bušková (trans.), A Functional Analysis of Present-day English on a General Linguistic Basis. Prague: Academia Publishing House.Google Scholar
Mathesius, V., Jakobson, R., Havránek, B., & Mukařovský, J. 1929. See Prague Linguistic Circle [PLC] 1929.Google Scholar
Mathews, H. J. [1887]1966. Sefer ha-galui. Berlin: Selbstverlage des Vereins M’kize Nirdamim. 2nd edn. Jerusalem: s.e.Google Scholar
Matthaios, S. 1999. Untersuchungen zur Grammatik Aristarchs: Texte und Interpretation zur Wortartenlehre. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.Google Scholar
Matthaios, S. 2001. Das Wortartensystem der Alexandriner. Skizze seiner Entwicklungsgeschichte und Nachwirkung. Göttinger Beiträge zur Sprachwissenschaft 5: 6594.Google Scholar
Matthaios, S., Montanari, F., & Rengakos, A. (eds.). 2011. Ancient Scholarship and Grammar: Archetypes, Concepts and Contexts. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Matthews, P. H. 1993. Grammatical Theory in the United States from Bloomfield to Chomsky. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Matthews, P. H. 1994. Greek and Latin linguistics. In Lepschy, (ed.), vol. ii, pp. 1–133.Google Scholar
Maupertuis, P. L. M. de. [1748/1768]1970. Réflexions philosophiques sur l’origine des langues. In Oeuvres, vol. i. Lyon: Bruyset. In R. Grimsley (ed.), Sur l’origine du langage, pp. 27–57. Geneva: Librairie Droz. In C. Porset (ed.), Varia Linguistica, pp. 25–67. Bordeaux: Éditions Ducros.Google Scholar
Maupertuis, P. L. M. de. [1756]1988. Sur les différens moyens dont les hommes se sont servis pour exprimer leurs idées. In Franzen, W. (ed.), Sprachphilosophische Schriften, pp. 3352. Hamburg: Felix Meiner Verlag.Google Scholar
May, S. 2006. Language policy and minority rights. In Ricento, T. (ed.), An Introduction to Language Policy, Theory and Method, pp. 231–37. Malden, MA: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Mayrhofer, M. 1983. Sanskrit und die Sprachen Alteuropas. Zwei Jahrhunderte des Widerspiels von Entdeckungen und Irrtümern. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.Google Scholar
Mazzocco, A. 1993. Linguistic Theories in Dante and the Humanists: Studies of Language and Intellectual History in Late Medieval and Early Renaissance Italy. Leiden: E. J. Brill.Google Scholar
McCafferty, S. & Stam, G. (eds.). 2009. Gesture: Second Language Acquisition and Classroom Research. NY: Routledge.Google Scholar
McCarthy, J. & Prince, A. 1993. Prosodic Morphology I: Constraint Interaction and Satisfaction. University of Massachusetts, Linguistics Department Faculty Publication Series 14.Google Scholar
McCawley, J. D. 1968a. Concerning the base component of a transformational grammar. Foundations of Language 4: 243–69.Google Scholar
McCawley, J. D. 1968b. The role of semantics in grammar. In Bach, & Harms, (eds.), pp. 125–70.Google Scholar
McCawley, J. D. 1968c. Lexical insertion in a transformational grammar without deep structure. In Darden, B. J. et al. (eds.), Papers from the Fourth Regional Meeting of the Chicago Linguistic Society, pp. 7180. Chicago Linguistic Society.Google Scholar
McCawley, J. D. 1972. Syntactic and Logical Arguments for Semantic Structures. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Linguistics Club (Mimeo).Google Scholar
McCawley, J. D. 1973. The role of notation in generative phonology. In Gross, M. et al. (eds.), The Formal Analysis of Natural Languages, pp. 5162. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
McCawley, J. D. (ed.). 1976. Notes from the Linguistic Underground (Syntax and Semantics 7). NY: Academic Press.Google Scholar
McCawley, J. D. 1982. Thirty Million Theories of Grammar. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
McCawley, J. D. [1981]1993. Everything that Linguists Have Always Wanted to Know about Logic, but Were Ashamed to Ask, 2nd edn. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
McClelland, J. L. & Elman, J. L. 1986. The TRACE model of speech perception. Cognitive Psychology 18: 186.Google Scholar
McConvell, P. & Evans, N. (eds.). 1997. Archaeology and Linguistics. Melbourne: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
McDavid, R. I., Jr. 1952. Review of Jones, D. 1950. The Phoneme: Its Nature and Use. Language 28: 377–86.Google Scholar
McEnery, T. & Hardie, A. 2013. The history of corpus linguistics. In Allen, K. (ed.), The Oxford Handbook of the History of Linguistics, pp. 727–46. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
McEnery, T. & Wilson, A. [1996]2001 Corpus Linguistics, 2nd edn. Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar
McGuinness, B. (ed.). 1979. Ludwig Wittgenstein and the Vienna Circle: Conversations Recorded by Friedrich Waismann. NY: Barnes & Noble.Google Scholar
McGurk, H. & MacDonald, J. 1976. Hearing lips and seeing voices. Nature 264: 7468.Google Scholar
McKirahan, R. D. 2010. Philosophy before Socrates, 2nd edn. Indianapolis, IN: Hackett.Google Scholar
McKoon, G. & Ratcliff, R. 1992. Inferences during reading. Psychological Review 99: 440–66.Google Scholar
McNamara, T. 2004. Language testing. In Davies, A. & Elder, C. (eds.), The Handbook of Applied Linguistics, pp. 763–83. Malden, MA: Blackwell.Google Scholar
McNeill, D. 1985. So you think gestures are non-verbal? Psychological Review 92: 350–71.Google Scholar
McNeill, D. 2005. Gesture and Thought. Chicago University Press.Google Scholar
McQuown, N. A. 1952. Review of Methods in Structural Linguistics by Zellig S. Harris. Language 28: 495504.Google Scholar
McRae, K., Spivey-Knowlton, M. J., & Tanenhaus, M. K. 1998. Modeling the influence of thematic fit (and other constraints) in on-line sentence comprehension. Jrnl. of Memory and Language 38: 283312.Google Scholar
McWhorter, J. H. 2001. The world’s simplest grammars are creole grammars. Linguistic Typology 5: 125–66.Google Scholar
Méhiri, A. 1973. Les Théories grammaticales d’Ibn Jinnı̄. Université de Tunis.Google Scholar
Mehler, J. 1963. Some effects of grammatical transformations on the recall of English sentences. Jrnl. of Verbal Learning and Verbal Behavior 2 : 346–51.Google Scholar
Meillet, A. 1893. Les lois du langage. i: Lois phonétiques. Revue internationale de Sociologie 1: 311–21.Google Scholar
Meillet, A. 1903. Introduction à l’étude comparative des langue indo-européennes. Paris: Hachette.Google Scholar
Meillet, A. 1906/1921. L’état actuel des études de linguistique générale. Revue des idées 3: 296308. 1921: repr. in Meillet 1921, pp. 1–18.Google Scholar
Meillet, A. 1909/1921. Sur la disparition des formes simples du prétérit. Germanisch-Romanische Monatsschrift 1: 521–26. 1921: repr. in Meillet 1921, pp. 149–58.Google Scholar
Meillet, A. 1910. Les méthodes de la linguistique. La Revue du Mois 10: 129–61.Google Scholar
Meillet, A. 1912. L’évolution des formes grammaticales. Scientia (Rivisita di Scienze) 6: 384.Google Scholar
Meillet, A. 1917. Caractères généraux des langues germaniques. Paris: Hachette.Google Scholar
Meillet, A. 1918/1928. Les Langues dans l’Europe nouvelle. Paris: Éditions Payot.Google Scholar
Meillet, A. 1921/1936. Linguistique historique et linguistique générale, vols. i/ii. Paris: Honoré Champion/Paris: Librairie Klincksieck.Google Scholar
Meillet, A. 1995. Pour un manuel de linguistique générale. Granucci, F., ed. Rome: Atti dell’Accademia dei Lincei.Google Scholar
Mejia Quijano, C. 2006. Émile Constantin: Notes du troisième cours de linguistique générale de F. de Saussure. Cahiers Ferdinand de Saussure 58: 83289.Google Scholar
Mel’čuk, I. 1974/1999. Opyt teorii lingvisticˇeskix modelej Smysl-Tekst [‘Toward a Theory of Meaning-Text Linguistic Models’]. Moscow: Nauka. 1999: repr. Moscow: Jazyki russkoj kul’tury.Google Scholar
Mel’čuk, I. 1986. Semantic bases for linguistic description (Meaning-Text Linguistic Theory). In Marino, M. & Pérez, L. (eds.), The Twelfth LACUS Forum 1985, pp. 4187.Google Scholar
Mel’čuk, I. 1988. Semantic description of lexical units in an Explanatory Combinatorial Dictionary: Basic principles and heuristic criteria. Intl. Jrnl. of Lexicography 1: 165–88.Google Scholar
Mel’čuk, I. 1989. Semantic primitives from the viewpoint of the Meaning-Text Linguistic Theory. Quaderni di Semantica 10: 64102.Google Scholar
Mel’čuk, I. 1995. Phrasemes in language and phraseology in linguistics. In Everaert, M. et al. (eds.), Idioms: Structural and Psychological Perspectives, pp. 167232. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.Google Scholar
Mel’čuk, I. 1996. Lexical functions: A tool for the description of lexical relations in the lexicon. In Wanner, L. (ed.), Lexical Functions in Lexicography and Natural Language Processing, pp. 37102. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Mel’čuk, I. 2004a. Actants in semantics and syntax I: Actants in semantics. Linguistics 42: 166.Google Scholar
Mel’čuk, I. 2004b. Actants in semantics and syntax II: Actants in syntax. Linguistics 42: 247–91.Google Scholar
Mel’čuk, I. 2006. Explanatory Combinatorial Dictionary. In Sica, G. (ed.), Open Problems in Linguistics and Lexicography, pp. 225355. Monza: Polimetrica.Google Scholar
Mel’čuk, I. 2012. Semantics: From Meaning to Text. Beck, D. & Polguère, A. (eds.), vol. i. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Mel’čuk, I. et al. 1984/1988/1992/1999. Dictionnaire explicatif et combinatoire du français contemporain, Recherches lexico-sémantiques, vols. i–iv. Les Presses de l’Université de Montréal.Google Scholar
Mel’čuk, I., Clas, A., & Polguère, A. 1995. Introduction à la lexicologie explicative et combinatoire. Paris: Éditions Duculot.Google Scholar
Mel’čuk, I. & Polguère, A. 2007. Lexique actif du français: L’apprentissage du vocabulaire fondé sur 20 000 dérivations sémantiques et collocations du français. Brussels: De Boeck & Larcier.Google Scholar
Mel’čuk, I. & Žolkovskij, A. 1970. Towards a functioning Meaning-Text Model of language. Linguistics 57: 1047.Google Scholar
Mel’čuk, I. & Zholkovsky, A. 1984. Explanatory Combinatorial Dictionary of Modern Russian: Semantico-syntactic Studies of Russian Vocabulary. Vienna: Wiener Slawistischer Almanach.Google Scholar
Mendelssohn, M. 1991. Rezensionsartikel. E. J. Engel (ed.). Stuttgart, Bad Cannstatt: Friedrich Frommann Verlag.Google Scholar
Mendoza-Denton, N. 1999. Sociolinguistics and linguistic anthropology of US Latinos. Annual Review of Anthropology 28: 375–95.Google Scholar
Merkel, C. L. 1866. Physiologie der menschlichen Sprache (physiologische Laletik). Leipzig: G. Wigand Verlag.Google Scholar
Merleau-Ponty, M. 1960/1964. Signes. Paris: Gallimard. 1964: R. McCleary (trans.), Signs. Evanston, IL: Northwestern University Press.Google Scholar
Mermelstein, P. 1973. Articulatory model for the study of speech production. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 53: 1070–82.Google Scholar
Merrilees, B. & Dalzell, A. 1990. Les manuscrits de l’Art mineur en ancien et moyen français – Description de manuscrits. Archives et Documents de la Société d’Histoire et d’Épistémologie des Sciences du Langage 2: 2744.Google Scholar
Mersenne, M. [1636]2003. Traité de l’harmonie universelle. Buccolini, C. (ed.). Paris: Éditions Fayard.Google Scholar
Merx, A. 1889. Historia artis grammaticae apud Syros (Abhandlungen für die Kunde des Morgenlandes 9/2). Leipzig: F. A. Brockhaus. [Trans. into Engl. by D. King in preparation.]Google Scholar
Merzdorf, R. 1876. Vocalverküzung vor Vocalen und quantitative Metathesis im Ioni-schen. Studien 9: 199244.Google Scholar
Messick, S. 1980. Test validity and the ethics of assessment. American Psychologist 35: 1012–27.Google Scholar
Mey, J. L. (ed.). 1998. Concise Encyclopedia of Pragmatics. Oxford: Elsevier.Google Scholar
Meyer, G. 1893. Essays und Studien zur Sprachgeschichte und Volkskunde, ii. Strassburg: K. J. Trübner.Google Scholar
Meyer, P. & Strube, H. 1984. Calculations on the time varying vocal tract. Speech Communication 3: 109–22.Google Scholar
Michaelis, J. D. 1760/1762/1769/1974. Dissertation qui a remporté le prix proposé par l’Académie Royale des Sciences et belles lettres de Prusse, sur l’influence réciproque du langage sur les opinions, et des opinions sur le langage, avec les pièces qui ont concouru, pp. 1–84. [Fren. trans. of Germ. orig. of 1759]. Berlin: Haude & Spener. 1762: De l’influence des opinions sur le langage, et du langage sur les opinions. Breme: George Louis Förster. 1769: A Dissertation on the Influence of opinions on language and of language on opinions, which gained the Prussian Royal Academy’s Prize on that Subject. London: Owen & Bingley. 1974: De l’influence des opinions sur le langage et du langage sur les opinions (new edn. of 1762, comm. by H. Manke and pref. by H. Brekle). Stuttgart-Bad Cannstatt: Friedrich Frommann Verlag.Google Scholar
Michel, J.-B., Shen, Y. K., Aiden, A. P., Veres, A., Gray, M. K., Google Books Team, The, Pickett, J. P., Holberg, D., Clancy, D., Norvig, P., Orwant, J., Pinker, S., Nowak, M., & Liberman-Aiden, E. 2011. Quantitative analysis of culture using millions of digitized books. Science 331: 176–82.Google Scholar
Michigan Corpus of Academic Spoken English. 1999. [C. Simpson, S. L. Briggs, J. Ovens & J. M. Swales]. Ann Arbor, MI: The Regents of the University of Michigan.Google Scholar
Miklosich, F. X. 1852–75. Vergleichende Grammatik der slawischen Sprachen, 4 vols. Vienna: Braumüller Verlag.Google Scholar
Mill, J. S. [1843]1851/1963–91. A System of Logic, 2 vols. London: John W. Parker. 1963–91: repr. in J. M. Robson (ed.), The Collected Works of John Stuart Mill, 33 vols. University of Toronto Press.Google Scholar
Miller, G. A. 1956. The magical number seven, plus or minus two: Some limits on our capacity for processing information. Psychological Review 63: 8197.Google Scholar
Miller, G. A., Galanter, E., & Pribram, K. 1960. Plans and the Structure of Behavior. NY: Holt, Rinehart, & Winston.Google Scholar
Miller, G. A. & McKean, K. O. 1964. Chronometric study of some relations between sentences. Quarterly Jrnl. of Experimental Psychology 16: 297308.Google Scholar
Miller, G. A. & Nicely, P. E. 1955. An analysis of perceptual confusions among some English consonants. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 27: 338–52.Google Scholar
Millikan, R. 1984. Language, Thought and Other Biological Categories. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Millikan, R. 2004. Varieties of Meaning. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Mills, S. 2008. Language and Sexism. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Milner, J. C. 2002. Le Périple structural: Figures et paradigme. Paris: Éditions du Seuil.Google Scholar
Milroy, J. 1992. Linguistic Variation and Change. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Milroy, J. & Milroy, L. 1978. Belfast: Change and variation in an urban vernacular. Sociolinguistic Patterns in British English 21: 339–84.Google Scholar
Milroy, J. & Milroy, L. 1985. Authority in Language: Investigating Language Prescription and Standardisation. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul.Google Scholar
Milroy, J. & Milroy, L. 1997. Varieties and variation. In Coulmas, (ed.), pp. 4764.Google Scholar
Milroy, L. 1987. Language and Social Networks, 2nd edn. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Minsky, M. 1977. Frame-system theory. In Johnson-Laird, P. N. & Wason, P. C. (eds.), Thinking: Readings in Cognitive Science, pp. 355–76. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Misra, S. S. 1992. The Aryan Problem: A Linguistic Approach. New Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal.Google Scholar
Mitchell, T. F. 1965. On the Nature of Linguistics and its Place in University Studies. Leeds University Press.Google Scholar
Miyake, M. H. 2003. Old Japanese: A Phonetic Reconstruction. London: Routledge Curzon.Google Scholar
Moberg, A. 1907/1913/1922. Buch der Strahlen: Die grössere Grammatik des Barhebräus, vol. ii: Einleitung und zweiter Teil [Traktat IV]; Anhang, Zur Terminologie. 1913: vol. i: Erster Teil: Einleitung. Traktat I–III. Leipzig: Harrassowitz. 1922: Le Livre des splendeurs: La grande grammaire de Grégoire Barhebraeus, texte syriaque. Lund: Gleerup.Google Scholar
Mochizuki, I. (ed.). 1974. Ruijū myŎgishŎ [‘A compendium of Japanese words arranged by categories’]. Tokyo: Kasama shoin.Google Scholar
Moerman, M. 1977. The preference for self-correction in a Tai conversational corpus. Language 53: 872–82.Google Scholar
Moeschler, J. 1989. Modélisation du dialogue. Paris: Hermès.Google Scholar
Moeschler, J. 2001. The Geneva School. In Brinker, K. et al. (eds.), Linguistics of Text and Conversation. An International Handbook of Contemporary Research, pp. 952–57. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Moeschler, J. 2006. The French tradition in pragmatics: From structuralism to cognitivism. Intercultural Pragmatics 3–4: 381407.Google Scholar
Moeschler, J. & Reboul, A. 1994. Dictionnaire encyclopédique de pragmatique. Paris: Éditions du Seuil.Google Scholar
Mohanan, K. P. 1982/1987 Lexical Phonology. PhD dissertation, MIT. 1987: pub. Berlin: Springer.Google Scholar
Mohanan, K. P. 1983. The structure of the melody. Unpub. ms.Google Scholar
Mohrmann, C. et al. (eds.). 1961/1963. Trends in European and American Linguistics 1930–1960. 1963: repr. Utrecht: Spectrum.Google Scholar
Moll, K. L. & Daniloff, R. G. 1971. Investigation of the timing of velar movements during speech. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 50: 678–84.Google Scholar
Monaghan, J. 1979. The Neo-Firthian Tradition and its Contribution to General Linguistics. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer.Google Scholar
Monboddo, Lord (Burnett, J.). 1773–92/1774. Of the Origin and Progress of Language, 6 vols. Edinburgh: J. Balfour. 1774: vol. i, 2nd edn.Google Scholar
Monboddo, Lord (Burnett, J.) 1779–99. Antient Metaphysics or the Science of Universals. Edinburgh: J. Balfour.Google Scholar
Montague, R. M. 1970. Universal grammar. Theoria 36: 373–98.Google Scholar
Montague, R. M. 1974. Formal Philosophy: Selected Papers of Richard Montague. Thomason, R. H. (ed.). New Haven, CT: Yale University Press.Google Scholar
Montanari, F. & Pagani, L. (eds.). 2011. From Scholars to Scholia: Chapters in the History of Ancient Greek Scholarship. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Montémont, V. 2008. Discovering Frantext. In Auracher, J. & van Peer, W. (eds.), New Beginnings in Literary Studies, pp. 89107. Newcastle upon Tyne: Cambridge Scholars Publishing.Google Scholar
Montesquieu, C.-L. de S. [1748]1994. De l’esprit des lois. J. Lefranc (ed. and comm.). Paris: Éditions Nathan.Google Scholar
Montreal French Project. 1971–6. [Sankoff, D. & Cedergren, H. (eds.)] Université de Montréal and Université du Québec à Montréal.Google Scholar
Moran, J. H. & Gode, A. (eds.). 1986. On the Origin of Language. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Morenz, L. 2008. Sinn und Spiel der Zeichen: Visuelle Poesie im Alten Ägypten. Cologne: Böhlau Verlag.Google Scholar
Morenz, L. 2011. Die Genese der Alphabetschrift. Ein Markstein ägyptisch-kanaanäischer Kulturkontakte (Wahrnehmung und Spuren Altägyptens 3). Würzburg: Ergon-Verlag.Google Scholar
Morgan, M. 1994. The African-American speech community: Reality and sociolinguistics. In Morgan, M. (ed.), Language and the Social Construction of Identity in Creole Situations, pp. 121–48. Los Angeles, CA: Center for Afro-American Studies, UCLA.Google Scholar
Morgan, M. 2014. Speech Communities. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Morphy, H. 1998. Aboriginal Art. London: Phaidon Press.Google Scholar
Morpurgo Davies, A. [1992]1998. Nineteenth-Century Linguistics. Lepschy, G. (ed.), History of Linguistics, vol. iv. London: Longman.Google Scholar
Morris, C. W. 1938/1970. Foundations of the Theory of Signs. 1970: repr. Foundations of the Unity of Science: Towards an International Encyclopedia of Unified Science, vol. i no. 2. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Morris, C. W. 1946/1971. 1946: Signs, Language, and Behavior. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall. 1971: repr. in Writings on the General Theory of Signs, pp. 73–398. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Morris, W. (compiler). 1969/2011. 1969: American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language, 1st edn. 2011: 5th edn. Boston, MA: Amercican Heritage Publishing Co./Houghton Mifflin.Google Scholar
Morrison, R. 1815. A Grammar of the Chinese language. Serampore: Mission Press.Google Scholar
Morrow, D. G., Greenspan, S. L. & Bower, G.H. 1987. Accessibility and situation models in narrative comprehension. Jrnl. of Memory and Language 26: 165–87.Google Scholar
Moulton, J. H. 1902. Two Lectures on the Science of Language. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Moulton, W. G. 1961. Linguistics and language teaching in the United States 1940–1960. In Mohrmann, et al. (eds.), pp. 82109.Google Scholar
Mounin, G. 1955. Les Belles infidèles. Paris: Cahiers du Sud.Google Scholar
Mounin, G. 1963. Les Problèmes théoriques de la traduction. Paris: Gallimard.Google Scholar
Mounin, G. 1968 Clefs pour la linguistique. Paris: Seghers.Google Scholar
Mounin, G. 1970 Introduction à la sémiologie. Paris: Éditions de Minuit.Google Scholar
Mounin, G. 1971. Ferdinand de Sausure. Paris: Seghers.Google Scholar
Mounin, G. 1985. Semiotic Praxis: Studies in Pertinence and in the Means of Expression and Communication. NY: Springer.Google Scholar
Mowrey, R. A. & MacKay, I. R. A. 1990. Phonological primitives: Electromyographic speech error evidence. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 88: 12991312.Google Scholar
Mrayati, M., Carré, R., & Guérin, B. 1988. Distinctive regions and modes: A new theory of speech production. Speech Communication 7: 257–86.Google Scholar
Mufwene, S. 1994. New Englishes and criteria for naming them. World Englishes 13: 183203.Google Scholar
Mufwene, S. 2001. African-American English. In Algeo, J. (ed.), The Cambridge History of the English Language, vol. vi: English in North America, pp. 291324. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Mühlhäusler, P. 1986. Pidgin and Creole Linguistics. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Mukařovský, J. [1934]1978. Art as a semiotic fact. In Burbank, J. & Steiner, P. (eds.), Structure, Sign, and Function, pp. 8288. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press.Google Scholar
Mukařovský, J. [1938]1977. Burbank, J. & Steiner, P. (trans./eds.), The Word and Verbal Art: Selected Essays. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press.Google Scholar
Müller, A. 2012. Dialogic structures and forms of knowledge in Plutarch’s ‘The E at Delphi.’ Studies in History and Philosophy of Science Part A 43: 245–49.Google Scholar
Müller, F. M. [aka Max Müller]. 1855. Proposals for a missionary alphabet. In The Languages of the Seat of War in the East, 2nd edn., pp. xv-xcv. London: Williams & Norgate.Google Scholar
Müller, F. M. [aka Max Müller]. 1862. Lectures on the Science of Language: Delivered at the Royal Institution of Great Britain in April, May, & June 1861. London: Longman, Green, Longman & Roberts.Google Scholar
Müller, M. 2010. Akkadisch in Keilschrifttexten aus Ägypten. Deskriptive Grammatik einer Interlanguage des späten zweiten vorchristlichen Jahrtausends anhand der Ramses-Briefe (Alter Orient und Altes Testament 373). Münster: Ugarit-Verlag.Google Scholar
Müller, R. A. 1990. Geschichte der Universität. Von der mittelalterlichen Universitas zur deutschen Hochschule. Munich: Callwey Verlag.Google Scholar
Müller-Vollmer, K. 1976. Wilhelm von Humboldt und der Anfang der amerikanischen Sprachwissenschaft: Die Briefe an John Pickering. In Hammacher, K. (ed.), Universalismus und Wissenschaft im Werk und Wirken der Brüder Humboldt, pp. 259334. Frankfurt am Main: V. Klostermann.Google Scholar
Müller-Vollmer, K. 1993. Wilhelm von Humboldts Sprachwissenschaft: Ein kommentiertes Verzeichnis des sprachwissenschaftlichen Nachlasses. Paderborn: F. Schöningh.Google Scholar
Munhall, K. G. 2001. Functional imaging during speech production. Acta Psychologica 107: 95117.Google Scholar
Murray, J. A. H. et al. 1888–1928. A New English Dictionary on Historical Principles; Founded Mainly on the Materials by the Philological Society. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Myers-Scotton, C. 1993. Social Motivations for Codeswitching: Evidence from Africa. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Myers-Scotton, C. 2002. Contact Linguistics: Bilingual Encounters and Grammatical Outcomes. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Naessan, P. 2006. Problems in the study of contact-induced extensive linguistic shift. Intl. Jrnl. of the Sociology of Language 182: 135–45.Google Scholar
Varmā, Nāga. [10th c. ce]1884. Karṇāṭakabhāṣābhūṣaṇa. Rice, L. (ed.). Bangalore: Mysore Government Press.Google Scholar
Nagy, G. 1985. Theognis and Megara: A poet’s vision of his city. In Figueira, T. & Nagy, G. (eds.), Theognis of Megara: Poetry and the Polis, pp. 2281. Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins University Press.Google Scholar
Nagy, G. 2002. Plato’s Rhapsody and Homer’s Music. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Nannayya, . [11th c. ce]1956. Āndhras΄abdacintāmaṇi[A Treatise on Telugu Grammar]. Madras: Vavilla & Sons.Google Scholar
Nārada, . [1st c. bce – 4th c. ce]1964. Nārada-Śikṣā w. the comm. of Śobhākara. Datia, Madhya Pradesh: Shri Pitambara Pitha Sanskrit Parishad.Google Scholar
Nathan, G. S. 1986. Phonemes as mental categories. Proceedings of the Twelfth Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society, pp. 212–23. Department of Linguistics, University of California-Berkeley.Google Scholar
Navigli, R. & Ponzetto, S. P. 2012. BabelNet: The automatic construction, evaluation and application of a wide-coverage multilingual semantic network. Artificial Intelligence 193: 217–50.Google Scholar
Nebrija, E. A. de. 1481/1895. Introductiones Latinae. 1895: repr. at Salamanca University. Gramática Latina de Antonio de Nebrija. P. de Sta. María Magdalena (ed.). Paris: Libreria de Garnier Hermanos.Google Scholar
Nedjalkov, V. P. & Litvinov, V. P. 1995. The St. Petersburg/Leningrad typology group. In Shibatani, & Bynon, (eds.), pp. 215–71.Google Scholar
Neis, C. 2003. Anthropologie im Sprachdenken des 18. Jahrhunderts. Die Berliner Preisfrage nach dem Ursprung der Sprache (1771). Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Nelde, P. H., Stary, Z., & Wolck, W. (eds.) 1995. Contact Linguistics: An International Handbook of Contemporary Research. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Neubauer, A. 1875. The Book of Hebrew Roots by Abu ‘l-Walı̄d Marwān Ibn Janāḥ, Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Neubauer, F. 1989. Vocabulary control in the definitions and examples of monolingual dictionaries. In Hausmann, et al. (eds.), vol. i, pp. 899905.Google Scholar
Newell, A., Shaw, J. C., & Simon, H. A. 1958. Elements of a theory of problem solving. Psychological Review 65: 151–66.Google Scholar
Newell, A., Shaw, J. C., & Simon, H. A. 1959. Report on a general problem-solving program. Proceedings of the Intl. Conference on Information Processing, pp. 256–64.Google Scholar
Newman, R., Sawusch, J., & Luce, P. 2000. Underspecification and phoneme frequency in speech perception. In Broe, & Pierrehumbert, (eds.), pp. 299312.Google Scholar
Newmeyer, F. J. 1983. Grammatical Theory: Its Limits and its Possibilities. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Newmeyer, F. J. [1980]1986. Linguistic Theory in America: The First Quarter Century of Transformational Generative Grammar, 2nd edn. NY: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Newmeyer, F. J. 1998. Language Form and Language Function. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Newmeyer, F. J. 2005. Possible and Probable Languages. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Nichols, J. 1984. Functional theories of grammar. Annual Review of Anthropology 13: 97117.Google Scholar
Nichols, J. 1992. Linguistic Diversity in Space and Time. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Nichols, J. 1997. Sprung from two common sources. Sahul as a linguistic area. In McConvell, P. & Evans, N. (eds.), Archaeology and Linguistics, pp. 135–68. Melbourne: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Nickel, G. (ed.). 1971. Papers in Contrastive Linguistics. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Nida, E. A. 1948. The analysis of grammatical constituents. Language 24: 168–77.Google Scholar
Nida, E. A. 1949. Morphology: The Descriptive Analysis of Words, 2nd edn. Ann Arbor, MI: University of Michigan Press.Google Scholar
Nitti-Dolci, L. 1972. The Prakr̥ita Grammarians. Trans. fr. Fren. by Prabhakar Jha. New Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass.Google Scholar
Nöth, W. 1990. Handbook of Semiotics. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press.Google Scholar
Nöth, W. 1992. The semiotic potential of iconicity in spoken and written language. Kodikas/Code 13: 191209.Google Scholar
Nöth, W. 1998. Symmetry in signs and in semiotic systems. Interdisciplinary Jrnl. for Germanic Linguistics and Semiotic Analysis 3: 4762.Google Scholar
Nöth, W. 2000a. Handbuch der Semiotik, 2nd edn. Stuttgart: J. B. Metzler.Google Scholar
Nöth, W. 2000b. Le seuil sémiotique d’Umberto Eco. In Petitot, J. & Fabbri, P. (eds.), Au nom du sens: Autour de l’oeuvre d’Umberto Eco, pp. 5263. Paris: Éditions Grasset.Google Scholar
Nöth, W. 2002. Charles Sanders Peirce, pathfinder in linguistics. Interdisciplinary Jrnl. for Germanic Linguistics and Semiotic Analysis 7: 114.Google Scholar
Nöth, W. 2009. Stil als Zeichen. In Gardt, A. et al. (eds.), Rhetorik und Stilistik / Rhetoric and Stylistics, pp. 1178–96. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Nöth, W. 2010. The criterion of habit in Peirce’s definitions of the symbol. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 46: 8293.Google Scholar
Nöth, W. 2011. Semiotic foundations of pragmatics. In Bublitz, W. & Norrick, N. (eds.), Handbook of Pragmatics, pp. 167202. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Nolan, F. 1992. The descriptive role of segments: Evidence from assimilation. In Docherty, & Ladd, (eds.), pp. 261–80.Google Scholar
Nølke, H. 1993. Le Regard sur le locuteur: Pour une linguistique des traces énonciatives. Paris: Éditions Kimé.Google Scholar
Nølke, H., Fløttum, K., & Norén, C. 2004. ScaPoLine: La Théorie scandinave de la polyphonie linguistique. Paris: Éditions Kimé.Google Scholar
Nuchelmans, G. 1973. Theories of the Proposition: Ancient and Medieval Conceptions of the Bearers of Truth and Falsity. Amsterdam: North-Holland.Google Scholar
Nuesse, H. 1962. Die Sprachtheorie Friedrich Schlegels. Heidelberg: Carl Winter Universitätsverlag.Google Scholar
Nutt, J. W. [1870]1968. Two Treatises on Verbs containing Feeble and Double Letters by R. Yehuda Hayug of Fez [trans. into Hebrew fr. Arabic by R. Moseh Gikatilia of Cordova], to which is added the Treatise on Punctuation by the same author [trans. A. Ezra]. London: Asher. 1968: repr. Jerusalem: Makor.Google Scholar
O’Barr, W. M. & Atkins, B. K. 1980. “Women’s Language” or “Powerless Language”? In McConnell-Ginet, S. et al. (eds.), Language and Women’s Lives: A Feminist Perspective, pp. 93110. Westport, CT: Greenwood Press.Google Scholar
Ochs, E. 1990. Indexicality and socialization. In Stigler, J. et al. (eds.), Cultural Psychology: Essays on Comparative Human Development, pp. 287308. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Ochs, E. 1992. Indexing gender. In Duranti, & Goodwin, (eds.), pp. 335–58.Google Scholar
Ochs, E. 1996. Linguistic resources for socializing humanity. In Gumperz, J. J. & Levinson, S. C. (eds.), Rethinking Linguistic Relativity, pp. 407–37. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Ochs, E., Schegloff, E. A., & Thompson, S. A. (eds.). 1996. Interaction and Grammar. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Ochs, E. & Schieffelin, B. B. 1984/2009. Language acquisition and socialization: Three developmental stories. In Swedwe, R. & Levine, R. (eds.), Culture Theory: Essays on Mind, Self and Emotion, pp. 276320. NY: Cambridge University Press. 2009: repr. in Duranti (ed.), pp. 296–328.Google Scholar
Ockham, . See William of Ockham.Google Scholar
Oden, G. C. & Massaro, D. W. 1978. Integration of featural information in speech perception. Psychological Review 85: 172–91.Google Scholar
Ogden, C. K. 1930. Basic English: A General Introduction with Rules and Grammar. London: Paul Treber.Google Scholar
Ogden, C. K. & Richards, I. A. 1923. The Meaning of Meaning: A Study of the Influence of Language upon Thought and of the Science of Symbolism. London: Kegan Paul, Trench & Trübner.Google Scholar
Ogden, R. 2006. Firthian phonology. In Brown, (ed.), vol. iv, pp. 485–7.Google Scholar
Ognibeni, B. 1995. La seconda parte del Sefer ’ok̄la wĕ-’ok̄la. Madrid: Instituto de Filología del CSIC, Departamento de Filología Biblica y de Oriente Antiguo.Google Scholar
Ohala, J. J. 1974. Experimental historical phonology. In Anderson, J. M. & Jones, C. (eds.), Historical Linguistics II. Theory and Description in Phonology, pp. 353–89. Amsterdam: North-Holland.Google Scholar
Ohala, J. J. 1976. A model of speech aerodynamics. In Ohala, J. J. (ed.), Report of the Phonology Laboratory 1, pp. 93107. Berkeley, CA: University of California.Google Scholar
Ohala, J. J. 1986. Consumer’s guide to evidence in phonology. Phonology Yearbook 3: 326.Google Scholar
Ohala, J. J. 1990. Respiratory activity in speech. In Hardcastle, W. J. & Marchal, A. (eds.), Speech Production and Speech Modelling, pp. 2553. Dordrecht: Kluwer.Google Scholar
Ohala, J. J. 1992. The costs and benefits of phonological analysis. In Downing, P. et al. (eds.), The Linguistics of Literacy, pp. 211–37. Amsterdam: John BenjaminsGoogle Scholar
Ohala, J. J. 1995. Experimental phonology. In Goldsmith, J. A. (ed.), The Handbook of Phonological Theory, pp. 713–22. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Ohala, J. J. 1996. Speech perception is hearing sounds, not tongues. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 99: 1718–25.Google Scholar
Ohala, J. J. & Jaeger, J. J. 1986. Introduction. In Ohala, J. & Jaeger, J. (eds.), Experimental Phonology, pp. 112. Orlando, FL: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Öhman, S. E. G. 1966. Coarticulation in VCV utterances: Spectrographic measurements. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 39: 151–68.Google Scholar
Okrent, A. 2009. In the Land of Invented Languages: Esperanto Rock Stars, Klingon Poets, Loglan Lovers, and the Mad Dreamers who Tried to Build a Perfect Language. NY: Spiegel & Grau.Google Scholar
Oller, J. 2005. Common ground between form and content: The pragmatic solution to the bootstrapping problem. The Modern Language Jrnl. 89: 92113.Google Scholar
Omodaka, H. (ed.) 1944. Shinsen jikyŎ [‘A Newly Compiled Mirror of Characters’]. Osaka: Zenkoku shobŎ.Google Scholar
Orenstein, A. 2002. W. V. Quine. Chesham: Acumen Publishing.Google Scholar
Orme, N. 2000. The Saints of Cornwall. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Ortega, L. 2009. Understanding Second Language Acquisition. London: Hodder Education.Google Scholar
Ortner, S. B. 1984. Theory in anthropology since the sixties. Comparative Studies in Society and History 26: 126–66.Google Scholar
Osgood, C. & Sebeok, T. A. (eds.). 1954. Psycholinguistics. Baltimore, MD: Indiana University Press.Google Scholar
Osing, J. 1998. The Carlsberg Papyri 2. Hieratische Papyri aus Tebtunis I. Copenhagen: Museum Tusculanum Press.Google Scholar
Osing, J. & Rosati, G. 1998. Papiri geroglifici e ieratici da Tebtynis. Florence: Istituto Papirologico ‘G. Vitelli.’Google Scholar
Osthoff, H. 1878a. Das Verbum in der Nominalkomposition im Deutschen, Griechischen, Slavischen und Romanischen. Jena: Costenoble Verlag.Google Scholar
Osthoff, H. 1878b. Review of Graziadio Isaia Ascoli, Studi critici (Rome: Loescher, 1877). Jenaer Literaturzeitung 33: 484–7.Google Scholar
Osthoff, H. 1879. Das physiologische und psychologische Moment in der sprachlichen Formenbildung. Berlin: Habel Verlag.Google Scholar
Osthoff, H. & Brugmann, K. [1878–1910]1974–5/1989. Morphologische Untersuchungen auf dem Gebiete der indogermanischen Sprachen, 6 vols. Leipzig: Hirzel. 1974–5. Repr. Hildesheim: G. Olms. 1989: vol. i. Leipzig: S. Hirzel Verlag.Google Scholar
Ott, W. R. 2004. Locke’s Philosophy of Language. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Owens, J. 1988. The Foundations of Grammar: An Introduction to Medieval Arabic Grammatical Theory. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Oxford Learner’s Dictionary. 2010. Oxford Advanced Learner’s Dictionary of Current English, 8th edn. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Padley, G. A. 1985–8. Grammatical Theory in Western Europe, 1500–1700, vols. i–iii. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Pagani, L. 2011. Pioneers of grammar. In Montanari, F. & Pagani, L. (eds.), From Scholars to Scholia: Chapters in the History of Ancient Greek Scholarship, pp. 1764. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Pagliaro, A. 1934. Sommario di linguistica ario-europea. Rome University.Google Scholar
Pagliaro, A. 1956–63. Saggi di critica semantica, 3 vols. Messina: D’Anna.Google Scholar
Pagliaro, A. 1958. La parola e l’immagine. Napoli: ESI.Google Scholar
Painter, C. 1973. Cineradiographic data on the feature ‘covered’ in Twi vowel harmony. Phonetica 28: 97120.Google Scholar
Pallas, P. S. 1787–9. Linguarum totius orbis vocabularia comparative, 2 vols. St. Petersburg: Schnoor.Google Scholar
Palmer, F. R. (ed.). 1968. Selected Papers of J. R. Firth 1952–59. London: Longmans, Green & Co.Google Scholar
Palmer, F. R. (ed.). 1970. Prosodic Analysis. London: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Palmer, F. R. 1995. Firth and the London School of Linguistics. In Koerner, & Asher, (eds.), pp. 268–72.Google Scholar
Palmer, F. R. 2002. Frank Palmer. In Brown, & Law, (eds.), pp. 228–38.Google Scholar
Palmer, H. E. 1917. The Scientific Study and Teaching of Languages. London: G. Harrap.Google Scholar
Palmer, H. E. 1921. The Oral Method of Teaching Languages. Cambridge: W. Heffer.Google Scholar
Panaccio, C. 1991. Les Mots, les concepts et les choses: La sémantique de Guillaume d’Occam et le nominalisme d’aujourd’hui. Paris: Bellarmin & Vrin.Google Scholar
Pāṇini. [5th c. bce]1891/1962/1987. Aṣṭādhyāyı̄ [‘The Eight Chapters’]. Ś. C. Vāsu (ed./trans.). Allahabad: Indian Press. 1962: repr. The Aṣṭaādhyāyı̄ of Pāṇini. 2 vols. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass. 1987: S. M. Katre (ed./trans.). Austin, TX: University of Texas Press.Google Scholar
Pāṇini. [5th c. bce]1938. Pāṇinı̄ya-Śikṣā, Ghosh, M. (ed., crit. edn. in all its five recensions). University of Calcutta.Google Scholar
Papineau, D. 1993. Philosophical Naturalism. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Paradis, C. 1988. On constraints and repair strategies. Linguistic Review 6: 7197.Google Scholar
Paradis, M. 1977. Bilingualism and aphasia. In Whitaker, H. & Whitaker, H. A. (eds.), Studies in Neurolinguistics, vol. iii, pp. 65121. NY: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Paradis, M. 1992. The Loch Ness Monster approach to bilingual language lateralization: A response to Berquier and Ashton. Brain & Language 43: 528–33.Google Scholar
Paradis, M. 2004. A Neurolinguistic Theory of Bilingualism. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Parkinson, R. 1999. Cracking Codes: The Rosetta Stone and Decipherment. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Parkinson, R. 2002. Poetry and Culture in Middle Kingdom Egypt: A Dark Side to Perfection. London: Continuum.Google Scholar
Parsons, T. 1960. Structure and Process in Modern Societies. Glencoe, IL: Free Press.Google Scholar
Parsons, T. 1980. Modifiers and quantifiers in natural language. In Pelletier, F. J. & Normore, C. G. (eds.), New Essays in Philosophy of Language, pp. 2960. Guelph: Canadian Association for Publishing in Philosophy.Google Scholar
Parsons, T. 1990. Events in the Semantics of English: A Study in Subatomic Semantics. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Partee, B. H. 1975. Montague grammar and transformational grammar. Linguistic Inquiry 6: 203300.Google Scholar
Partee, B. H. 1976. Montague Grammar. NY: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Partington, A., Morley, J., & Haarman, L. (eds.). 2004. Corpora and Discourse. Bern: Peter Lang.Google Scholar
Patañjali. [c. 2nd c. bce]1880–5/1962–72. Mahābhāṣya. , F. Kielhorn (ed.), 3 vols. 1962–72: K. V. Abhyankar (ed.), 3rd edn. Pune: Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute.Google Scholar
Paul, H. 1877. Die Vocale der Flexions- und Ableitungssilben in den ältesten germanischen Dialecten. Beiträge zur Geschichte der deutschen Sprache und Literatur 4: 315475.Google Scholar
Paul, H. 1879. Review of Scherer 1878. Jenaer Literaturzeitung 6: 307–11.Google Scholar
Paul, H. [1880]1920/1995. Prinzipien der Sprachgeschichte. 1920: 5th edn. Halle: Max Niemeyer. 1995: 10th edn. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer.Google Scholar
Paul, H. 1897/2002. Deutsches Wörterbuch: Bedeutungsgeschichte und Aufbau unseres Wortschatzes. Halle: Max Niemeyer. 2002: Henne, H. et al. (eds.), 10th rev. edn. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer.Google Scholar
Paul, H. [1889–93]1911. Grundriss der germanischen Philologie. Strassburg: K. J. Trübner. [35 edns., pub. 1891–1911 in Germ. and Engl.].Google Scholar
Paul, H. [1916–20]1962. Deutsche Grammatik, vols. i–v. Halle: Max Niemeyer.Google Scholar
Paul, H. 1920. Aufgabe und Methode der Geschichtswissenschaften. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Paul, H. & Braune, W. (eds.). 1874–[present]. Beiträge zur Geschichte der deutschen Sprache und Literatur. Halle: Max Niemeyer.Google Scholar
Bartholomaeo, Paulinus a S.. 1790/1977. Sidharubam seu grammatical samscrdamica […]. Rome: Typographia Sacrae Congregationis de Propaganda Fide. 1977: L. Rocher (trans./ed. and intro.): Paulinus a S. Bartholomaeo: Dissertation on the Sanskrit language. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Bartholomaeo, Paulinus a S.. 1804. Vyacarana seu Locupletissima Samscrdamicae linguae institutio in usum Fidei praeconum in India Orientali, et virorum litteratorum in Europa adornata a P. Paulino a S. Bartholomaeo Carmelita discalceato. Rome: Typis Sacrae Congregationis de Propaganda Fide.Google Scholar
Peal, E. & Lambert, W. 1962. The relationship of bilingualism to intelligence. Psychological Monographs 76: 123.Google Scholar
Peano, G. [1889]1967. Arithmetices Principia, Nova Methodo Exposita. 1967: trans. B. Turin, The Principles of Arithmetic, Presented by a New Method. In J. van Heijenoort, From Frege to Gödel: A Source Book in Mathematical Logic, 1879–1931, pp. 85–97. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Peano, G. 1903. De Latino Sine Flexione: Lingua Auxiliare Internationale. Revista de Mathematica 8: 7483.Google Scholar
Pêcheux, M. 1969. Analyse automatique du discours. Paris: Éditions Dunod.Google Scholar
Pedersen, H. 1903. Türkische Lautgesetze. Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft 57: 535–61.Google Scholar
Pei, M. 1958. One Language for the World. NY: Devin-Adair.Google Scholar
Peirce, B. N. 1995. Social identity, investment, and language learning. TESOL Quarterly 29: 931.Google Scholar
Peirce, C. S. 1931–60. Collected Papers of Charles Sanders Peirce, 8 vols. Hartshorne, C. & Weiss, P. (eds.). [1903]1931: vol. i; [1893–1910]1932: vol. ii; [1902–6]1933: vol. iii; [1868–1905]1933: vol. iv; 1934: vol. v. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Peirce, C. S. 1932. The icon, index, and symbol. Collected Papers of Charles Sanders Peirce, vol. ii, pp. 156–73.Google Scholar
Pennycook, A. 1994. The Cultural Politics of English as an International Language. London: Longman.Google Scholar
Pennycook, A. 2001. Critical Applied Linguistics: A Critical Introduction. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.Google Scholar
Percival, W. K. 1976. On the historical source of immediate constituent analysis. In McCawley, (ed.), pp. 229–42.Google Scholar
Perkell, J. S. & Klatt, D. H. 1986. Invariance and Variability in Speech Processes. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.Google Scholar
Perlmutter, D. M. (ed.). 1983. Studies in Relational Grammar, vol. i. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Perlmutter, D. M. & Postal, P. M. [1972]1983. The relational succession law. In Perlmutter, D. M. (ed.), Studies in Relational Grammar, vol. i, pp. 3080. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Pesetsky, D. 1979. Russian morphology and lexical theory. Ms. Cambridge, MA: MIT.Google Scholar
Peterson, G. E. & Lehiste, I. 1960. Duration of syllable nuclei in English. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 32: 693703.Google Scholar
Petrilli, S. & Ponzio, A. 2005. Semiotics Unbounded. Toronto University Press.Google Scholar
Helias, Petrus. [c. 1150]1993. Petrus Helias, Summa super Priscianum. Reilly, L. (ed.), 2 vols. Toronto: Pontifical Institute of Mediaeval Studies.Google Scholar
Pettinato, G. 1981. Testi lessicali monolingui della Biblioteca L. 2769 (Materiali Epigrafici di Ebla 3). Istituto Universitario Orientale di Napoli.Google Scholar
Peyraube, A. 1998. Ershi shiji yiqian Ouzhou hanyu yufaxue yanjiu zhuangkuang [‘Studies in Chinese grammar in Europe before the twentieth century’]. Zhongguo Yuwen 5: 346–52.Google Scholar
Peyraube, A. 1999. Sur les sources du Ma shi wen tong. Histoire, Épistémologie, Langage 21: 6578.Google Scholar
Peyraube, A. 2000. Le rôle du savoir linguistique dans l’éducation et la société chinoises. In Auroux, et al. (eds.), pp. 55–8.Google Scholar
Peyraube, A. 2001. Some reflections on the sources of the Mashi wentong. In Lackner, M. et al. (eds.), New Terms for New Ideas: Western Knowledge and Lexical Change in Late Imperial China, pp. 341–56. Leiden: E. J. Brill.Google Scholar
Pfeiffer, R. 1968. History of Classical Scholarship. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Philips, S. U. 1972. Participant structures and communicative competence: Warm Springs children in community and classroom. In Cazden, C. B. et al. (eds.), Functions of Language in the Classroom, pp. 370–94. NY: Teachers College Press.Google Scholar
Philips, S. U. 1989. Warm Springs “Indian Time”: How the regulation of participation affects the progress of events. In Bauman, & Sherzer, J. (eds.), pp. 92109.Google Scholar
Philips, S. U. 1998. Ideology in the Language of Judges: How Judges Practice Law, Politics, and Courtroom Control. NY: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Phillipson, R. 1992. Linguistic Imperialism. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Phillipson, R. 2001. English for globalisation or for the world’s people? Intl. Review of Education, 47: 185200.Google Scholar
Phillipson, R. 2009. Linguistic Imperialism Continued. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Philological Society, Transactions of. 1978. Commemorative Volume: The Neogrammarians. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Philonenko, A. 1984. Jean-Jacques Rousseau et la pensée du malheur. Paris: J. Vrin.Google Scholar
Piaget, J. 1923. Le Langage et la pensée chez l’enfant. Paris: Delachaux et Niestle.Google Scholar
Piaget, J. 1928. Judgment and Reasoning in the Child. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul.Google Scholar
Piaget, J. 1962/2000. Commentaire sur les remarques critiques de Vygotski concernant Le Langage et la pensée chez l’enfant et Le Jugement et le raisonnement chez l’enfant. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. 2000: Comments on Vygotsky’s critical remarks on Language and Thought of the Child and Judgment and Reasoning in the Child (trans. L. Smith). New Ideas in Psychology 18: 241–59.Google Scholar
Piaget, J. 1968. Le Structuralisme. Paris: Presses universitaires de France.Google Scholar
Piattelli-Palmarini, M. (ed.). 1979. Théories du langage, theories de l’apprentissage: le débat entre Jean Piaget et Noam Chomsky. Paris: Editions du Seuil.Google Scholar
Pickering, J. 1818. On the adoption of a uniform orthography for the Indian languages of North America. Memoirs of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences 4: 319–60.Google Scholar
Pickering, J. 1830–1. ‘Indians’ and ‘Indian languages of America.’ In Encyclopedia Americana, vol. vi, pp. 569–75 and 581–600. Philadelphia, PA: Carey & Lea.Google Scholar
Pickering, M. J. & Garrod, S. 2004. Toward a mechanistic psychology of dialogue. Behavioral and Brain Sciences 27: 169–90.Google Scholar
Picoche, J. & Rolland, J.-C. 2002. Dictionnaire du français usuel. 15 000 mots utiles en 442 articles. Brussels: De Boeck-Duculot.Google Scholar
Pictet, A. 1859–63. Les Origines indo-européennes, ou, les Aryas primitifs. Essai de paléontologie linguistique, 2 vols. Paris: Joël Cherbuliez.Google Scholar
Piepho, H.-E. 1974. Kommunikative Kompetenz als uebergeordnetes Lernziel im Englishunterricht. Limburg: Frankonius Verlag.Google Scholar
Pierrehumbert, J. B. 1980a/b. The phonology and phonetics of English intonation. PhD dissertation, MIT. 1980b: emend., repr., and distrib. by the Indiana University Linguistics Circle (IULC), Bloomington, IN.Google Scholar
Pierrehumbert, J. B. 1981. Synthesizing intonation. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 70: 985–95.Google Scholar
Pierrehumbert, J. B. 1994. Syllable structure and word structure: A study of triconsonantal clusters in English. In Keating, P. A. (ed.), Phonological Structure and Phonetic Form: Papers in Laboratory Phonology III, pp. 168–88. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Pierrehumbert, J. B., Beckman, M. E., & Ladd, D. R. 2000. Conceptual foundations of phonology as a laboratory science. In Burton-Roberts, N. et al. (eds.), Phonological Knowledge: Conceptual and Empirical Issues, pp. 273303. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Pike, K. L. 1943. Taxemes and immediate constituents. Language 19: 6582.Google Scholar
Pike, K. L. 1947a. Grammatical prerequisites to phonemic analysis. Word 3: 155–72.Google Scholar
Pike, K. L. 1947b. Phonemics: A Technique for Reducing Languages to Writing. Ann Arbor, MI: University of Michigan Press.Google Scholar
Pike, K. L. 1954–60. Language in Relation to a Unified Theory of the Structure of Human Behavior. Glendale, CA: Summer Institute of Linguistics.Google Scholar
Pike, K. L. 2001. Reminiscences by Pike on early American anthropological linguistics. SIL Electronic Working Papers, 2001–001.Google Scholar
Pike, K. L. & Pike, E. V. 1947. Immediate constituents of Mazatec syllables. Intl. Jrnl. of American Linguistics 13: 7891.Google Scholar
Pinborg, J. (ed.). 1977. Sigerus de Cortraco: Summa modorum significandi, Sophismata. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Pinker, S. 1989. Learnability and Cognition: The Acquisition of Argument Structure. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Pinker, S. 1994. The Language Instinct: How the Mind Creates Language. NY: William Morrow & Co.Google Scholar
Pinker, S. & Prince, A. (1988). On language and connectionism: Analysis of a parallel distributed processing model of language acquisition. Cognition 28: 73193.Google Scholar
Pitres, A. 1895. Étude sur l’aphasie chez les polyglottes. Revue de Médecine 15: 873–99.Google Scholar
Plato. 1998. Cratylus. C. D. C. Reeve, trans. Cambridge: Hackett.Google Scholar
PLC: See Prague Linguistic Circle.Google Scholar
Plug, L. 2008. J. R. Firth: A new biography. Transactions of the Philological Society 106: 337–74.Google Scholar
Pocklington, J. 1990. Charles Carpenter Fries: The Humanist, the Linguist, the Teacher; a Comparison with Leonard Bloomfield. Wilhelmsfeld: Gottfried Egert.Google Scholar
Polguère, A. 2000. Towards a theoretically-motivated general public dictionary of semantic derivations and collocations for French. In U. Heid et al. (eds.), Proceedings of the 9th EURALEX International Congress, pp. 517–27. Stuttgart: Institut für Maschinelle Sprachverarbeitung.Google Scholar
Polguère, A. 2008. Lexicologie et sémantique lexicale: Notions fondamentales. Les Presses de l’Université de Montréal.Google Scholar
Polguère, A. 2009. Lexical systems: Graph models of natural language lexicons. Language Resources and Evaluation 43: 4155.Google Scholar
Poliakov, L. 1971. Le mythe aryen: Essai sur les sources du racisme et des nationalismes. Paris: Calmann-Lévy.Google Scholar
Pollard, C. & Sag, I. A. 1994. Head-Driven Phrase Structure Grammar. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Polliack, M. & Schlossberg, E. 2009. Peruš Yefet ben ‘Eli le-Sefer Hoše‘a, mahadurah mu‘eret [Yefet ben ‘Eli’s commentary on Hosea, annot. edn., Hebrew trans. and intro.]. Ramat Gan: Bar Ilan University Press.Google Scholar
Polliack, M. & Somekh, S. 2000. Šĕne glosarim miqra’yim ‘ibriyim-‘arabiyim me-gĕnizat Qahir. Pĕ‘amim 83: 1547.Google Scholar
Pompi, K. F. & Lachman, R. 1967. Surrogate processes in the short-term retention of connected discourse. Jrnl. of Experimental Psychology 75: 143–50.Google Scholar
Pontani, F. 2011. “Ex Homero grammatica.” In Matthaios, A. et al. (eds.), Ancient Scholarship and Grammar: Archetypes, Concepts and Contexts, pp. 87103. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Poplack, S., Sankoff, D., & Miller, C. 1988. The social correlates and linguistic processes of lexical borrowing and assimilation. Linguistics 26(1): 47104.Google Scholar
Porzig, W. 1950. Das Wunder der Sprache: Probleme, Methoden und Ergebnisse der modernen Sprachwisenschaft. Bern: A. Francke.Google Scholar
Posner, R., Robering, K., & Sebeok, T. A. (eds.). 1997–2004. Semiotik / Semiotics. Ein Handbuch zu den zeichentheoretischen Grundlagen von Natur und Kultur / A Handbook on the Sign-Theoretic Foundations of Nature and Culture, vols. i–iv. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Post, E. 1944. Recursively enumerable sets of positive integers and their decision problems. Bulletin of the American Mathematical Society 50: 284316.Google Scholar
Postal, P. M. 1966. On so-called ‘pronouns’ of English. In Dinneen, F. P. (ed.), Report of the Seventeenth Annual Round Table Meeting on Linguistics and Language Studies 19, pp. 177206. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press.Google Scholar
Postal, P. M. 1970. On the surface verb ‘remind.’ Linguistic Inquiry 1: 37120.Google Scholar
Postal, P. M. 1972. The best theory. In Peters, P. S. (ed.), Goals of Linguistic Theory, pp. 131–70. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.Google Scholar
Postel, G. 1544. De orbis terrae concordia libri quatuor. Basle: J. Oporinus.Google Scholar
Pott, A. F. 1833–6. Etymologische Forschungen auf dem Gebiete der indogermanischen Sprachen. Lemgo: Meyer.Google Scholar
Pott, A. F. 1848. Die wissenschaftliche Gliederung der Sprachwissenschaft. Eine Skizze. Jahrbücher der freien deutschen Akademie (1949), vol. i, pp. 185–7. Frankfurt am Main: Merian Heft.Google Scholar
Pott, A. F. 1856. Die Ungleichheit menschlicher Rassen: Hauptsächlich vom sprachwissenschaftlichen Standpunkte, unter besonderer Berücksichtigung von des Grafen von Gobineau gleichnamigem Werke. Lemgo: Meyersche Hofbuchhandlung.Google Scholar
Pott, A. F. 1868. Die Sprachverschiedenheit in Europa am den Zahlwörtern nachgewiesen, sowie die quinäre und vigesimale Zählmethode. Halle: Waisenhaus.Google Scholar
Pott, A. F. 1876. Wilhelm von Humboldt und die Sprachwissenschaft. Berlin: Verlag von S. Calvary.Google Scholar
Pott, A. F. [1887]1974. Zur Literatur der Sprachenkunde Europas (1884–90). Leipzig: J. A. Barth. 1974: repr., with a pref., by E. F. K. Koerner. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Potter, S. 1957. Modern Linguistics. London: André Deutsch.Google Scholar
Powell, J. W. 1877. Introduction to the Study of Indian Languages, with Words, Phrases, and Sentences to be Collected. Washington, DC: Government Printing Office.Google Scholar
Powell, J. W. [1891]1991. Indian Linguistic Families of America North of Mexico. (Seventh Annual Report, Bureau of American Ethnology). Washington, DC: Government Printing Office. 1991: repr. w. F. Boas, Introduction to Handbook of American Indian Languages. Lincoln, NE: University of Nebraska Press.Google Scholar
Poynton, C. 1985. Language and Gender: Making the Difference. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Prague Linguistic Circle [PLC]. 1929[1928]/1964/1978/1983. 1929: Thèses présentées au Premier Congrès des philologues slaves. Travaux du Cercle Linguistique de Prague, i: 5–29 [written by the Cercle linguistique de Prague, i.e., V. Mathesius, R. Jakobson, B. Havránek, & J. Mukařovský in Czech in 1928, pub. in Fren. trans.]. 1964: repr. in J. Vachek (ed.), A Prague School Reader in Linguistics, pp. 33–58. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press. 1978: repr. in Eng. trans., in M. Johnson (ed.), Recycling the Prague Linguistic Circle, pp. 1–31. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma. 1983: repr. in [a different] Eng. trans., in Vachek (ed.), pp. 65–76.Google Scholar
Prawitz, D. 1965/2006. Natural Deduction. A Proof-Theoretical Study. Mineola, NY: Dover Publications. 2006: repr.Google Scholar
Prendergast, T. 1864. The Mastery of Languages; or, the Art of Speaking Foreign Tongues Idiomatically. London: Richard Bentley.Google Scholar
Prendergast, T. 1870. The Mastery Series: German. NY: Appleton.Google Scholar
Prévost, P. 1799. Des signes envisagés relativement à leur influence sur la formation des idées. Paris: Baudouin.Google Scholar
Pride, J. B. & Holmes, J. (eds.), Sociolinguistics: Selected Readings. Harmondsworth: Penguin Books.Google Scholar
Prieto, J. J. 1964. Principes de noologie. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Prieto, L. J. 1966. Messages et signaux. Paris: Presses universitaires de France.Google Scholar
Prieto, L. J. 1968. La Sémiologie. In Martinet, (ed.), pp. 93–168.Google Scholar
Prince, A. 1983. Relating to the grid. Linguistic Inquiry 11: 511–62.Google Scholar
Prince, A. & Smolensky, P. 1991. Notes on connectionism and harmony theory in linguistics. Unpub. ms.Google Scholar
Prince, A. & Smolensky, P. 1993/2004. Optimality Theory: Constraint Interaction in Generative Grammar. 2004: rev. edn. Malden, MA: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Prince, E. 1981. Toward a taxonomy of given-new information. In Cole, P. (ed.), Radical Pragmatics, pp. 223–56. NY: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Prior, A. N. 1957. Time and Modality. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Priscian. 1855/1961. Institutiones grammaticae. In Hertz, M. & Keil, H. (eds.), Grammatici Latini II-III. Leipzig: B.G. 1961: repr. Hildesheim: G. Olms.Google Scholar
Priscian. 1987. M. Passalacqua (ed., crit. edn. w. comm. in Ital.). Prisciani Caesariensis opuscula,vol i: De figuris numerorum. De metris Terentii. Praeexercitamina; vol. ii: Institutio de nomine et pronomine et verbo partitiones duodecim versuum aeneidos principalium. Rome: Edizioni di storia e letteratura.Google Scholar
Pseudo-Albertus, M. 1977. In Kelly, L. G. (ed.), Quaestiones Alberti de Modis Significandi. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Puech, Christian. 2004. Saussure and structuralistic linguistics in Europe. In Sanders, (ed.), pp. 124–38.Google Scholar
Puech, C. & Radzynski, A. 1978. La langue comme fait social: Fonction d’une évidence. In Normand, C. (ed.), Saussure et la linguistique pré-saussurienne [=Langages 49], pp. 4665.Google Scholar
Pulgram, E. 1970. Syllable, Word, Nexus, Cursus. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Pulleyblank, D. 1986. Tone in Lexical Phonology. Dordrecht: D. Reidel.Google Scholar
Pullum, G. K. 1991. The Great Eskimo Vocabulary Hoax, and Other Irreverent Essays on the Study of Language. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Pustejovsky, J. 1995. The Generative Lexicon. Cambridge MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Putnam, H. 1961. Some issues in the theory of grammar. In Jakobson, R. (ed.), Structure of Language and its Mathematical Aspects, pp. 2542. Providence, RI: American Mathematical Society.Google Scholar
Putnam, H. 1975. The meaning of “meaning.” In H. Putnam, Mind, Language, and Reality: Philosophical Papers, vol. ii, pp. 215–71. Cambridge University Press. Repr. in Gunderson (ed.), pp. 131–83.Google Scholar
Putnam, H. 1988. Representation and Reality. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Quack, J. 2003. Die spätägyptische Alphabetreihenfolge und das ‘südsemitische’ Alphabet. Lingua Aegyptia 11: 163–84.Google Scholar
Quecke, H. 1997. Eine griechisch-ägyptische Wörterliste vermutlich des 3.Jh.v.Chr. (P. Heid. Inv.-Nr. G 414). Zeitschrift für Papyrologie und Epigraphik 116: 6780.Google Scholar
Quemada, B. 1967. Les Dictionnaires du français moderne 1539–1863. Étude sur leur histoire, leurs types et leurs méthodes. Paris: Éditions Didier.Google Scholar
Quine, W. v. O. [1953]1980. From a Logical Point of View, 2nd edn. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Quine, W. v. O. 1960. Word and Object. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Quine, W. v. O. 1969. Ontological Relativity and Other Essays. NY: Columbia University Press.Google Scholar
Quine, W. v. O. [1970]1986. Philosophy of Logic, 2nd edn. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Quine, W. v. O. 1974. Roots of Reference. La Salle, IL: Open Court.Google Scholar
Quine, W. v. O. 1992. Pursuit of Truth. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Quine, W. v. O. 1995. From Stimulus to Science. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Quintilian. 1920–2. Institutio oratoria. H. Butler (trans.), Oratorical Training, 12 bks. (Loeb Classical Library). Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Quirk, R. 1982. Speaking into the air. In Hoggart, R. & Morgan, J. (eds.), The Future of Broadcasting. Essays on Authority, Style and Choice, pp. 161–96. London: Macmillan.Google Scholar
Quirk, R., Greenbaum, S. Leech, G., & Svartvik, J. 1985. A Comprehensive Grammar of the English Language. London: Longman.Google Scholar
Rabiner, L. R. 1968. Digital-formant synthesizer for speech-synthesis studies. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 43: 822–8.Google Scholar
Raffel, S. H. 2002. If Goffman had read Levinas. Jrnl. of Classical Sociology 2: 179202.Google Scholar
Varmā, Rājarāja. [19th–20th c. ce]1973 Keralapāṇinı̄yam. Antani, S. E (ed.). Kottayam: National Bookstall.Google Scholar
Ramat, P., Carruba, O., Giacalone-, Ramat, A., & Graffi, G. (eds.). 1980. Linguistic Reconstruction and Indo-European Syntax. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Rampton, B. 1995. Crossing: Language and Ethnicity among Adolescents. London: Longman.Google Scholar
Rankin, R. L. 2003. The comparative method. In Joseph, & Janda, (eds.), pp. 181212.Google Scholar
Rapp, K. M. 1836–41. Versuch einer Physiologie der Sprache nebst historischer Entwicklung der abendländischen Idiome nach physiologischen Grundsätzen, 4 vols. Stuttgart: Cotta.Google Scholar
Rask, R. C. 1818. Undersøgelse om det gamle Nordiske eller Islandske Sprogs Oprindelse. Copenhagen: Gyldendal.Google Scholar
Rasmussen, M. 1992. Hjelmslevs sprogteori: glossematikken i videnskabshistorisk, videnskabsteoretisk og erkendelsesteoretisk perspektiv. PhD dissertation, University of Copenhagen.Google Scholar
Raynaud, S. 2012. Porre, comporre, disporre: Dai giudizi tetici agli enunciate tetici, ai temi e ai loro correlati. Echo des études romanes 8, 129–41.Google Scholar
Read, C., Buder, E. H., & Kent, R. D. 1992. Speech analysis systems: An evaluation. Jrnl. of Speech and Hearing Research 35: 314–32.Google Scholar
Real Academia Española. 2008. Banco de datos. (CREA: Corpus de Referencia del Español Actual). Madrid: Real Academia Española. www.rae.esGoogle Scholar
Récanati, F. 2004. Literal Meaning. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Régis, P. S. [1690]1970. La Logique. In Cours entier de philosophie,vol. i, pp. 162. New York: Johnson Reprint Corporation.Google Scholar
Reichard, G. A. 1925. Wiyot Grammar and Texts (University of California Publications in American Archaeology and Ethnology 22). Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Reichard, G. A. 1950. Navaho Religion: A Study of Symbolism, 2 vols. (Bollingen Series 18). NY: Pantheon.Google Scholar
Reichard, G. A. 1951. Navaho Grammar (Publications of the American Ethnological Society). NY: J. J. Augustin.Google Scholar
Reichenbach, H. 1938. Experience and Prediction. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Reid, T. [1785]1827: Of judgment. In Essays on the Intellectual Powers of Man, pp. 259346. London: Thomas Tag.Google Scholar
Reid, T. [1785]1971, 1975. Essays on the Intellectual Powers of Man. NY: Garland Press.Google Scholar
Reid, T. 1863. Works. Hamilton, Sir W. (ed.), 6th edn. Edinburgh: Maclachlan & Stewart.Google Scholar
Reilly, L. 1993. Introduction. In Reilly, L. (ed.), Petrus Helias, Summa Super Prisianum, vol. i, pp. 156. Toronto: Pontifical Institute of Mediaeval Studies.Google Scholar
Reinecke, J. E. 1937. Marginal languages. PhD dissertation, Yale University.Google Scholar
Reinecke, J. E. 1964. Trade jargons and Creole dialects as marginal languages. In Hymes, (ed.), pp. 534–42.Google Scholar
Reiner, E. 1973. How we read cuneiform texts. Jrnl. of Cuneiform Studies 25: 358.Google Scholar
Reisman, K. 1974. Contrapuntual conversations in an Antiguan village. In Bauman, & Sherzer, (eds.), pp. 110–24.Google Scholar
Reitter, D., Keller, F., & Moore, J. D. 2011. A computational cognitive model of syntactic priming. Cognitive Science 35: 587637.Google Scholar
Remez, R. E., Rubin, , , P., Pisoni, D. B., & Carrell, T. D. 1981. Speech perception without traditional speech cues. Science 212: 947–9.Google Scholar
d’Auxerre, Rémi. 1962–5. Lutz, C. E. (ed.). Remigii Autissiodorensis commentum in Martianum Capellam [Commentary on Martianus Capella’s The Marriage of Phililogy and Mercury]. Leiden: E. J. Brill.Google Scholar
Renan, E. 1858. Histoire générale et système comparé de langues sémitiques. Paris: Imprimerie impériale.Google Scholar
Rey, A. & Delesalle, S. 1979. Problèmes et conflits lexicographiques. Langue française 43: 426.Google Scholar
Rey-Debove, J. 1971. Étude linguistique et sémiotique des dictionnaires français contemporains. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Ribot, T. 1881. Les Maladies de la mémoire. Paris: Éditions Baillère.Google Scholar
Ricci, M. & Ruggieri, M. 2001. Dicionário português-chinês. Witek, M. J. W. (ed., s.l.). Biblioteca Nacional de Portugal, University of San Francisco (ed. and repr. fr. ms. [c. 1588], Archivum Romanum Societatis Iesu, Japonica et Sinica).Google Scholar
Ricento, T. (ed.). 2006. An Introduction to Language Policy: Theory and Method. Malden, MA: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Richardson, D. C. & Matlock, T. 2007. The integration of figurative language and static depictions: An eye movement study of fictive motion. Cognition 102: 129–38.Google Scholar
Ricken, U. 1984/1994. Sprache, Anthropologie, Philosophie in der französischen Aufklärun. Berlin: Akademie-Verlag. 1994: trans. R. E. Norton, Linguistics, Anthropology, and Philosophy in the French Enlightenment. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Ricken, U. & Bergheaud, P. (eds.). 1990. Sprachtheorie und Weltanschauung in der europäischen Aufklärung: Zur Geschichte der Sprachtheorien des 18. Jahrhunderts und ihrer europäischen Rezeption nach der Französischen Revolution. Berlin: Akademie-Verlag.Google Scholar
Rickford, J. R 1998. The creole origins of African-American Vernacular English: Evidence from copula absence. In Mufwene, S. S. et al. (eds.), African-American English. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Rickford, J. R. 1999. African American Vernacular English. Malden, MA: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Ricoeur, P. 1965. De l’interprétation. Paris: Editions du Seuil.Google Scholar
Ries, J. 1931. Was ist ein Satz? Prague: Taussig & Taussig.Google Scholar
Riffaterre, M. 1978. Semiotics of Poetry: Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press.Google Scholar
Rijkhoff, J. 1990. Toward a unified analysis of terms and predications. In Nuyts, J. et al. (eds.), Layers and Levels of Representation in Language Theory, pp. 165–92. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Rijkhoff, J. & Bakker, D. 1998. Language sampling. Linguistic Typology. 2: 263314.Google Scholar
Rijkhoff, J., Bakker, D., Hengeveld, H., & Kahrel, P. 1993. A method of language sampling. Studies in Language 17: 169203.Google Scholar
Ringe, D. 2003. Internal reconstruction. In Joseph, & Janda, (eds.), pp. 244–61.Google Scholar
Rix, H. 2001. Lexikon der indogermanischen Verben. Wiesbaden: Reichert Verlag.Google Scholar
Roark, T. 2011. Aristotle on Time: A Study of the Physics. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Roberts, I. & Roussou, A. 1999. A formal approach to grammaticalization. Linguistics 37: 1011–41.Google Scholar
Robertson, A. W. 2005. The Language of Democracy: Political Rhetoric in the United States and Britain, 1790–1900. Charlottesville, VA: University Press of Virginia.Google Scholar
Robins, R. H. 1957. Dionysius Thrax and the Western grammatical tradition. Transactions of the Philological Society 56: 67106.Google Scholar
Robins, R. H. 1963. General linguistics in Great Britain 1930–1960. In Mohrmann, et al. (eds.), pp. 157–83.Google Scholar
Robins, R. H. 1967/1997. A Short History of Linguistics. 1997: 4th edn. London: Longman.Google Scholar
Robins, R. H. 1984. Ex Oriente lux: A contribution of the Byzantine grammarians. In Auroux, S. et al. (eds.), Matériaux pour une histoire des théories linguistiques, pp. 217–25. Université de Lille.Google Scholar
Rocher, R. 1980. Nathaniel Brassey Halhed, Sir William Jones, and comparative Indo-European linguistics. In Bingen, J. et al. (eds.), Recherches de linguistique. Hommages à Maurice Leroy, pp. 173–80. Éditions de l’Université de Bruxelles.Google Scholar
Roebuck, R. 1998. Subjects speak out: How learners position themselves in a psycholinguistic task. In Lantolf, J. (ed.), Sociocultural Theory and Second Language Learning, pp. 7995. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Roland, D., Dick, F., & Elman, J. L. 2007. Frequency of basic English grammatical structures: A corpus analysis. Jrnl. of Memory and Language 57: 348–79.Google Scholar
Rollins, P. C. 1980. Benjamin Lee Whorf: Lost Generation Theories of Mind, Language, and Religion. Ann Arbor, MI: University Microfilms International.Google Scholar
Romaine, S. 1982. What is a speech community? In Romaine, S. (ed.), Sociolinguistic Variation in Speech Communities, pp. 1324. NY: Edward Arnold.Google Scholar
Roques, G. 1986. Échappées sur le paysage idéologique de la romanistique française. In Linguistique générale et linguistique romane. Histoire de la grammaire, vol. i, pp. 7181. Aix-Marseille: Université de Provence.Google Scholar
Rorty, R. (ed.). 1967. The Linguistic Turn. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Rosch, E. 1973. On the internal structure of perceptual and semantic categories. In Moore, T. E. (ed.), Cognitive Development and the Acquisition of Language, pp. 111–44. NY: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Rosch, E. 1975. Cognitive representations of semantic categories. Jrnl. of Experimental Psychology: General 104: 192233.Google Scholar
Rosch, E. 1978. Principles of categorization. In Rosch, E. & Lloyd, B. B. (eds.), Cognition and Categorization, pp. 2748. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.Google Scholar
Rosen, C. 1984. The interface between semantic roles and initial grammatical relations. In Perlmutter, D. M. & Rosen, C. G. (eds.), Studies in Relational Grammar, vol. ii, pp. 3880. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Rosén, H. 1989. consignificare and πpoΣΣhmainein: Re-evaluation of a grammatical term. Historiographia Linguistica 16: 225–32.Google Scholar
Rosen, S. 1983. Plato’s Sophist: The Drama of Original and Image. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press.Google Scholar
Rosenberger, W. 1902. Grammatik und Wörterbuch der Neutralsprache (Idiom Neutral). Leipzig: Haberland Verlag.Google Scholar
Rosenfeld, S. A. 2005. The political uses of sign language: The case of the French revolution. Sign Language Studies 6: 1737.Google Scholar
Rosier, I. 1983. La grammaire spéculative des Modistes. Presses Universitaires de Lille.Google Scholar
Rosier, I. 1988. “O Magister…”: Grammaticalité et intelligibilité selon un sophisme du XIIIe siècle. Cahiers de l’Institut du Moyen-Âge grec et latin 56: 1–102.Google Scholar
Rosier, I. 1992. Mathieu de Bologne et les divers aspects du pré-modisme. In Buzzetti, D. et al. (eds.), L’ensegnamento della logica a Bologna nel XIV secolo, n.s. vol. viii, pp. 73164. Bologna: Istituto per la Storia dell’Università di Bologna.Google Scholar
Rosier, I. 1994. La Parole comme acte: Sur la grammaire et la sémantique au XIIIe siècle. Paris: J. Vrin.Google Scholar
Rosier, I. 1995. Res significata et modus significandi: les implications d’une distinction médiévale. In Ebbesen, (ed.), pp. 135–68.Google Scholar
Rosier-Catach, I. 2004. La Parole efficace: Signe, rituel, sacré. Paris: Éditions du Seuil.Google Scholar
Rosier-Catach, I. 2005. The Glosulae in Priscianum and its tradition. In McLelland, N. & Linn, A. R. (eds.), Flores Grammaticae: Essays in Memory of Vivien Law, pp. 81100. Münster: Nodus.Google Scholar
Ross, J. R. 1967/1985. Constraints on variables in syntax. PhD dissertation, MIT. Pub.: 1985. Infinite Syntax! Norwood, NJ: Ablex.Google Scholar
Ross, J. R. 1970. On declarative sentences. In Jacobs, R. A. & Rosenbaum, P. S. (eds.), Readings in English Transformational Grammar, pp. 222–72. Waltham, MA: Ginn & Co.Google Scholar
Rossi-, Landi, F. 1968. Il linguaggio come lavoro e come mercato: Una teoria della produzione e dell’alienazione linguistiche. Milan: Studi Bompianti.Google Scholar
Rothenberg, M. 1973. A new inverse-filtering technique for deriving the glottal airflow waveform during voicing. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 53: 1632–45.Google Scholar
Roulet, E. 1984. Speech acts, discourse structure, and pragmatic connective. Jrnl. of Pragmatics 8: 3147.Google Scholar
Roulet, E., Auchlin, A., Moeschler, J., & Rubbattel, C. (eds.). 1985/1991. L’Articulation du discours en français contemporain. 1991: 3rd edn. Bern: Peter Lang.Google Scholar
Roulet, E., Filliettaz, L. & Grobet, A., with Burger, M.. 2001. Un modèle et un instrument d’analyse de l’organisation du discours. Bern: Peter Lang.Google Scholar
Rousseau, J.-J. 1750. Discours qui a remporté le prix à l’académie de Dijon. En l’année 1750. Sur cette question proposé par la même académie: si le rétablissement des sciences & des arts a contribué à épurer les moeurs. Par un citoyen de Genève. Geneva: Barillot et fils.Google Scholar
Rousseau, J.-J. 1755/1985/1992. Discours sur l’origine et les fondements de l’inégalité parmi les hommes. 1985: Discourse on Inequality. M. Cranston (trans.). London: Penguin Books. 1992: Discours sur l’origine et les fondements de l’inégalité parmi les hommes. É. Zernik (comm.). Paris: Hatier.Google Scholar
Rousseau, J.-J. [1762]1990. Émile, ou de l’éducation. Paris: Gallimard.Google Scholar
Rousseau, J.-J. [1781a]/1970/1986 Essai sur l’origine des langues où il est parlé de la mélodie et de l’imitation musicale. 1970: [ed., intro., and notes by C. Porset]. Bordeaux: Guy Ducros. 1986: J. H. Moran (trans.). In Moran & Gode (eds.), pp. 1–74.Google Scholar
Rousseau, J.-J. 1781b. Traités sur la musique. Geneva: s.n.Google Scholar
Roussseau, J.-J. 1782/1965a. Les Confessions. Geneva: s.n.Google Scholar
Rousseau, J.-J. 1965b. Bekenntnisse. Einführung und Anmerkungen von Werner Krauss. Leipzig: Insel-Verlag.Google Scholar
Rousselot, P.-J., Abbé, . 1901–8. Principes de phonétique expérimentale, vol ii. Paris: H. Welter.Google Scholar
Roux, F.-E. & Trémoulet, M. 2002. Organization of language areas in bilingual patients: A cortical stimulation study. Jrnl. of Neurosurgery 97: 857–64.Google Scholar
Ruiz González, E. & Sáenz-Badillos, Á. 2004. Abraham ibn ‘Ezra, Śafah Bĕrurah, La Lengua Escogida. Córdoba: Ediciones el Almendro.Google Scholar
Rumelhart, D. E. 1977. Understanding and summarizing brief stories. In LaBerge, D. & Samuels, S. J. (eds.), Basic Processes in Reading: Perception and Comprehension, pp. 265303. Hillsdale NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.Google Scholar
Rumsey, A. 1990. Wording, meaning, and linguistic ideology. American Anthropologist 92: 346–61.Google Scholar
Ruppenhofer, J., Ellsworth, M., Petruck, M. R., Johnson, C. R., & Scheffczyk, J. 2010. FrameNet II: Extended Theory and Practice. Berkeley, CA: International Computer Science Institute.Google Scholar
Rusiecki, J. 1976. The development of contrastive linguistics. Interlanguage Studies Bulletin 1: 1244.Google Scholar
Russell, B. 1905. On denoting. Mind 14: 479–93.Google Scholar
Russell, B. 1908/1956/1967. Mathematical logic as based on the theory of types. American Jrnl. of Mathematics 30: 222–62. 1956: repr. in B. Russell. Logic and Knowledge: Essays 1901–1950. London: Allen & Unwin, pp. 59–102. 1967: repr. in J. v. Heijenoort, From Frege to Gödel, pp. 152–82. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Russell, B. 1956. Logic and Knowledge. Essays 1901–1950. Marsh, R. C. (ed.). London: Allen & Unwin.Google Scholar
Ryle, G. 1932/1967. Systematically misleading expressions. Proceedings of the Aristotelian Society 32: 139–70. 1967: repr. in Rorty (ed.), pp. 85–100.Google Scholar
Ryle, G. 1949. The Concept of Mind. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Rymes, B. 1996. Rights to advise: Advice as an emergent phenomenon in student-teacher talk. Linguistics and Education 8: 409–37.Google Scholar
Sacks, H. 1992. Lectures on Conversation. Jeffersen, G. (ed.), 2 vols. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Sacks, H. & Schegloff, E. A. 1979. Two preferences in the organization of reference to persons and their interaction. In Psathas, G. (ed.), Everyday Language: Studies in Ethnomethodology, pp. 1521. NY: Irvington.Google Scholar
Sacks, H., Schegloff, E. A., & Jefferson, G. 1974. A simplest systematics for the organization of turn-taking for conversation. Language 50: 696735.Google Scholar
Sadovnik, A.R. (ed.). 1995. Knowledge and Pedagogy: The Sociology of Basil Bernstein. Norwood, NJ: Ablex.Google Scholar
Sáenz-Badillos, Á. (ed. and trans.)1980. Tĕšubot de Dunaš ben Labraṭ,. Universidad de Granada.Google Scholar
Sáenz-Badillos, Á. (ed.). 1986. Maḥberet Menaḥem.W. intro and notes. Universidad de Granada.Google Scholar
Sáenz-Badillos, Á. 1987. Un diccionario anónimo de Provenza (siglo XIII). Universidad de Granada.Google Scholar
Sáenz-Badillos, Á. 1993. A History of the Hebrew Language. J. Elwolde (trans.). Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Saer, P. J. 1922. An inquiry into the effect of biIingualism upon the intelligence of young children. Jrnl. of Experimental Pedagogy, 6: 232–40.Google Scholar
Saffran, J. R., Aslin, R. N., & Newport, E. L. 1996. Statistical learning by 8-month-old infants. Science 274: 1926–8.Google Scholar
Saffran, J. R. & Wilson, D. P. 2003. From syllables to syntax: Multilevel statistical learning by 12-month-old infants. Infancy 4: 273–84.Google Scholar
Sag, I. A., Wasow, T., & Bender, E. M. 2003. Syntactic Theory: A Formal Introduction, 2nd edn. Stanford, CA: CSLI Publications.Google Scholar
Sagey, E. 1986. The representations of features and relations in nonlinear phonology. PhD dissertation, MIT.Google Scholar
Śākat˙āyana. [c. 6th c. bce]1939/1971. R̥ktantra. Kanta, Surya (ed.). Lahore. 1971: repr. Delhi: Meharchand Lachhmandas.Google Scholar
Śākat˙āyana. [9th c. ce]1971. Śākaṭāyana-Vyākaraṇa, w. auto-comm. Amoghavr̥tti. 1971: repr. S. Tripathi (ed.). Banaras: Bharatiya Jnanapitha.Google Scholar
Salmon, V. G. 1972. The Works of Francis Lodwick: A Study of his Writings in the Intellectual Context of the Seventeenth Century. London: Longman.Google Scholar
Salvucci, R. 1982. Sviluppi della problematica del linguaggio nel XVIII secolo: Condillac, Rousseau, Smith. Rimini: Maggioli Editore.Google Scholar
Śāṃkhāyana-Brāhmaṇa. [1000–700 bce]1977. G.Vajeshankar (ed.), 2nd edn. (Anandashram Sanskrit Series 65). Pune: Anandashram.Google Scholar
Sampson, G. 1980. Schools of Linguistics: Competition and Evolution. London: Hutchinson.Google Scholar
Sanchis, E. B. 1999. Some reflections on the origins of cognitive linguistics. Jrnl. of English Studies 1: 928.Google Scholar
Sanders, C. (ed.). 2004a. The Cambridge Companion to Saussure. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Sanders, C. 2004b. The Paris years. In Sanders, (ed.), pp. 3046.Google Scholar
Sanderson, R. [1615]1618. Logicae artis compendium. 1618: 2nd edn. Oxford: John Lichfield & James Short.Google Scholar
Sandler, W. & Lillo-Martin, D. 2001. Natural sign languages. In Aronoff, & Rees-Miller, (eds.), pp. 533–62.Google Scholar
Sankoff, D. (ed.). 1978. Linguistic Variation: Models and Methods. NY: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Sankoff, G. 1980. The Social Life of Language. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press.Google Scholar
Sankoff, D. & Laberge, S. 1978. The linguistic market and the statistical explanation of variability. In Sankoff, (ed.), pp. 239–50.Google Scholar
Santulli, F. 1989. Spunti di riflessione semantica nei Prinzipien di H. Paul. Milan: Università degli Studi.Google Scholar
Santulli, F. 1995. L’opera di Hermann Paul tra linguistica e filologia. Rome: Il Calamo.Google Scholar
Sapir, E. 1912. The Takelma language of southwestern Oregon. In Boas, F. (ed.), Handbook of American Indian Languages, pp. 1–296. (Bureau of American Ethnology, Bulletin 40, part 2). Washington, DC: Smithsonian Institution.Google Scholar
Sapir, E. 1921a. A bird’s-eye view of American languages north of Mexico. Science 54: 408.Google Scholar
Sapir, E. 1921b. Language: An Introduction to the Study of Speech. NY: Harcourt, Brace & Co.Google Scholar
Sapir, E. 1924/1985. The grammarian and his language. American Mercury 1: 149–55. 1985: repr. in Mandelbaum (ed.), pp. 150–9.Google Scholar
Sapir, E. 1925a/1985. Sound patterns in language. Language 1: 3751. 1985: repr. in Mandelbaum (ed.), pp. 33–45.Google Scholar
Sapir, E. 1925b. Memorandum on the problem of an international auxiliary language. The Romanic Review 16: 244–56.Google Scholar
Sapir, E. 1927/1985. Speech as a personality trait. American Jrnl. of Sociology 32: 892905. 1985: repr. Mandelbaum (ed.), pp. 533–43.Google Scholar
Sapir, E. 1929a/1985. Central and North American languages. In The Encyclopaedia Britannica, 14th edn., vol. v, pp. 138–41. London: Encyclopaedia Britannica. 1985: repr. in Mandelbaum (ed.), pp. 16–78.Google Scholar
Sapir, E. 1929b/1985. The status of linguistics as a science. Language 5: 207–14. 1985: repr. in Mandelbaum (ed.), pp. 160–6.Google Scholar
Sapir, E. 1930. Totality (Language Monographs 6). Baltimore, MD: Linguistic Society of America, Waverly Press.Google Scholar
Sapir, E. 1931a/1985. The concept of phonetic law as tested in primitive languages by Leonard Bloomfield. In Rice, S. A. (ed.), Methods in Social Science: A Case Book, pp. 297306. University of Chicago Press. 1985: repr. in Mandelbaum (ed.), pp. 73–82.Google Scholar
Sapir, E. 1931b/2008. Wanted: A world language. The American Mercury 22: 202–9. 2008: repr. in P. Swiggers (ed.), The Collected Works of Edward Sapir, vol. i: General Linguistics, pp. 276–83. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Sapir, E. 1933/1985. La réalité psychologique des phonèmes. Jrnl. de Psychologie normale et pathologique 30: 247–65. 1985: trans./repr. ‘The psychological reality of phonemes.’ In Mandelbaum (ed.), pp. 46–60.Google Scholar
Sapir, E. 1934/1985. Personality. Encyclopaedia of the Social Sciences 12: 85–7. 1985: repr. in Mandelbaum (ed.), pp. 560–3.Google Scholar
Sapir, E. 1938/1985. Why cultural anthropology needs the psychiatrist. Psychiatry 1: 712. 1985: repr. in Mandelbaum (ed.), pp. 569–77.Google Scholar
Sapir, E. 1944. Grading: A study in semantics. Philosophy of Science 11: 93116. [Written in 1930, pub. posthumously.]Google Scholar
Sapir, E. & Swadesh, M. 1932. The Expression of the Ending-Point Relation in English, French, and German (Language Monographs 10). Baltimore, MD: Linguistic Society of America, Waverly Press.Google Scholar
Sapir, J. D. & Crocker, J. C. (eds.). 1977. The Social Uses of Metaphor: Essays on the Anthropology of Rhetorics. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press.Google Scholar
Śarvavarman. [2nd c. ce]1874–8. Kātantra-Vyākaraṇa, w. comm. by Durgasiṃha. Eggeling, J. (ed.). Calcutta: Bibliotheca Indica.Google Scholar
Śatapatha-Brāhmaṇa. [c. 1000–700 bce]1849/1964. Weber, A. (ed.). Berlin: F. Dummler’s Verlag. 1964: repr. in Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series 96. Banaras.Google Scholar
Śaunaka. [c. 6th c. bce]1931. R̥gveda-Prātis΄ākhya, w. comm. by Uvat˙a. Shastri, M. D. (ed.). Allahabad: The Indian Press.Google Scholar
Śaunaka. [c. 6th c. bce]1997. Śaunakı̄ya-Caturādhyāyika, a Prātis΄ākhya of the Atharvaveda. 1997: Deshpande, M. M. (ed./trans.) (Harvard Oriental Series 52). Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Sauneron, S. 1982. Esna VIII. L’Écriture figurative dans les textes d’Esna. Cairo: Imprimerie de l’Institut Français d’Archéologie Orientale.Google Scholar
Saussure, F. de. 1879. Mémoire sur le système primitif des voyelles dans les langues indo-européennes. Leipzig: Teubner.Google Scholar
Saussure, F. de. 1881. De l’emploi du génitif absolu en sanscrit. Geneva: Jules-Guillaume Fick.Google Scholar
Saussure, F. de. 1916 (1922, 1931)/1959/1966 (1969)/1967–8/1975/1983/1987/2011/2013a/, b. 1916: Cours de linguistique générale. C. Bally & A. Sechehaye (eds.), w. collab. of A. Riedlinger. Lausanne: Payot. 1922: 2nd edn. 1931: 3rd edn. 1959: W. Baskin (trans.), Course in General Linguistics. NY: Philosophical Library. 1966 (1969): McGraw-Hill. 1967–8/1968: Cours de linguistique générale (vol. i of 1967/1968–74 critical edn.), R. Engler (ed). Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag. 1975: Cours de linguistique générale, T. De Mauro (ed.). Paris: Payot. 1983/1987: R. Harris (trans., comm.). Course in General Linguistics. London: Duckworth. 2011: P. Meisel & E. Saussy (eds.), W. Baskin (trans., intro. p. xlix). NY: Columbia University Press. 2013a: R. Harris (trans.), Course in General Linguistics. London: Duckworth. 2013b: P. Wunderli (trans./comm.). Cours de linguistique générale. Zweisprachige Ausgabe französich-deutsch mit Einleitung, Anmerkkungen und Kommentar. Tübingen: Narr.Google Scholar
Saussure, F. de. 1922/1984. Recueil des publications scientifiques de Ferdinand de Saussure. Bally, C. & Gautier, L. (eds.). Lausanne: Payot. 1984: Geneva: Slatkine.Google Scholar
Saussure, F. de. 1957. Introduction au iime Cours de linguistique générale (1908–9). Godel, R. (ed./introd.), Cahiers Ferdinand de Saussure 15: 3–103.Google Scholar
Saussure, F. de. 2002. Écrits de linguistique générale. Bouquet, S. & Engler, R. (eds.). Paris: Gallimard.Google Scholar
Saussure, F. de. 2005. Linguistique générale (Cours de M. le Professeur de Saussure, semestre d’hiver 1910–1911 [3e cours de linguistique générale]). Notes d’Émile Constantin. Cahiers Ferdinand de Saussure 58: 82290.Google Scholar
Savage, M. 2000. Class Analysis and Social Transformation. London: Open University Press.Google Scholar
Savignon, S. 1985. Evaluation of communicative competence: The ACTFL provisional proficiency guidelines. The Modern Language Jrnl. 69: 129–34.Google Scholar
Savignon, S. 1991. Communicative language teaching: State of the art. TESOL Quarterly 25: 261–77.Google Scholar
Sawashima, M. & Hirose, H. 1968. New laryngoscopic technique by use of fiber optics. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 43: 168–9.Google Scholar
Sawyer, R. K. (ed.). 1997. Creativity in Performance. Greenwich, CT: Ablex.Google Scholar
Sawyer, R. K. 2001. Creating Conversations: Improvisation in Everyday Discourse. Cresskill, NJ: Hampton Press.Google Scholar
Sayce, A. H. 1880. Introduction to the Science of Language. London: C. Kegan Paul.Google Scholar
Sbisà, M. 1989. Linguaggio, ragione, interazione: Per una teoria pragmatica degli atti linguistici. Bologna: Il Mulino.Google Scholar
Schank, R. 1982. Dynamic Memory: A Theory of Reminding and Learning in Computers and People. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Schank, R. 1984. The Cognitive Computer. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.Google Scholar
Schank, R. 1986. Explanation Patterns. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.Google Scholar
Schank, R. & Abelson, R. C. 1977. Scripts, Plans, Goals and Understanding: An Inquiry into Human Knowledge Structures. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.Google Scholar
Scharf, H.-W. 1994. Das Verfahren der Sprache: Humboldt gegen Chomsky. Paderborn: Schöningh.Google Scholar
Scharfe, H. 1977. Grammatical Literature. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz.Google Scholar
Scheffler, I. 1963. The Anatomy of Inquiry. NY: Knopf.Google Scholar
Schegloff, E. 1996. Issues of relevance for discourse analysis: Contingency in action, interaction and co-participant context. In Hovy, E. H. & Scott, D. R. (eds.), Interdisciplinary Perspectives on Discourse, pp. 335. Heidelberg: Springer Verlag.Google Scholar
Schegloff, E., Jefferson, G., & Sacks, H. 1977. The preference for self-correction in the organization of repair in conversation. Language 53: 361–82.Google Scholar
Schelling, F. W. J. 1800/1858. System des transzendentalen Idealismus. 1858: in Sämmtliche Werke, vol. ii, pp. 327634. Stuttgart & Augsburg: Cotta.Google Scholar
Schenkeveld, D. M. 1984. Stoic and peripatetic kinds of speech act and the distinction of grammatical moods. Mnemosyne 37: 291353.Google Scholar
Schenkeveld, D. M. & Barnes, J. 1999. Language. In Algra, et al. (eds.), pp. 177225.Google Scholar
Scherer, W. 1868/1995. Zur Geschichte der deutschen Sprache. Berlin: Duncker. 1995: new edn., introd. by Jankowsky, K.. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Schetelich, M. 1991. Die ‘schwarzen’ Feinde der Arya im Ṛgveda. Altorientalische Forschungen 18: 151–62.Google Scholar
Schieffelin, B. B. & Doucet, R. C. 1994. The ‘real’ Haitian Creole: Ideology, metalinguistics, and orthographic choice. American Ethnologist 21: 176200.Google Scholar
Schieffelin, B. B. & Ochs, E. 1986. Language Socialization across Cultures. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Schiffman, H. F. 1997. Diglossia as a sociolinguistic situation. In Coulmas, (ed.), pp. 205–16.Google Scholar
Schiffrin, D. (ed.). 1984. Meaning, Form and Use in Context: Linguistic Applications Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press.Google Scholar
Schiffrin, D. 1985. Everyday argument: The organization of diversity in talk. In van Dijk, (ed.), pp. 3546.Google Scholar
Schiffrin, D. 1987. Discourse Markers. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Schiffrin, D. 1990. The principle of intersubjectivity in conversation and communication. Semiotica 80: 121–51.Google Scholar
Schiffrin, D. 1994. Approaches to Discourse. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Schiffrin, D. 2006. In Other Words: Variation in Reference and Narrative. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Schlegel, F. v. 1808/1977. Über die Sprache und Weisheit der Indier: Ein Beitrag zur Begründung der Alterthumskunde. Heidelberg: Mohr und Zimmer. 1977: repr. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Schlegel, F. v. 1836. Friedrich Schlegel’s philosophische Vorlesungen aus den Jahren 1804 bis 1806. Bonn: E. Weber.Google Scholar
Schlegel, F. v. [1797]1928. Philosophie der Philologie., Körner, J. (ed.). Logos 17: 1666.Google Scholar
Schlieben-Lange, B. 1984. Vom Vergessen in der Sprachwissenschaftsgeschichte. Zu den ‘Ideologen’ und ihrer Rezeption im 19. Jahrhundert. Zeitschrift für Literaturwissenschaft und Linguistik 14: 1836.Google Scholar
Schlieben-Lange, B. 1989–94. Europäische Sprachwissenschaft um 1800: Methodologische und historiographische Beiträge zum Umkreis der idéologie, 4 vols. Münster: Nodus.Google Scholar
Schleicher, A. W. 1850. Die Sprachen Europas in systematischer Übersicht. Bonn: König.Google Scholar
Schleicher, A. W. 1852. Die Formenlehre der kirchenslawischen Sprache erklärend und vergleichend dargestellt. Bonn: König.Google Scholar
Schleicher, A. W. 1856. Handbuch der litauischen Sprache. Prague: Calve.Google Scholar
Schleicher, A. W. 1859. Zur Morphologie der Sprache. Mémoires de l’Académie des Sciences de St. Pétersbourg 1: 138.Google Scholar
Schleicher, A. W. 1861–2. Compendium der vergleichenden Grammatik der indogermanischen Sprachen, 2 vols. Weimar: Böhlau.Google Scholar
Schleicher, A. W. 1863/1983. Die Darwinsche Theorie und die Sprachwissenschaft. Weimar: Böhlau. 1983: A. V. W. Bikkers (trans.), J. Maher (intr.), repr. in Koerner, K. (ed.), Linguistics and Evolutionary Theory. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Schmidhauser, A. U. 2010. The birth of grammar in Greece. In Bakker, E. J. (ed.), A Companion to the Ancient Greek Language, pp. 499511. Malden, MA: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar
Schmitt, R. 1967. Dichtung und Dichtersprache in indogermanischer Zeit. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar
Schmitter, P (ed.). 1999. Geschichte der Sprachtheorie,vol. iv: Sprachtheorien der Neuzeit I. Der epistemologische Kontext neuzeitlicher Sprach- und Grammatiktheorien. Tübingen: Gunter Narr.Google Scholar
Schneider, G. 1973. Zum Begriff des Lautgesetzes in der Sprachwissenschaft seit den Junggrammatikern. Tübingen: Gunter Narr.Google Scholar
Schneider, K. L. 1819. Ausführliche mit möglichst sorgfältiger Benutzung der vorhandenen Hülfsmittel und nach neuen Untersuchungen verbesserte Grammatik der lateinischen Sprache. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer.Google Scholar
Schott, G. 1664. Technica Curiosa, sive Mirabilia Artis. Nuremberg: Sumptibus Johannis Andreæ Endteri & Wolfgangi junioris hæredum.Google Scholar
Schuchardt, H. 1885. Über die Lautgesetze – gegen die Junggrammatiker. Berlin: Oppenheim.Google Scholar
Schuchardt, H. 1894. Weltsprache und Weltsprachen. An Gustav Meyer. Strassburg: K. J. Trübner.Google Scholar
Scobbie, J. M. 2005. Interface and overlap in phonetics and phonology. In Ramchand, G. & Reiss, C. (eds.), Oxford Handbook of Linguistic Interfaces, pp. 1752. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Scobbie, J. M., Gibbon, , F., Hardcastle, W. J., & Fletcher, P. 2000. Covert contrast as a stage in the acquisition of phonetics and phonology. In Broe, & Pierrehumbert, (eds.), pp. 194207.Google Scholar
Scott, D. 1970. Advice on modal logic. In Lambert, K. (ed.), Philosophical Problems in Logic: Recent Developments, pp. 143–73. Dordrecht: D. Reidel.Google Scholar
Séances. 1800–1. Séances des Écoles Normales recueillies par des sténographes et revues par les professeurs, new edn., 10 vols. Paris: À l’imprimerie du cercle social, an 9 de la République Française.Google Scholar
Searle, J. 1962. Meaning and speech acts. The Philosophical Review 71: 423–32.Google Scholar
Searle, J. R. 1969. Speech Acts: An Essay in the Philosophy of Language. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Searle, J. R. 1972. Chomsky’s revolution in linguistics. New York Review of Books, June 29.Google Scholar
Searle, J. R. 1975. A taxonomy of illocutionary acts. In Gunderson, (ed.), pp. 344–69.Google Scholar
Searle, J. R. 1980. Minds, brains, and programs. Behavioral and Brain Sciences 3: 417–57.Google Scholar
Searle, J. R. & Vanderveken, D. 1985. Foundations of Illocutionary Logic. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Sebeok, T. A. (ed.). 1955/1958. Myth. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press.Google Scholar
Sebeok, T. A. (ed.). 1960/1968. Style in Language. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Sebeok, T. A. (ed.) 1963–79. Current Trends in Linguistics. Series: 22 coedited vols. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Sebeok, T. A. 1972. Perspectives in Zoosemiotics. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Sebeok, T. A. 1981. Introduction. In Sebeok, T. & Rosenthal, R. (eds.), The Clever Hans Phenomenon: Communication with Horses, Whales, Apes, and People. NY: Academy of Sciences.Google Scholar
Sebeok, T. A. 1991. Semiotics in the United States. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press.Google Scholar
Sebeok, T. A., Hayes, A., & Bateson, M. (eds.). 1964/1972. Approaches to Semiotics: Cultural Anthropology, Education, Linguistics, Psychiatry, Psychology. Indiana University: Research Center in Anthropology, Folklore and Linguistics. 1972: repr. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Sebeok, T. A. & Umiker-Sebeok, J. (eds.). 1992. Biosemiotics. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Sechehaye, A. 1908. Programme et méthodes de la linguistique théorique. Geneva: Champion.Google Scholar
Sechehaye, A.. 1926. Essai sur la structure logique de la phrase. Geneva: Champion.Google Scholar
Sechehaye, A. 1927. L’école genevoise de linguistique générale. Indogermanische Forschungen 44, 217241.Google Scholar
Sedley, D. 2003a. Plato’s Cratylus. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Sedley, D. 2003b. The school, from Zeno to Arius Didymus. In Inwood, B. (ed.), The Cambridge Companion to the Stoics, pp. 732. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Sedulius Scottus [c. 890]1975/1998. Commentum Sedulii Scotti in Maiorem Donatum Grammaticum. 1998: repr. Brearley, D. (ed.) Studies and Texts 27. Toronto: Pontifical Institute of Medieval Studies.Google Scholar
Segal, J. B. 1953. The Diacritical Point and Accents in Syriac. London: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Seidlhofer, B. 2001. Closing a conceptual gap: The case for a description of English as a lingua franca. Intl. Jrnl. of Applied Linguistics 11: 133–58.Google Scholar
Seidlhofer, B. 2005. English as a lingua franca. English Language Teaching Jrnl. 59: 339–41.Google Scholar
Seiler, H. 1995. Cognitive-conceptual structure and linguistic encoding: Language universals and typology in the UNITYP framework. In Shibatani, & Bynon, (eds.), pp. 273325.Google Scholar
Seiler, H. 2000. Language Universals Research: A Synthesis. Tübingen: Gunter Narr.Google Scholar
Selinker, L. 1972. Interlanguage. Intl. Review of Applied Linguistics 10: 209–31.Google Scholar
Selkirk, E. 1982. Syllables. In von der Hulst, H. & Smith, N. (eds.), The Structure of Phonological Representations, vol. ii, pp. 337–83. Dordrecht: Foris.Google Scholar
Senghas, A. & Coppola, M. 2001. Children creating language: How Nicaraguan Sign Language acquired a spatial grammar. Psychological Science 12: 323–8.Google Scholar
Sergeant, J. 1697. Solid Philosophy Asserted, against the Fancies of Idealists. London: Roger Clavil … Abel Roper … and Thomas Metcalf.Google Scholar
Sergius (Pseudo-Cassiodorus). [late 5th c.]2005. Stock, C. (ed.), Commentarium de oratione et de octo partibus orationis Artis secondae Donati. Trans., text, and comm. Munich and Leipzig: K. G. Sauer.Google Scholar
Sériot, P. 1999/2014. 1999: Structure et totalité. Les origines intellectuelles du structuralisme en Europe centrale et orientale. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France. 2014: A. Jakobs-Colas (trans.), Structure and the Whole: East, West and Non-Darwinian Biology in the Origins of Structural Linguistics. Berlin: De Gruyter.Google Scholar
Sériot, P. & Mahmoudian, M. (eds.), 1994. L’École de Prague: l’apport épistémologique. Cahiers de l’ILSL 5. Université de Lausanne.Google Scholar
Sextus Empiricus. [2nd–3rd c. ce]1933/1993. Outlines of Pyrrhonism. R. G. Bury (trans.) (Loeb Classical Library 382). 1993: repr. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Sextus Empiricus. [2nd–3rd c. ce]1949/1997. Against Professors. R. G. Bury (trans.) (Loeb Classical Library 273). 1997: repr. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Sezgin, F. 1984. Geschichte des arabischen Schrifttums,vol. ix: Grammatik bis ca. 430 H. Leiden: E. J. Brill.Google Scholar
Sgall, P. 1995. Prague School typology. In Shibatani, & Bynon, (eds.), pp. 4984.Google Scholar
Shaffer, A. 1969. TA ša kīma A ītenerrubu: A study in native Babylonian philology. Orientalia n.s. 38: 433–46.Google Scholar
Shannon, C. E. & Weaver, W. 1949. The Mathematical Theory of Communication. Urbana, IL: University of Illinois Press.Google Scholar
Sharma, R. N. 1987. The Aṣṭādhyāyı̄ of Pāṇini,vol. i: Introduction to the Aṣṭādhyāyı̄ as a Grammatical Device. New Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal.Google Scholar
Shepard, C. A., Giles, H., & Le Poire, B. A. 2001. Communication accommodation theory. In Robinson, W. P. & Giles, H. (eds.), The New Handbook of Language and Social Psychology, pp. 3356. NY: John Wiley & Sons.Google Scholar
Sherzer, J. 1983. Kuna Ways of Speaking: An Ethnographic Perspective. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press.Google Scholar
Sherzer, J. 1990. Verbal Art in San Blas: Kuna Culture through its Discourse. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Shibatani, M. 2006. Honorifics. In Brown, (ed.), vol. v, pp. 381–90.Google Scholar
Shibatani, M. & Bynon, T. (eds.). 1995. Approaches to Language Typology. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Shohamy, E. 2001. Democratic assessment as an alternative. Language Testing 18: 373–91.Google Scholar
Sicard, R. A. [1800a]1803. Cours d’instruction d’un sourd-muet de naissance, et qui peut être utile à l’éducation de ceux qui entendent et qui parlent, 2nd edn. Paris: Le Clerc.Google Scholar
Sicard, R. A. [1800b]1808. Éléments de grammaire générale, appliqués à la langue française, edn. Paris: Déterville.Google Scholar
Sicard, R. A. [1808]1818. Théorie des signes pour servir d’introduction à l’étude des langues, où le sens des mots, au lieu d’être défini, est mis en action. Paris: Treuttel & Wurtz.Google Scholar
Sidarus, A. 2004. Le modèle arabe en grammaire copte: Une approche des muqaddimāt copto-arabes du Moyen-Âge. In Dichy, J. & Hamzé, H. (eds.), Le voyage et la langue: Mélanges en l’honneur d’Anouar Louca et d’André Roman, pp. 253–67. Damascus: Institut Français du Proche-Orient.Google Scholar
Sidnell, J. 2001. Conversational turn-taking in a Caribbean English Creole. Jrnl. of Pragmatics 33: 1263–90.Google Scholar
Sidner, C. L. 1979. Toward a computational theory of definite anaphora comprehension in English. PhD dissertation, MIT (AI Technical Report #537).Google Scholar
Siegel, D. 1974. Topics in English morphology. PhD dissertation, MIT.Google Scholar
Sievers, E. 1876/1881. Grundzüge der Lautphysiologie zur Einführung in das Studium der Lautlehre der indogermanischen Sprachen. 1881: rev. vers. Leipzig: Breitkopf & Härtel.Google Scholar
Sievers, E. 1882/1970. Angelsächsische Grammatik. Halle: Max Niemeyer. 1970: A. S. Cook (trans.), An Old English Grammar. St. Clair Shores, MI: Scholarly Press.Google Scholar
Siewierska, A. 2004. Person. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Siewierska, A. 2005. Third-person zero of verbal person marking. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds.), pp. 418–21.Google Scholar
Silano, G. 2007. Introduction. In G. Silano (trans.), Peter Lombard. The Sentences: Book I: The Mystery of the Trinity, p. vi. Toronto: Pontifical Institute of Mediaeval Studies.Google Scholar
Silano, G. (trans.) 2010. Peter Lombard. The Sentences: Book IV: On the Doctrine of Signs. Toronto: Pontifical Institute of Mediaeval Studies.Google Scholar
Silverberg, R., Gordon, H. W, Pollack, S., & Bentin, S. 1980. Shift of visual field preference for Hebrew words in native speakers learning to read. Brain & Language 11: 99105.Google Scholar
Silverstein, M. (ed.). 1971. Whitney on Language: Selected Writings. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Silverstein, M. 1976. Shifters, linguistic categories, and cultural description. In Basso, K. H. & Selby, H. A. (eds.), Meaning in Anthropology, pp. 1156. Albuquerque, NM: University of New Mexico Press.Google Scholar
Silverstein, M. 1979. Language structure and linguistic ideology. In Clyne, P. R. et al. (eds.), The Elements: A Parasession on Linguistic Units and Levels, pp. 193247. Chicago Linguistic Society.Google Scholar
Silverstein, M. 1985. Language and the culture of gender: At the intersection of structure, usage, and ideology. In Mertz, E. & Parmentier, R. J. (eds.), Semiotic Mediation, pp. 219–59. Orlando, FL: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Silverstein, M. 2003. Indexical order and the dialectics of sociolinguistic life. Language & Communication. 23: 193229.Google Scholar
Silverstein, M. & Urban, G. (eds.). 1996. Natural Histories of Discourse. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Simon, J. 2003. Kant: Die fremde Vernunft und die Sprache der Philosophie. Berlin: de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Simon, U. G. 1993. Mittelalterliche arabische Sprachbetrachtung zwischen Grammatik und Rhetorik: ‚ilm al-ma‚ānı̄ bei as-Sakkākı̄. Heidelberger Orientverlag.Google Scholar
Sinclair, J. 1991. Corpus, Concordance, Collocation. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Sinclair, J. 2004. Trust the Text: Language, Corpus and Discourse. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Sinclair, J. & Coulthard, M. 1975. Towards an Analysis of Discourse. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Sinclair, J., Jones, S., & Daley, R., 2004. English Collocational Studies: The OSTI Report. London: Continuum.Google Scholar
Sinclair, J. McH. (ed.). 1987. Looking up: An Account of the COBUILD Project in Lexical Computing. London: Collins ELT.Google Scholar
Singh, R. 1987. Wellformedness conditions and phonological theory. In Dressler, W. (ed.), Phonologica 1984, pp. 273–86. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Sirridge, M. 1983. ‘Socrates’-hood, lexical meaning and syntax in Jordanus and Kilwardby. Cahiers de l’Institut du Moyen-Âge grec et latin 44: 102–21.Google Scholar
Skalicˇka, V. 1979.Typologische Studien. Wiesbaden: Vieweg &Teubner.Google Scholar
Skinner, B. F. 1953. Science and Human Behavior. NY: Simon & Schuster.Google Scholar
Skinner, B. F. 1957. Verbal Behavior. NY: Appleton-Century-Crofts.Google Scholar
Šklovskij, V. [1916]1969. Kunst als Verfahren. In Striedter, J. (ed.), Russischer Formalismus, pp. 335. Munich: Wilhelm Fink.Google Scholar
Skoss, S. L. 1936–41. The Hebrew–Arabic Dictionary of the Bible Known as Kitāb Jāmi‘ al-Alfāz (Agron) of David ben Abraham al-Fasi, 2 vols. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press.Google Scholar
Skutnabb-Kangas, T. 2000. Linguistic Genocide in Education, or Worldwide Diversity and Human Rights? Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.Google Scholar
Skutnabb-Kangas, T. & Phillipson, R. (eds.) 1994. Linguistic Human Rights: Overcoming Linguistic Discrimination. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Slaughter, M. M. 1982. Universal Languages and Scientific Taxonomy in the Seventeenth Century. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Sledd, J. 1955. Review of An Outline of English Structure by George L. Trager and Henry Lee Smith, Jr., and The Structure of English by Charles Carpenter Fries. Language 31: 312–45.Google Scholar
Slobin, D. I. (ed.) 1985/1997. 1985. The Cross-linguistic Study of Language Acquisition, vols. i and ii. 1997: vols. iv and v. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.Google Scholar
Smaragdus. [9th c.]1986. Liber in partibus Donati. Löfstedt, B. et al. (eds.) (Corpus Christianorum, Continuatio Mediaevalis 68). Turnhout: Brepols.Google Scholar
Smiglecius, M. [1618]1634. Logica. Oxford: s.n.Google Scholar
Smith, A. [1759]1983. Considerations concerning the First Formation of Languages. In Bryce, J. C. (ed.), Lectures on Rhetoric and Belles Lettres. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Smith, C. S. 2003. Modes of Discourse: The Local Structure of Texts. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Smith, M. E. 1926. An investigation of the development of the sentence and the extent of vocabulary in young children. PhD dissertation. University of Iowa.Google Scholar
Smith, O. 1984. The Politics of Language 1791–1819. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Soares, C. & Grosjean, F. 1984. Bilinguals in a monolingual and a bilingual mode: The effect on lexical access. Memory & Cognition 12: 380–6.Google Scholar
Sommerfelt, A. 1937/1971. Points de vue diachronique, synchronique et panchronique en linguistique générale. Norsk Tidsskrift for Sprogvidenskap 9. 1971: repr. in Sommerfelt 1971, pp. 5965.Google Scholar
Sommerfelt, A. 1962/1971. Diachronic and Synchronic Aspects of Language: Selected Articles, 1st/2nd edns. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Sommerstein, A. H. 1974. On phonotactically motivated rules. Jrnl. of Linguistics 10: 7194.Google Scholar
Sommerstein, A. H. 1977. Modern Phonology. Baltimore, MD: University Park Press.Google Scholar
Sondhi, M. M. & Schroeter, J. 1987. A hybrid time-frequency domain articulatory speech synthesizer. IEEE Transactions on Acoustics, Speech and Signal Processing, ASSP-35, 7: 955–67.Google Scholar
Sorabji, R. (ed.). 1997. Aristotle and After. London: Institute of Classical Studies.Google Scholar
Sørensen, H. C. 1949. Aspect et temps en slave. Aarhus: Universitetsforlaget.Google Scholar
Spada, N. 1997. Form-focussed instruction and second language acquisition: A review of classroom and laboratory research. Language Teaching 30: 7387.Google Scholar
Specht, F. 1948. Die ‘indogermanische’ Sprachwissenschaft von den Junggrammatikern bis zum 1. Weltkrieg. Lexis 1: 229–63.Google Scholar
Sperber, D. & Wilson, D. 1986/1995. Relevance: Communication and Cognition. Oxford: Blackwell. 1995: 2nd edn. Oxford: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar
Spielvogel, J. J. & Redles, D. 1986. Hitler’s racial ideology: Content and occult sources. Simon Wiesenthal Center Annual 3: 227–46.Google Scholar
Spitulnik, D. 1996. The social circulation of media discourse and the mediation of communities. Jrnl. of Linguistic Anthropology 6: 161–87.Google Scholar
Spitzer, L. [1928]1961. Stilstudien, 2 vols., 2nd edn. Darmstadt: Wissenschaftliche Buchgesellschaft.Google Scholar
Spolsky, B. 1989. Conditions for Second Language Learning. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Spolsky, B. 2009. Language Management. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Staal, F. 1982. Ritual, grammar, and the origins of science in India. Jrnl. of Indian Philosophy 10: 335.Google Scholar
Stammerjohann, H. (ed.). 2009. Lexicon Grammaticorum: A Bio-Bibliographical Companion to the History of Linguistics, 2nd edn. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer.Google Scholar
Stampe, D. 1972/1979. How I Spent my Summer Vacation (A Dissertation on Natural Phonology). University of Chicago. 1979: repr. NY: Garland Press.Google Scholar
Stanley, R. 1967. Redundacy rules in phonology. Language 43: 393436.Google Scholar
Starobinski, J. 1971. Les Mots sous les mots: les anagrammes de Saussure. Paris: Gallimard.Google Scholar
Starosta, S. 1988. The Case for Lexicase: An Outline of Lexicase Grammatical Theory. London: Pinter.Google Scholar
Starostin, G. S. 2002. On the genetic affiliation of the Elamite language. Mother Tongue 7: 147–70.Google Scholar
Stassen, L. 1985. Comparison and Universal Grammar. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.Google Scholar
Stauder, A. 2013a. Linguistic Dating of Middle Egyptian Literary Texts (Lingua Aegyptia Studia Monographica 12). Hamburg: Widmaier Verlag.Google Scholar
Stauder, A. 2013b. L’émulation du passé à l’ère thoutmoside: la dimension linguistique. In Bickel, S. (ed.), Vergangenheit und Zukunft: Studium zum historischen Bewusstsein in der Thutmosidenzeit, pp. 77–125. Basel: Schwabe.Google Scholar
Staum, M. S. 1980. The class of moral and political sciences 17951808. French Historical Studies 11: 371–97.Google Scholar
Steedman, M. 1996. Surface Structure and Interpretation. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Steinkeller, P. 2005. The priestess égi-zi and related matters. In Sefati, Y. et al. (eds.), “An Experienced Scribe Who Neglects Nothing”: Ancient Near Eastern Studies in Honor of Jacob Klein, pp. 301–10. Bethesda, MD: CDL Press.Google Scholar
Steinthal, H. 1850/1976. Die Classification der Sprachen dargestellt als die Entwicklung der Sprachidee. Berlin: F. Dümmler. 1976: repr. Hildesheim: George Olms.Google Scholar
Steinthal, H. 1855/1968. Grammatik, Logik und Psychologie, ihre Prinzipien und ihr Verhältnis zueinander. Berlin: F. Dümmler. 1968: repr. Hildesheim: George Olms.Google Scholar
Steinthal, H. 1881/1972. Abriß der Sprachwissenschaft, vol. 1: Einleitung in die Psychologie und Sprachwissenschaft, 2nd edn. Berlin: F. Dümmler. 1972: repr. Hildesheim/NY: George Olms.Google Scholar
Steinthal, H. 1890–1. Geschichte der Sprachwissenschaft bei den Griechen und Römern mit besonderer Rücksicht auf die Logik, 2 vols. Berlin: F. Dümmler.Google Scholar
Stern, C. & Stern, W. 1907. Die Kindersprache: Eine psychologische und sprachtheoretische Untersuchung. Leipzig: Barth.Google Scholar
Stern, D. 1977. The First Relationship. Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Stern, H. H. 1983. Fundamental Concepts of Language Teaching. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Stern, H. & Weinrib, A. 1977. Foreign languages for younger children: Trends and assessment. Language Teaching & Linguistic Abstracts 10: 525Google Scholar
Stern, S. G. 1844. Maḥberet he-’Aruk. Pressburg: Ant˙on ‘Adelen Fon Shmid.Google Scholar
Stetson, R. H. 1928/1988. Motor phonetics. Archives Néerlandaises de Phonétique Expérimentale 3: 1–216. 1988: J. A. S. Kelso & K.G. Munhall (eds.), R. H. Stetson’s Motor Phonetics: A Retrospective Edition, 3rd edn. Boston, MA: College-Hill Press.Google Scholar
Stevens, K. N. 1989. On the quantal nature of speech. Jrnl. of Phonetics 17: 346.Google Scholar
Stevens, K. N. 1996. Critique: Articulatory-acoustic relations and their role in speech perception. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 99: 1693–4.Google Scholar
Stevens, K. N. & Blumstein, S. E. 1978. Invariant cues for place of articulation in stop consonants. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 64: 1358–68.Google Scholar
Stevens, K. N., Kasowski, S., & Fant, C. G. M. 1953. An electrical analog of the vocal tract. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 25: 734–42.Google Scholar
Stevick, E. 1980. Teaching Languages: A Way and Ways. Rowley, MA: Newbury House.Google Scholar
Steward, J. H. 1973. Alfred Kroeber. NY: Columbia University Press.Google Scholar
Stewart, D. 1810. Philosophical Essays. Edinburgh: s.n.Google Scholar
Stewart, D. 1811–12. Account of the Life of Adam Smith. In The Works of Adam Smith, L.L.D., vol. v. London: T. Cadell & W. Davies.Google Scholar
Stewart, J. M. 1967. Tongue root position in Akan vowel harmony. Phonetica 16: 185204.Google Scholar
Stich, S. P. 1983. From Folk Psychology to Cognitive Science. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Stillingfleet, E. 1697. A Discourse in Vindication of the Doctrine of the Trinity. London: Printed by J. H. for Henry Mortlock.Google Scholar
Stockwell, R. P. 1993. Obituary: Dwight L. Bolinger. Language 69: 99112.Google Scholar
Stockwell, R. P., Schachter, P., & Partee, B. H. 1973. The Major Syntactic Structures of English. NY: Holt, Rinehart & Winston.Google Scholar
Stone, M., Faber, A., Raphael, L. J., & Shawker, T. H. 1988. Cross-sectional tongue shape during vowels. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 83: 1586–96.Google Scholar
Strauss, S. 1982. Lexicalist Phonology of English and German. Dordrecht: Foris.Google Scholar
Strawson, P. F. 1950. On referring. Mind 59: 320–44.Google Scholar
Strubell, M. 2001. Catalan a decade later. In Fishman, J. A. (ed.), Can Threatened Languages be Saved? Reversing Language Shift, Revisited: A 21st Century Perspective, pp. 260–82. Clevedon: Multilingual Matters.Google Scholar
Stubbs, M. 2001. Words and Phrases: Corpus Studies of Lexical Semantics. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Sturtevant, E. H. 1940. The Pronunciation of Greek and Latin, 2nd edn. Philadelphia, PA: Linguistic Society of America.Google Scholar
Subbiondo, J. L. 1999. Linguistic theory in historical perspective: A study of J. R. Firth’s The Tongues of Men. In Embleton, S. et al. (eds.), The Emergence of the Modern Language Sciences: Studies on the Transition from Historical-Comparative to Structural Linguistics, in Honour of E. F. K. Koerner, vol. i: Historiographical Perspectives, pp. 237–45. Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Suleiman, Y. 1999. The Arabic Grammatical Tradition: A Study in ta‚lı̄l. Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar
Sussman, H. M., MacNeilage, P. F., & Hanson, R. J. 1973. Labial and mandibular dynamics during the production of bilabial consonants: Preliminary observations. Jrnl. of Speech and Hearing Research 16: 397420.Google Scholar
, ßmilch, J. P. 1766. Versuch eines Beweises, daß die erste Sprache ihren Ursprung nicht vom Menschen, sondern allein vom Schöpfer erhalten habe. Berlin: Buchladen der Realschule.Google Scholar
Swadesh, M. 1934/1958. The phonemic principle. Language 10: 117–29. 1958: repr. in Joos (ed.), pp. 32–7.Google Scholar
Swadesh, M. 1935. Twaddell on defining the phoneme. Language 11: 244–50.Google Scholar
Swadesh, M. 1955. Towards greater accuracy in lexicostatistic dating. Intl. Jrnl. of American Linguistics 21: 121–37.Google Scholar
Swain, M. 1995. Three functions of output in language learning. In Cook, G. & Seidlhofer, B. (eds.), Principle and Practice in Applied Linguistics: Studies in Honor of Henry Widdowson, pp. 125–44. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Sweet, H. 1877. A Handbook of Phonetics, Including a Popular Exposition of the Principles of Spelling Reform. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Sweet, H. 1880–1. Sound notation. Transactions of the Philological Society, 177235.Google Scholar
Sweet, H. 1890a. A Primer of Phonetics. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Sweet, H. 1890b. A Primer of Spoken English. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Sweet, P. 1978. Wilhelm von Humboldt: A Biography, 2 vols. Columbus, OH: Ohio State University Press.Google Scholar
Sweetser, E. E. 1990. From Etymology to Pragmatics: The Mind-as-Body Metaphor in Semantic Structure and Semantic Change. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Swift, J. 1726. Travels into Several Remote Nations of the World, 2 vols. London: Benjamin Motte.Google Scholar
Swiggers, P. 1982. Hugo Schuchardt: Le point de vue d’un romaniste dans la querelle autour des lois phoniques. Beiträge zur romanischen Philologie 21: 325–8.Google Scholar
Swiggers, P. 1986. La linguistique historico-comparative d’Antoine Meillet: Théorie et méthode. Cahiers Ferdinand de Saussure 39: 181–95.Google Scholar
Swiggers, P. 1987. La conception du changement linguistique chez Antoine Meillet. Folia Linguistica Historica 7: 2130.Google Scholar
Swiggers, P. 1988. Le problème du changement linguistique dans l’œuvre d’Antoine Meillet. Histoire Épistémologie Langage 10: 155–66.Google Scholar
Swiggers, P. 1989. Linguistique historique, générale et particulière chez Hugo Schuchardt. Folia Linguistica Historica 8: 219–31.Google Scholar
Swiggers, P. 1990a. Comparatismo e grammatica comparata, tipologia linguistica e forma grammaticale. In De, T. Mauro, & Formigari, L. (eds.), Leibniz, Humboldt, and the Origins of Comparativism, pp. 281–99. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Swiggers, P. 1990b. Louis Gauchat et l’idée de variation linguistique. In Liver, R., I Werlen, & P. Wunderli (eds.), Sprachtheorie und Theorie der Sprachwissenschaft: Geschichte und Perspektiven: Festschrift für Rudolf Engler zum 60. Geburtstag, pp. 284–98. Tübingen: Gunter Narr.Google Scholar
Swiggers, P. 1999. Ferdinand de Saussure et la perspective sociale sur la langue. Neuphilologische Mitteilungen 100: 433–43.Google Scholar
Swiggers, P. & Desmet, P. 1996. L’élaboration de la linguistique comparative: Comparaison et typologie des langues jusqu’au début du XIXe siècle. In Schmitter, P. (ed.), Geschichte der Sprachtheorie, vol. v: Sprachtheorien der Neuzeit II: Von der Grammaire de Port-Royal (1660) zur Konstitution moderner linguistischer Disziplinen, pp. 122–77. Tübingen: Gunter Narr.Google Scholar
Swiggers, P. & Desmet, P. 2000. Histoire et épistémologie du comparatisme linguistique. In Jucquois, G. & Vielle, C. (eds.), Le Comparatisme dans les sciences de l’homme. Approches pluridisciplinaires, pp. 157208. Brussels: De Boeck Université.Google Scholar
Swiggers, P., Maes, F., & Van Hoecke, W. 1990. Changement de sens et sens du changement: Michel Bréal et la sémantique diachronique. In Swiggers, P. (ed.), Moments et mouvements dans l’histoire de la linguistique (Cahiers de l’Institut de Linguistique de Louvain 16.1), pp. 6177. Louvain-la-Neuve: Peeters.Google Scholar
Taittirı̄ya-Brāhmaṇa. [c. 1000–700 bce]1855–70. R. Mitra (ed.). 3 vols. Calcutta: Asiatic Society.Google Scholar
Taittirı̄ya-Prātis΄ākhya. [c. fifth c. bce]1868. w. comm. Tribhāṣyaratna. 1868: W. D. Whitney (ed./trans.), Journal of the American Oriental Society 9: 1–469. Ann Arbor, MI: University of Michigan, American Oriental Society.Google Scholar
Taittirı̄ya-Saṃhitā. [c.1500–1000 bce]1871–2. Weber, A. (ed.), 2 vols. Indische Studien xi and xii. Leipzig: Verlag Brockhaus.Google Scholar
Taittirı̄ya-Upaniṣad. [c. 700–500 bce]1958. Limaye, V. P. & Wadekar, R. D. (eds.), Aṣṭādas΄a-Upaniṣadaḥ [Eighteen Upaniṣads]. Pune: Vaidika Saṃs΄odhana Maṇḍala.Google Scholar
Talageri, S. G. 1993. Aryan Invasion Theory and Indian Nationalism. New Delhi: Voice of India.Google Scholar
Talmage, F. 1990. Perushim le-sefer Mishle le-vet Kimhi. Jerusalem: Magnes Press.Google Scholar
Talmon, R. 1997. Kitāb al-‚ayn and its Attribution to H̄alı̄l b. Ahmad. Leiden: E. J. Brill.Google Scholar
Talmon, R. 2003. Eighth-century Iraqi Grammar: A Critical Exploration of Pre-H̄alı̄lian Arabic Linguistics. Winona Lake, IN: Eisenbrauns.Google Scholar
Talmon, R. 2008. Jacob of Edessa the grammarian. In Haar Romeny, B. ter (ed.), Jacob of Edessa and the Syriac Culture of his Day, pp. 159–87. Leiden: E. J. Brill.Google Scholar
Talmy, L. 1988. Force dynamics in language and cognition. Cognitive Science 12: 49100.Google Scholar
Talmy, L. 2000. Toward a Cognitive Semantics, vols. i–ii. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Tannen, D. 1981. New York Jewish conversational style. Intl. Jrnl. of the Sociology of Language. 30: 131–49.Google Scholar
Tannen, D. 1984a. Conversational Style: Analyzing Talk among Friends. Norwood, NJ: Ablex.Google Scholar
Tannen, D. 1984b. Introduction. In Tannen, D. (ed.), Spoken and Written Language: Exploring Orality and Literacy, pp. xiii–xvii. Norwood, NJ: Ablex.Google Scholar
Tannen, D. 1986a. Introducing constructed dialogue in Greek and American conversational and literary narrative. In Coulmas, F. (ed.), Direct and Indirect Speech, pp. 311–32. NY: Mouton.Google Scholar
Tannen, D. 1986b. That’s Not What I Meant: How Conversational Style Makes or Breaks Relationships. NY: William Morrow & Co.Google Scholar
Tannen, D. 1987. Repetition in conversation: Toward a poetics of talk. Language 63: 574605.Google Scholar
Tannen, D. 1989. Talking Voices: Repetition, Dialogue, and Imagery in Conversational Discourse. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Tannen, D. 1990. You Just Don’t Understand: Women and Men in Conversation. NY: William Morrow & Co.Google Scholar
Tannen, D. 1992. Interactional sociolinguistics. In Bright, (ed.), pp. 911.Google Scholar
Tannen, D. 1993a. Introduction. In Tannen, D. (ed.), Framing in Discourse, pp. 313. NY: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Tannen, D. (ed.). 1993b. Gender and Conversational Interaction. NY: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Tannen, D. 1994. Gender and Discourse. NY: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Tannen, D. 1998. The Argument Culture: Stopping America’s War of Words. NY: Ballantine Books.Google Scholar
Tarone, E. 1983. On the variability of interlanguage systems. Applied Linguistics 4: 142–64.Google Scholar
Tarp, S. 2010. Reflections on the academic status of lexicography. Lexikos 20: 450–65.Google Scholar
Tarp, S. 2011. Pedagogical lexicography: Towards a new and strict typology corresponding to the present state-of-the-art. Lexikos 21: 217–31.Google Scholar
Tarski, A. 1935/1983. Der Warheitsbegriff in den formalisierten Sprachen. Studia Philosophica 1: 261405. 1983: The concept of truth in formalized languages. In Tarski 1983, pp. 152–277.Google Scholar
Tarski, A. [1956]1983. Logic, Semantics, Metamathematics, 2nd edn. Indianapolis, IN: Hackett.Google Scholar
Tatewine. [c. 730]1948. Ars Tatuini. In M. de Marco (ed.), Tatuini opera omnia (Corpus Christianorum Series Latina 133), pp. 393. Turnhout: Brepols.Google Scholar
Taylor, D. J. 1978. “Ordo” in Book x of Varro’s De lingua Latina. In Collart, J. (ed.), Varron, grammaire antique et stylistique latine, pp. 7174. Paris: Les Belles Lettres.Google Scholar
Taylor, D. J. (ed.). 1987. The History of Linguistics in the Classical Period. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Taylor, D. J. (ed.). 1996. De Lingua Latina X: A New Critical Edition and English Translation with Prolegomena and Commentary. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Taylor, J. R. 1998. Syntactic constructions as prototype categories. In Tomasello, (ed.), pp. 177202.Google Scholar
Taylor, T. J. 1988. Alan Gardiner’s The Theory of Speech and Language: Empiricist pragmatics. In Harris, (ed.), pp. 132–47.Google Scholar
Téné, D. 2006. Sefer ha-Hassagah, hu’ Kitāb al-Mustalḥaq lĕ-Rabı̄ Yonah Ibn Ğanāḥ bĕ-tirgumo ha-ib̄ri šel ‘Obadyah ha-Sefardı̄. Jerusalem: ha-Aḳademyah la-lashon ha-‘Ivrit.Google Scholar
Tesnière, L. 1959. Éléments de syntaxe structurale. Paris: Librairie Klincksieck.Google Scholar
Testenoire, P.-Y. 2013. Ferdinand de Saussure: La recherche des anagrammes. Limoges: Lambert-Lucas.Google Scholar
Thibault, P. 1986. Text, Discourse and Content: A Social Semiotic Perspective (Toronto Semiotic Circle Monographs 3). Toronto.Google Scholar
Thibault, P. 1991. Social Semiotics as Praxis. Minneapolis, MIN: University of Minnesota Press.Google Scholar
Thibault, P. 1997. Re-reading Saussure. NY: Routledge.Google Scholar
Thieme, P. 1985. The first verse of the Triṣaptı̄yam (AV, Ś.1.1 = AV, P. 1.6) and the beginnings of Sanskrit linguistics. Jrnl. of the American Oriental Society 105: 559–65.Google Scholar
Thilo, U. 1989. Rezeption und Wirkung des Cours de linguistique générale. Tübingen: Gunter Narr.Google Scholar
Thissen, H.-J. 2001. Des Niloten Horapollon Hieroglyphenbuch,vol. i: Text und Übersetzung. Munich: K. G. Saur.Google Scholar
Thomas, A. 1897. La sémantique et les lois intellectuelles du langage. In Thomas, A. (ed.), Essais de philologie française, pp. 166–93. Paris: Bouillon.Google Scholar
Thomas, M. 2004. Universal Grammar in Second Language Acquisition: A History. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Thomas, M. 2005. Theories of second language acquisition: Three sides, three angles, three points. Second Language Research 21: 393414.Google Scholar
Thomas, R. 2000. Herodotus in Context: Ethnography, Science and the Art of Persuasion. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Thomason, S. G. & Kaufman, T. 1988. Language Contact, Creolization, and Genetic Linguistics. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Thompson, S. 1992/2003. Functional grammar. In Bright, (ed.), pp. 3740. 2003: repr. in W. Frawley (ed.), International Encyclopedia of Linguistics, 2nd edn. NY: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Thomsen, V. 1902. Sprogvidenskabens historie: en kortfattet fremstilling. Copenhagen: Forlagt af universitetsboghandler G. E. C. Gad.Google Scholar
Thomsen, V. 1927. Geschichte der Sprachwissenschaft bis zum Ausgang des 19. Jahrhunderts. Halle: Max Niemeyer.Google Scholar
Threadgold, T. 1986. Semiotics, Ideology, Language. Sydney Association for Studies in Society and Culture.Google Scholar
Throop, P. (trans.) 2008. Aelfric’s Grammar and Glossary. Charlotte, VT: Medieval MS.Google Scholar
Thurot, C. [1869]1964. Extraits de divers manuscrits latins pour servir à l’histoire des doctrines grammaticales au Moyen Âge. Frankfurt am Main: Minerva Verlag.Google Scholar
Thurot, J.-F. 1830–3. De l’entendement et de la raison: Introduction à l’étude de la philosophie. Paris: Aimé André.Google Scholar
Thurot, J.-F. 1837. Œuvres posthumes de M. Fr. Thurot, membre de l’Institut, professeur au collège royal de France: Leçons de grammaire et de logique. Vie de Reid. Paris: Hachette.Google Scholar
Tiede, M. K. 1996. An MRI-based study of pharyngeal volume contrasts in Akan and English. Jrnl. of Phonetics 24: 399421.Google Scholar
Timpanaro, S. 1977. Friedrich Schlegel and the development of comparative linguistics in the 19th century. Intro. to Koerner, E. F. K. (ed.), Schlegel, Friedrich von, Ueber die Sprache und Weisheit Indier: Ein Beitrag zur Begründung der Alterthumskunde. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Togeby, K. 1951/1965. Structure immanente de la langue française. 1st edn. Copenhagen: Nordisk Sprog-og Kulturforlag. 1965: 2nd edn. Paris: Larousse.Google Scholar
Tognini-Bonelli, E. 2001. Corpus Linguistics at Work. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Tolkāppiya. [c. 200 ce]1999. Tolkāppiyam, w. a short comm. in English by P. S. S. Sastri, 2nd edn. Chennai: Kuppuswami Sastri Research Institute.Google Scholar
Tollefson, J. W. 2002. Language Policies in Education: Critical Issues. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.Google Scholar
Tolman, E. C. 1948. Cognitive maps in rats and men. Psychological Review 55: 189208.Google Scholar
Tomasello, M. 1998a. Introduction: The cognitive-functional perspective on language structure. In Tomasello, (ed.), pp. vii–xxiii.Google Scholar
Tomasello, M. (ed.). 1998b. The New Psychology of Language-Cognitive and Functional Approaches to Language Structure. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.Google Scholar
Tomasello, M. 2003. Constructing a Language: A Usage-based Theory of Language Acquisition. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Townsend, D. J. & Bever, T. G. 2001. Sentence Comprehension: The Integration of Habits and Rules. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Trabant, J. 1981. “… und die Seele leuchtet aus dem Style hervor”. Zur Stiltheorie im 19. Jahrhundert: Heymann Steinthal. In Coseriu, E. (ed.), Logos semantikos, vol. i, pp. 245–58. Madrid: Gredos.Google Scholar
Trabant, J. 1983. Ideelle Bezeichnung: Steinthals Humboldt-Kritik. In Eschbach, A. & Trabant, J. (eds.), History of Semiotics, pp. 251–76. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Trabant, J. 1985. Humboldt zum Ursprung der Sprache. Ein Nachtrag zum Problem des Sprachursprungs in der Geschichte der Akademie. Zeitschrift für Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft und Kommunikationsforschung 38: 576–89.Google Scholar
Trabant, J. 1986. Apeliotes oder Der Sinn der Sprache: Wilhelm von Humboldts Sprach-Bild. Munich: Wilhelm Fink.Google Scholar
Trabant, J. 1990. Traditionen Humboldts. Frankfurt am Main: Suhrkamp Verlag.Google Scholar
Trabant, J. 1998. Verspätete Bemerkungen über den unendlichen Gebrauch von endlichen Mitteln (UGVEM). In Weydt, H. et al. (eds.), Particulae particularum, pp. 333–47. Tübingen: Stauffenburg Verlag.Google Scholar
Trabant, J. 2003. Mithridates im Paradies: Kleine Geschichte des Sprachdenkens. Munich: C. H. Beck.Google Scholar
Trabant, J. 2005. Ansichten der Sprache: Alexander von Humboldt und die amerikanischen Sprachen. In D’Aprile, I. et al. (eds.), Tableau de Berlin, pp. 157–82. Hanover-Laatzen: Wehrhahn Verlag.Google Scholar
Trager, G. L. 1946/1999. Changes of emphasis in linguistics: A comment. Studies in Philology 43: 461–64. 1999: repr. in Fought (ed.), vol. i, pp. 51–3.Google Scholar
Trager, G. L. 1958. Paralanguage: A first approximation. Studies in Linguistics 13: 112.Google Scholar
Trager, G. L. & Bloch, B. 1941. The syllabic phonemes of English. Language 17: 223–46.Google Scholar
Trager, G. L. & Smith, H. L., Jr. 1951/1957. An Outline of English Structure. Norman, OK: Battenburg Press. 1957: repr. in Studies in Linguistics: Occasional Papers 3. Washington, DC: American Council of Learned Societies.Google Scholar
Traugott, E. C. 2008. The state of English language studies: A linguistic perspective. In Thormaehlen, M. (ed.), English Now: Papers from the 20th IAUPE Conference in Lund, pp. 199225. Centre for Languages and Literature, Lund University.Google Scholar
Traugott, E. C. & Dasher, R. B. 2002. Regularity in Semantic Change. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Traugott, E. C. & Heine, B. (eds.). 1991. Approaches to Grammaticalization, vols. i–ii. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Trautmann, T. R. 2006. Languages and Nations: The Dravidian Proof in Colonial Madras. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Trávnícˇek, F. 1962. O tak zvaném aktuálním cˇlenění větném [‘On the so-called functional sentence perspective’]. Slovo a Slovesnost 22: 163–71.Google Scholar
Trentman, J. 1970. Ockham on Mental. Mind 79: 586–90.Google Scholar
Trier, J. 1931. Der deutsche Wortschatz im Sinnbezirk des Verstandes: Von den Anfängen bis zum Beginn des 13. Jahrhunderts. Heidelberg: Winter.Google Scholar
Trier, J. 1934. Sprachliche Felder. Zeitschrift für deutsche Bildung 8: 417–27.Google Scholar
Trim, J. L. M. 2002. J. L. M. Trim. In Brown, & Law, (eds.), pp. 274–85.Google Scholar
Trubetzkoy, N. 1939/1949/1969. Grundzüge der Phonologie. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht. 1949: Principes de phonologie. Paris: Librairie Klincksieck. 1969: C. Baltaxe (trans.), Principles of Phonology. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Trudgill, P. 1974. The Social Differentiation of English in Norwich. London: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Tsuzaki, S. M. 1971. Coexistent systems in language variation. In Hymes, (ed.), pp. 327–39.Google Scholar
Turgot, A.-R.-J. [1805]1971. Remarques critiques sur les réflexions de Maupertuis. In Grimsley, R. (ed.), Maupertuis, Turgot, Maine de Biran. Sur l’origine du langage. Geneva: Librairie Droz.Google Scholar
Turner, M. 1987. Death is the Mother of Beauty: Mind, Metaphor, Criticism. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Turner, M. 1996. The Literary Mind: The Origins of Thought and Language. NY: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Twaddell, W. F. 1935/1958. On defining the phoneme. Language Monograph 16. 1958: repr. in Joos (ed.), pp. 55–79.Google Scholar
Tylor, E. B. 1895. Anthropology: An Introduction to the Study of Man and Civilization. London: Macmillan.Google Scholar
Tynjanov, J. 1927/1969. Über die literarische Evolution. In Striedter, J. (ed.), Russischer Formalismus, pp. 433–61. Munich: Wilhelm Fink.Google Scholar
Tzoref-Ashkenazi, C. 2007. The status of Hebrew in Schlegel’s Über die Sprache und Weisheit der Indier. German Life and Letters 60: 165–79.Google Scholar
Uhlfelder, M. & Potter, J. (eds./trans.) 1976. John the Scot. Periphyseon: On the Division of Nature. Indianapolis, IN: Bobbs-Merrill.Google Scholar
Uljas, S. 2013. Linguistic consciousness. In Stauder-Porchet, J. et al. (eds.), UCLA Encyclopedia of Egyptology, pp. 111. Los Angeles, CA.Google Scholar
Ullmann, S. 1951/1957. The Principles of Semantics, 1st edn. Glasgow: Jackson. 1957: 2nd edn. Oxford: Blackwell & Mott.Google Scholar
Ullmann, S. 1962. Semantics: An Introduction to the Science of Meaning. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Ullmann, S. 1952/1975. Précis de sémantique française. 1975: 5th edn. Berne: A. Francke.Google Scholar
Underhill, T. 2013. John Byrom and shorthand in early eighteenth-century Cambridge. Transactions of the Cambridge Bibliographical Society 15: 229–77.Google Scholar
Urban, G. 1991. A Discourse-Centered Approach to Culture: Native South American Myths and Rituals. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press.Google Scholar
Urla, J. 1995. Outlaw language: Creating alternative public spheres in Basque Free Radio. Pragmatics 5: 245–61.Google Scholar
Urquhart, T. [1652]1983. Sir Thomas Urquhart of Cromarty: The Jewel. R. D. S. Jack & R. J. Lyall. (intro. & comm.). Edinburgh: Scottish Academic Press.Google Scholar
Vachek, J. (ed.). 1964. A Prague School Reader in Linguistics. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press.Google Scholar
Vachek, J. 1966. The Linguistic School of Prague: An Introduction to its Theory and Practice. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press.Google Scholar
Vachek, J. (ed.) 1983. Praguiana: Some Basic and Less Known Aspects of the Prague Linguistic School. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Vaid, J. & Frenck-Mestre, C. 2002. Do orthographic cues aid language recognition? A laterality study with French-English bilinguals. Brain & Language 82: 4753.Google Scholar
Vākyapadı̄ya. See Bhartr̥hari 1977.Google Scholar
van Benthem, J. 1986. Essays in Logical Semantics. Dordrecht: D. Reidel.Google Scholar
van den Berg, J. 1958. Myoelastic-aerodynamic theory of voice production. Jrnl. of Speech and Hearing Research 1: 227–44.Google Scholar
van den Eynde, K. 1998. From verbal to nominal valency: Some methodological reflections. In van Durme, K. & Schøsler, L. (eds.), Studies in Valency IV. Valency and Verb Typology, pp. 147–67. Odense University Press.Google Scholar
van den Eynde, K. & Mertens, P. 2003. La valence: L’approche pronominale et son application au lexique verbal. Jrnl. of French Language Studies 13: 63104.Google Scholar
van Dijk, J. J. A. 1976. Cuneiform Texts of Varying Content (Texts in the Iraq Museum 9). Leiden: E. J. Brill.Google Scholar
van Dijk, T. 1977. Text and Context: Explorations in the Semantics and Pragmatics of Discourse. London: Longman.Google Scholar
van Dijk, T. 1984. Prejudice in Discourse: An Analysis of Ethnic Prejudice in Cognition and Conversation. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
van Dijk, T. (ed.). 1985. Handbook of Discourse Analysis. London: Academic Press.Google Scholar
van Dijk, T. 1987. Communicating Racism: Ethnic Prejudice in Thought and Talk. Newbury Park, CA: Sage.Google Scholar
van Dijk, T. 1991. Racism and the Press. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
van Dijk, T. 1993. Principles of Critical Discourse Analysis. Discourse and Society 4: 249–83.Google Scholar
van Dijk, T. 2001. Multidisciplinary CDA: A plea for diversity. In Wodak, R. & Meyer, M. (eds.), Methods of Discourse Analysis, pp. 95120. London: Sage.Google Scholar
van Dijk, T. 2005. Discourse and Racism in Spain and Latin America. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
van Dijk, T. (ed.). 2007. Discourse Studies, 5 vols. London: Sage.Google Scholar
van Dijk, T. & Kintsch, W. 1983. Strategies of Discourse Comprehension. NY: Academic Press.Google Scholar
van Els, T., Bongaerts, T., Extra, G., & van Os, C. 1984. Applied Linguistics and the Learning and Teaching of Foreign Languages. London: Edward Arnold.Google Scholar
van Geert, P. 1998. A dynamic systems model of basic developmental mechanisms: Piaget, Vygotsky, and beyond. Psychological Review 105: 634–77.Google Scholar
van Oostendorp, M. 2004. Een wereldtaal: De geschiedenis van het Esperanto. Amsterdam: Athenaeum Polak & van Gennep.Google Scholar
van Ophuijsen, J. M. 1987. Hephaestion on Metre. Leiden: E. J. Brill.Google Scholar
VanPatten, B. & Williams, J. (eds.). 2015. Theories in Second Language Acquisition: An Introduction. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
van Riemsdijk, H. 1998. Glow 1978–1998. Glot Intl. 3: 1819.Google Scholar
Van Valin, R. D., Jr. (ed.). 1993. Advances in Role and Reference Grammar. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Van Valin, R. D., Jr. 2001. An Introduction to Syntax. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Van Valin, R. D., Jr. 2005. Exploring the Syntax-Semantics Interface. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Van Valin, R. D., Jr. & LaPolla, R. 1997. Syntax: Structure, Meaning, and Function. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Varo, F. 1703/2000. Arte de la lengua mandarina. Canton. 2000: S. Coblin & J. Levi (trans.), Grammar of the Mandarin Language (1703). Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Varro, M. T. [early 2nd c. bce]1977–9. De lingua latina. T. Kent (trans.) (Loeb Classical Library), 2 vols. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Veṅkat˙a-Mādhava [19th c.]1970 Mahārāṣṭra-Prayoga-Candrikā. Arjunwadkar, K. S. (ed.). Pune: Des΄amukha.Google Scholar
Vennemann, T. 1971. Natural generative phonology. Paper presented at the winter meeting of the Linguistic Society of America (St. Louis, MO).Google Scholar
Vennemann, T. 1972a. Analogy in generative grammar, the origin of word order. In Heilmann, L. (ed.), Proceedings of the Eleventh International Congress of Linguistics, vol. ii, pp. 7983. Bologna: Il Mulino.Google Scholar
Vennemann, T. 1972b. Phonetic analogy and conceptual analogy. In Vennemann, T. & Wilbur, T. H. (eds.), Schuchardt, the Neogrammarians and the Transformational Theory of Phonological Change, pp. 181204. Frankfurt am Main: Athenäum Verlag.Google Scholar
Vennemann, T. 1974a. Phonological concreteness in natural generative grammar. In Shuy, R. & Bailey, C. J. (eds.), Toward Tomorrow’s Linguistics, pp. 202–19. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press.Google Scholar
Vennemann, T. 1974b. Topics, subjects and word order: From SXV to SVX via TVX. In Anderson, J. M. & Jones, C. (eds.), Historical Linguistics I: Syntax, Morphology, pp. 339–76. Amsterdam: North-Holland.Google Scholar
Vennemann, T. (ed.). 1989. The New Sound of Indo-European: Essays in Phonological Reconstruction. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Venturini, I. 2007. Le statut des exercices scolaires au Nouvel Empire: Balbutiements d’écoliers ou entraînements d’étudiants? In Goyon, J.-C. & Cardin, C. (eds.), Proceedings of the Ninth International Congress of Egyptologists, Grenoble, 6–12 September 2004 (Orientalia Lovanensia Analecta 150), vol. ii, pp. 1885–96. Leuven: Peeters.Google Scholar
Verhoeven, L. 1992. Assessment of bilingual proficiency. In Verhoeven, L. & De Jong, J. H. A. L. (eds.), The Construct of Language Proficiency, pp. 125–36. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Verleyen, S. 2005. Fonction, forme et variation: Analyse métathéorique de trois modèles du changement phonique au XXe siècle (1929–1982). PhD dissertation, Katholieke Universiteit Leuven.Google Scholar
Verner, K. 1877. Eine Ausnahme der ersten Lautverschiebung. Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung 23: 97130.Google Scholar
Vernus, P. 1978. Littérature et autobiographie: Les inscriptions de sA-mwt surnommé kyky. Revue d’Égyptologie 30: 115–46.Google Scholar
Vernus, P. 1990. Les “Espaces de l’écrit” dans l’Égypte pharaonique. Bulletin de la Société Française d’Égyptologie 119: 3556.Google Scholar
Vernus, P. 1996. Langue littéraire et diglossie. In Loprieno, A. (ed.), Ancient Egyptian Literature: History and Forms (Probleme der Ägyptologie 10), pp. 555–64. Leiden: E. J. Brill.Google Scholar
Vernus, P. 2016. Traditional Egyptian I (Dynamics). In Stauder-Porchet, J. et al. (eds.), UCLA Encyclopedia of Egyptology (online pub.: https://escholarship.org/uc/item/0bg342rh)Google Scholar
Verschueren, J. 1999. Understanding Pragmatics. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Versteegh, C. H. M. (=K.) 1980. The stoic verbal system. Hermes 108: 338–57.Google Scholar
Versteegh, C. H. M. (=K.) 2013. A perfect mess: The distinction of tense and aspect in grammatical traditions. In Conti, S. E. & Farina, M. (eds.), Comparing Ancient Grammars: The Greek, Syriac and Arabic Traditions, pp. 2764. Pisa: Edizioni della Normale.Google Scholar
Versteegh, K. 1984. Latinitas, Hellenismos, ‘Arabiyya. Historiographia Linguistica 13: 425–48.Google Scholar
Versteegh, K. 1993. Arabic Grammar and Qur’ānic Exegesis in Early Islam. Leiden: E. J. Brill.Google Scholar
Versteegh, K. 1994. The notion of underlying levels in the Arabic grammatical tradition. Historiographia Linguistica 21: 271–96.Google Scholar
Versteegh, K. 1995. The Explanation of Linguistic Causes: Az-Zag˘g˘āg˘ı̄’s Theory of Grammar. Introduction, Translation, Commentary. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Versteegh, K. 1997. The Arabic Linguistic Tradition. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Versteegh, K. 2000. Grammar and logic in the Arabic grammatical tradition. In Auroux, et al. (eds.), pp. 300–6.Google Scholar
Verstraete, J.-C. 2000. Review of Simon Dik (1997): The Theory of Functional Grammar. Part 1: The Structure of the Clause & Part 2: Complex and Derived Constructions. Language 76: 210–12.Google Scholar
Vico, G. 1744. Cinque libri di Giambattista Vico de’ Principj d’una Scienza Nuova d’intorno alla comune natura delle nazioni. Naples: Felice Mosca.Google Scholar
Vidro, N. 2011. Verbal Morphology in the Karaite Treatise on Hebrew Grammar Kitāb al-‘Uqūd fı̄ tasạ̄rı̄f al-lugġa al-‘Ibrāniyya. Leiden and Boston: Brill.Google Scholar
Viëtor, W. 1886/1984. Der Sprachunterricht muss umkehren! Ein Beitrag zur Überbürdungsfrage (pub. under pseudonym ‘Quousque Tandem’). Heilbronn: Henninger. 1984: A. P. R. Howatt & D. Abercrombie (trans.), ‘Language teaching must start afresh!’ in Howatt 1984: 340–63.Google Scholar
Villers, J. 1997. Kant und das Problem der Sprache: Die historischen und systematischen Gründe für die Sprachlosigkeit der Transzendentalphilosophie. Konstanz: Verlag am Hockgraben.Google Scholar
Vincent, N. 1980. Iconic and symbolic aspects of syntax: Prospects for reconstruction. In Ramat, P. (ed.), Linguistic Reconstruction and Indo-European Syntax, pp. 4768. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Vinke, D. 1996. De haalbaarheid van engelstalig onderwijs in Nederland. Toegepaste Taalwetenschap in Artikelen 54: 7182.Google Scholar
Virgilius Maro Grammaticus. [c. 650]1979. Virgilio Marone Grammatico, Epitomi ed Epistole. L. Caruso & G. Polara (trans.), Polara, G. (ed.). Naples: Liguori Editore.Google Scholar
Vivekananda, S. [1897]/1922. The future of India. In The Complete Works of Swami Vivekananda, vol. iii: Lectures from Colombo to Almora. Calcutta: Advaita Ashrama.Google Scholar
Volney, F. C. de V. 1819. L’Alphabet européen appliqué aux langues asiatiques. Paris: Firmin Didot.Google Scholar
Voloshinov, V. [1929]1973. Marxism and the Philosophy of Language. L. Matejka & I. R. Titunik (trans.). Cambridge, MA.: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Voltaire. [1738]1992. Éléments de la philosophie de Newton. In Walters, R. L. & Barber, W. H. (eds.), Les Oeuvres complètes de Voltaire, vol. xv. Oxford: Voltaire Foundation.Google Scholar
von Humboldt, W.: see Humboldt, W. vonGoogle Scholar
von Lieven, A. 2007. (ed.). The Carlsberg Papyri 8. Grundriss des Laufes der Sterne: das sogenannte Nutbuch, 2 vols. Copenhagen: Museum Tusculanum Press.Google Scholar
von Lieven, A. 2010. Wie töricht war Horapollo? Die Ausdeutung von Schriftzeichen im Alten Ägypten. In Knuf, H. et al. (eds.), Honi soit qui mal y pense. Studien zum pharaonischen, griechisch-römischen und spätantiken Ägypten zu Ehren von Heinz-Josef Thissen (Orientalia Lovanensia Analecta 194), pp. 567–74. Leuven: Peeters.Google Scholar
Vossler, K. 1904. Positivismus und Idealismus in der Sprachwissenschaft: Eine sprach-philosophische Untersuchung. Heidelberg: Winter.Google Scholar
Vossler, K. 1923. Das Leben und die Sprache. In Vossler, K. (ed.), Gesammelte Aufsätze zur Sprachphilosophie, pp. 97104. Munich: Hueber Verlag.Google Scholar
Vossler, K. 1929. Frankreichs Kultur und Sprache. Heidelberg: Winter.Google Scholar
Vovin, A. 2005. A Descriptive and Comparative Grammar of Western Old Japanese. Part 1. Folkestone: Global Oriental.Google Scholar
Vovin, A. 2010. Is Japanese Katakana derived from Korean Kwukyel? In Fouser, R. J. (ed.), Contemporary Korean Linguistics: International Perspectives. In Honor of Professor Sang-Oak Lee, pp. 379–84. Paju: Thaehaksa.Google Scholar
Vygotsky, L. S. 1934/1962/1986. Myshlenie i rech’. Moscow and Leningrad: Sozekigiz. 1962: E. Hanfmann & G. Vakar (eds. and trans.), Thought and Language. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. 1986: A. Kozulin (rev. edn./trans.), Thought and Language. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Vygotsky, L. S. 1978. Mind in Society: The Development of Higher Psychological Processes. Cole, M. et al. (eds.). Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
Waismann, F. 1965. The Principles of Linguistic Philosophy. London: Macmillan.Google Scholar
Walde, A. & Pokorny, J. 1927. Vergleichendes Wörterbuch der indogermanischen Sprachen, vol. ii. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Walde, O. (ed.) 1916. Storhetstidens litterära krigsbyten: En kulturhistorisk- bibliografisk studie, 2 vols. Upsala: Almquist & Wiksell.Google Scholar
Wales, K. 1990/2001/2011. A Dictionary of Stylistics, 1st edn. London: Longman. 2001: 2nd edn. Harlow: Pearson Education. 2011: 3rd edn. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Walker, J. 1791. A Critical Pronouncing Dictionary and Expositor of the English Language. London: Robinson & Cadell.Google Scholar
Wallis, J. 1653. Grammatica linguae anglicanae, cui praefigitur de loquela sive sonorum formatione tractatus grammatico-physicus: et (nunc primum) subjungitur praxis grammatica. Oxford: Leon Lichfield.Google Scholar
Wang, W. S. Y. 1969. Competing changes as a cause of residue. Language 45: 925.Google Scholar
Wang, Y. [1798]1984. Jing zhuan shi ci. 1984: repr. Changsha: Yuelu shushe.Google Scholar
Warburton, W. 1738. The Divine Legation of Moses, vol. ii. London: printed for F. Gyles.Google Scholar
Ward, S. 1654/1970. Vindiciae Academiarum, containing, some briefe animadversions upon Mr Websters Book, stiled, The Examination of the Academies. 1970: repr. Debus, A. G. (ed.), Science and Education in the Seventeenth Century: The Webster–Ward Debate. London: Macdonald & Co.Google Scholar
Warren, D. W. 1976. Aerodynamics of speech production. In Lass, N. J. (ed.), Contemporary Issues in Experimental Phonetics, pp. 105–37. Orlando, FL: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Warren, D. W., Nelson, G. R., & Allen, G. 1980. Effects of increased vertical dimension on oral port size and fricative intelligibility. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 67: 1828–31.Google Scholar
Warren, R. M. 1970. Perceptual restoration of missing sounds. Science 167: 392–93.Google Scholar
Warrington, E. K. & Shallice, T. 1984. Category specific semantic impairments. Brain 107 : 829–53.Google Scholar
Watad, A. A. 1984. Mišnato ha-lĕšonit šel R. Ḥayyūŷ: Mi-bĕ‘ad lĕ-munaḥav bi-meqoram ha-‘aravi u-bĕ-targumam ha-‘ivri. MA thesis, Jerusalem: ha-Universit˙ah ha-‘Ivrit.Google Scholar
Watkins, C. 1976. Towards Proto-Indo-European syntax: Problems and pseudo-problems. In Stever, S. B. et al. (eds.), Papers from the Parasession on Diachronic Syntax, pp. 305–26. Chicago Linguistic Society.Google Scholar
Watkins, C. 1998. Proto-Indo-European: Comparison and reconstruction. In Giacalone-Ramat, & Ramat, (eds.), pp. 2573.Google Scholar
Watkins, C. 2011. The American Heritage Dictionary of Indo-European Roots, 3rd edn. Boston, MA: H. M. Harcourt.Google Scholar
Watson-Gegeo, K. & White, G. M. 1992. Disentangling: The Discourse of Interpersonal Conflict in Pacific Island Societies. Stanford University Press.Google Scholar
Waugh, L. R. 1976. Roman Jakobson’s Science of Language. Lisse: de Ridder.Google Scholar
Waugh, L. R. 1992. Constraints on iconicity in the lexicon. American Jrnl. of Semiotics 9: 748.Google Scholar
Waugh, L. R. 1995. Reported speech in journalistic discourse: The relation of function and text. Text 15: 129–73.Google Scholar
Waugh, L. R. 1998. Semiotics and language: The work of Roman Jakobson. In Kevelson, R. (ed.), Hi Fives: A Trip to Semiotics, pp. 85102. NY: Peter Lang.Google Scholar
Waugh, L. R., Catalano, , , T., Al Masaeed, K., & Hong Do, T. 2015. Critical discourse analysis: Definition, approaches, relation to pragmatics, critique and trends. In Capone, A. & Mey, J. (eds.), Interdisciplinary Studies in Pragmatics, Culture and Society, pp. 71135. Dordrecht: Springer Verlag.Google Scholar
Waugh, L. & M. Halle (eds.). 1984. Russian and Slavic Grammar: Studies, 1931–1981. Berlin: Mouton.Google Scholar
Waugh, L. R. & Monville-Burston, M. 1990/2002. Introduction: The life, work, and influence of Roman Jakobson. In Waugh, L. & Monville-Burston, M. (eds.), Roman Jakobson: On Language, pp. 145. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. 2002: in R. Jakobson. Selected Writings, vol. i, 3rd edn., pp. v–xcviii. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Weatherholtz, K., Campbell-Kibler, K., & Jaeger, T. F. 2014. Socially-mediated syntactic alignment. Language Variation and Change 26(3): 387–420.Google Scholar
Weber, A. (ed./trans.) 1858. Das Vājasaneyi-Prātis΄ākhyam. Indische Studien 4: 65171, 177–331.Google Scholar
Weber, M. [1921/1922]1968. Economy and Society: An Outline of Interpretive Sociology, 3 vols. NY: Bedminster Press. 1968: G. Roth & C. Wittich (eds.). Tübingen: Mohr Siebeck Verlag.Google Scholar
Webster, N. 1828/1864. An American Dictionary of the English Language, 2 vols. NY: S. Converse.Google Scholar
Wechter, P. 1964. Ibn Barūn’s Arabic Works on Hebrew Grammar and Lexicography. Philadelphia, PA: Dropsie College for Hebrew and Cognate Learning.Google Scholar
Wegener, P. 1885/1991 Untersuchungen über die Grundfragen des Sprachlebens. Halle: Max Niemeyer. 1991: E. F. K. Koerner (ed.), repr. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Weinreich, U. 1953. Languages in Contact: Findings and Problems. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Weinreich, U. 1960. Mid-century linguistics: Attainments and frustrations. Review of Hockett, C. F., A Course in Modern Linguistics. Romance Philology 13: 320–41.Google Scholar
Weinreich, U. 1962. Lexicographic definition in descriptive semantics. In Householder, F. W. & Saporta, S. (eds.), Problems in Lexicography, pp. 2543. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Research Center in Anthropology, Folklore and Linguistics.Google Scholar
Weinreich, U. 1966. Explorations in semantic theory. In Sebeok, T. A. (ed.), Theoretical Foundations (Current Trends in Linguistics 3), pp. 395477. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Weinreich, U. 1969. Problems in the analysis of idioms. In Puhvel, J. (ed.), Substance and Structure of Language, pp. 2381. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Weinreich, U., Labov, W., & Herzog, M. I. 1968. Empirical foundations for a theory of language change. In Lehmann, W. P. & Malkiel, Y. (eds.), Directions for Historical Linguistics, pp. 97195. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press.Google Scholar
Weisgerber, L. 1939. Die volkhaften Kräfte der Muttersprache. Frankfurt am Main: Diesterweg Verlag.Google Scholar
Weisgerber, L. 1950. Vom Weltbild der deutschen Sprache. Dusseldorf: Schwann Verlag.Google Scholar
Weisgerber, L. 1954. Von den Kräften der deutschen Sprache, vol. ii: Vom Weltbild der deutschen Sprache. Düsseldorf: Schwann Verlag.Google Scholar
Weiss, A. P. 1925. One set of postulates for a behavioristic psychology. Psychological Review 32: 83–7.Google Scholar
Weiss, B. G. 1966. Language in orthodox Muslim thought: A study of ‘wad al-lughah’ and its development. PhD dissertation, Princeton University.Google Scholar
Welker, H. A. & Humblé, P. 2006. Bibliografia (parcial) da lexicografia pedagógica. Cadernos de Tradução 2: 241–75.Google Scholar
Wells, R. S. 1947a/1958. Immediate constituents. Language 23: 81117. 1958: repr. in Joos (ed.), pp. 186–207.Google Scholar
Wells, R. S. 1947b/1957. De Saussure’s system of linguistics. Word 3: 13. 1957: repr. in Joos (ed.), pp. 1–18.Google Scholar
Wells, R. S. 1949. Automatic alternations. Language 25: 99116.Google Scholar
Wernicke, C. [1872]1974. The aphasic symptom complex: A psychological study on a neurological basis. Boston Studies in the Philosophy of Science 4 : 3497.Google Scholar
Wertsch, J. 1985. Vygotsky and the Social Formation of Mind. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Google Scholar
West, P. 1999. The extent of coarticulation of English liquids: An acoustic and articulatory study. Proceedings of the 14th International Congress of Phonetic Sciences, pp. 1901–4.Google Scholar
Westbury, J. R. 1991. The significance and measurement of head position during speech production experiments using the x-ray microbeam system. Jrnl. of the Acoustical Society of America 95: 2271–3.Google Scholar
Weydt, H. 1972. Unendlicher Gebrauch von endlichen Mitteln: Mißverständnisse um ein linguistisches Theorem. Poetica 5: 249–67.Google Scholar
Whalen, D. H. 1990. Coarticulation is largely planned. Jrnl. of Phonetics 18: 335.Google Scholar
Wheeler, G. 2013. Language Teaching through the Ages. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
White, L. 1989. Universal Grammar and Second Language Acquisition. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
White, L. 2003. Second Language Acquisition and Universal Grammar. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Whitney, W. D. (ed./trans.) 1862. The Atharva-Veda Prātis΄ākhya or Śāunakı̄yā Chaturādhyāyikā. Jrnl. of the American Oriental Society 7: 333615.Google Scholar
Whitney, W. D. 1867. Language and the Study of Language: Twelve Lectures on the Principles of Linguistic Science. NY: Charles Scribner & Co.Google Scholar
Whitney, W. D. (ed./trans.). 1868. The Taittirı̄ya-Prātis΄ākhya and Tribhāṣyaratna. New Haven, CT: Proceedings of the American Oriental Society.Google Scholar
Whitney, W. D. 1873–4. Oriental and Linguistic Studies, 2 vols. NY: Scribner, Armstrong & Co.Google Scholar
Whitney, W. D. 1875/1876. The Life and Growth of Language: An Outline of Linguistic Science. NY: D. Appleton & Co. 1876: A. Leskien (trans.), Leben und Wachstum der Sprache. Leipzig: F. A. Brockhaus.Google Scholar
Whitney, W. D. 1879/1889. Sanskrit Grammar, Including both the Classical Language, and the Older Dialects, of Veda and Brahmana. Leipzig: Breitkopf & Härtel. 1889: 2nd rev. and enlarg. edn. Leipzig: Breitkopf & Härtel.Google Scholar
Whorf, B. L. 1949. Four Articles on Metalinguistics. Repr. fr. Technology Review and fr. Language, Culture, and Personality. Washington, DC: Foreign Service Institute.Google Scholar
Whorf, B. L. 1956a. Carroll, J. B. (ed.), Language, Thought, and Reality: Selected Writings of Benjamin Lee Whorf. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.Google Scholar
Whorf, B. L. 1956b. The relation of habitual thought and behavior to language. In Whorf 1956a, pp. 134–59.Google Scholar
Widdowson, H. G. 1980. Models and fictions. Applied Linguistics 1: 165–70.Google Scholar
Widdowson, H. 1994. The ownership of English. TESOL Quarterly 28: 377–89.Google Scholar
Widdowson, H. 2000. On the limits of linguistics applied. Applied Linguistics 21: 325.Google Scholar
Widdowson, H. 2003. Expert beyond experience: Notes on the appropriate use of theory in practice. In Newby, D. (ed.), Mediating between Theory and Practice, pp. 2330. Graz: Council of Europe Publishing.Google Scholar
Widdowson, H. 2009. Remembrance of things past. In Candlin, C. (ed.), Selected Works of Henry Widdowson, pp. vii–xxxii. Beijing: Foreign Language Teaching & Research Press.Google Scholar
Wiegand, H. E. 1984. On the structure and contents of a general theory of lexicography. In Hartmann, (ed.), vol. i, pp. 1330.Google Scholar
Wiemer, B. & Bisang, W. 2004. What makes grammaticalization? An appraisal of its components and its fringes. In Bisang, et al. (eds.), pp. 321.Google Scholar
Wierzbicka, A. 1972. Semantic Primitives. Berlin: Athenäum Verlag.Google Scholar
Wierzbicka, A. 1977. Mental language and semantic primitives. Communication & Cognition 10: 155–79.Google Scholar
Wierzbicka, A. 1980. Lingua Mentalis: The Semantics of Natural Language. Sydney: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Wierzbicka, A. 1985. Lexicography and Conceptual Analysis. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma.Google Scholar
Wierzbicka, A. 1990. The semantics of color terms: Semantics, culture, and cognition. Cognitive Linguistics 1: 99150.Google Scholar
Wierzbicka, A. [1991]2003. Cross-Cultural Pragmatics: The Semantics of Human Interaction. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Wierzbicka, A. 1992a. Back to definitions: Cognition, semantics, and lexicography. Lexicographica 8: 146–74.Google Scholar
Wierzbicka, A. 1992b. Semantic primitives and semantic fields. In Lehrer, & Kittay, (eds.), pp. 209–27.Google Scholar
Wierzbicka, A. 1996. Semantics: Primes and Universals. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Wilbur, T. H. (ed.) 1977. The Lautgesetz Controversy: A Documentation (1885–86). Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Wilensky, M. 1964. Sefer ha-Riqmah, 2nd edn., 2 vols. Jerusalem: ha-Aḳademyah la-lashon ha-‘Ivrit.Google Scholar
Wilkins, J. [1641]1984. Mercury, or the Secret and Swift Messenger. Intro. essay by Asbach-Schnitker, B. (ed.). Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Wilkins, J. 1668/1968/2002. An Essay towards a Real Character and a Philosophical Language. London: Samuel Gellibrand & John Martyn. 1968: Menston: Scolar Press Facsimile. 2002: facs. repr. Bristol: Thoemmes.Google Scholar
Wilkins, Sr. C. 1808. A Grammar of the Sanskrı̆ta Language. London: Black, Parry, & Kingsbury.Google Scholar
William of Ockham. 1317–18/2010. Commentary on the Sentences of Peter Lombard. Bks I–IV. 2010: Brown, S. & Rosemann, P. (eds.), The Cambridge Companion to Ockham. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
William of Ockham. 2001/2009. Mediaeval Commentaries on the Sentences of Peter Lombard, vols. i–ii. 2001: vol. i, G. R. Evans (ed.). 2009: vol. ii, P. Rosemann (ed.). Leiden: E. J. Brill.Google Scholar
Williams, G. 1992. Sociolinguistics: A Sociological Critique. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Willibald. 1905. Vita Bonifatii. In Levison, W. (ed.), Monumenta Germaniae Historica: Scriptores Rerum Germanicarum, vol. 57. Hanover: Hahn Verlag.Google Scholar
Wilson, N.L. 1959. Substances without substrata. The Review of Metaphysics 12: 521–39.Google Scholar
Winchester, S. 1998. The Professor and the Madman: A Tale of Murder, Insanity, and the Making of the Oxford English Dictionary. NY: HarperCollins (pub. in UK as: The Surgeon of Crowthorne: A Tale of Murder, Madness and the Love of Words).Google Scholar
Windisch, E. 1917. Geschichte der Sanskrit-Philologie und der indischen Altertumskunde. Strassburg: K. J. Trübner.Google Scholar
Winteler, J. 1876/1972. Die Kerenzer Mundart des Kantons Glarus in ihren Grundzügen dargestellt. Leipzig: Winter. 1972: repr. Walluf bei Wiesbaden: Sändig (Reprint) Verlag.Google Scholar
Witherspoon, G. 1977. Language and Art in the Navajo Universe. Ann Arbor, MI: University of Michigan Press.Google Scholar
Wittgenstein, L. 1953/2001. Philosophical Investigations, 1st/3rd edns. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Wittgenstein, L. 1921/1961. Logisch-Philosophische Abhandlungen, Annalen der Naturphilosophie, vol. 14, pp. 185262. Leipzig: Reinhold Berger for Verlag Unesma. 1961: D. F. Pears & F. McGuinness (trans.), Tractatus Logico-Philosophicus, 2nd edn. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Wodak, R. (ed.). 1989. Language, Power, and Ideology: Studies in Political Discourse. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Wodak, R. 1996. Disorders of Discourse. London: Longman.Google Scholar
Wodak, R. & Benke, G. 1997. Gender as a sociolinguistic variable: New perspectives on variation studies. In Coulmas, (ed.), pp. 127–50.Google Scholar
Wodak, R. & Meyer, M. 2009. Critical discourse analysis: History, agenda, theory and methodology. In Wodak, R. & Meyer, M. (eds.), Methods of Critical Discourse Analysis, 2nd edn., pp. 133. London: Sage.Google Scholar
Wolfram, W. 1969. A Sociolinguistic Description of Detroit Negro Speech. Washington, DC: Center for Applied Linguistics.Google Scholar
Wolfram, W. & Fasold, R. 1974. The Study of Social Dialects in the United States. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.Google Scholar
Wood, M. 1993. Categorial Grammars. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Wood, S. A. J. 1992. A radiographic and model study of the tense vs. lax contrast in vowels. In Dressler, W. U. et al. (eds.), Phonologica 1988: Proceedings of the 6th International Phonology Meeting, pp. 283–91. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Woodard, R. D. 1997. Greek Writing from Knossos to Homer. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Woodard, R. D. 2014. The Textualization of the Greek Alphabet. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Woods, C. 2006. Bilingualism, scribal learning, and the death of Sumerian. In Sanders, S. (ed.), Margins of Writing, Origins of Cultures: Unofficial Writing in the Ancient Near East and Beyond (Oriental Institute Seminars 2), pp. 91120. University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Woolard, K. A. 1985. Language variation and cultural hegemony: Toward an integration of sociolinguistic and social theory. American Ethnologist 12: 738–48.Google Scholar
Woolard, K. A. & Schieffelin, B. B. 1994. Language ideology. Annual Review of Anthropology 23: 5582.Google Scholar
Worster, D. 2001. A River Running West: The Life of John Wesley Powell. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Wouters, A. & Swiggers, P. 2011. New Papyri and the history of ancient grammar: The επίρρημα chapter in P. Berol 9917. In Matthaios, S. et al. (eds.), Ancient Scholarship and Grammar: Archetypes, Concepts and Contexts, pp. 313–30. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Wray, A. 2002. Formulaic Language and the Lexicon. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Wray, A. 2012. What do we (think we) know about formulaic language? An evaluation of the current state of play. Annual Review of Applied Linguistics 32: 231–54.Google Scholar
Wright, E. O. (ed.). 2005. Approaches to Class Analysis. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Wright, J. (ed.) 1898–1905. The English Dialect Dictionary: Being the Complete Vocabulary of all Dialect Words still in Use, or Known to Have Been in Use during the Last Two Hundred Years. London: H. Frowde.Google Scholar
Wright, R. 1982. Late Latin and Early Romance. Liverpool: Francis Cairns.Google Scholar
Wright, R. 1996. The conceptual distinction between Latin and romance: Invention or evolution? In Wright, R. (ed.), Latin and Romance Languages in the Early Middle Ages, pp. 103–13. State College, PA: Pennsylvania State University Press.Google Scholar
Xu, S. 100 ce/1981. ShuŎ wén jiĕ zì. 1981: repr. Beijing: Zhonghua shuju.Google Scholar
Xúnzǐ 荀子. Third c. bce/1974. Xúnzǐ. Repr. as Xunzi xuan zhu. Shanghai renmin chubanshe.Google Scholar
Yājñvalkya. [c. 800–500 bce]1962. Yājñavalkya-Śikṣā, w. comm. Śikṣāvallı̄. Shastri, A. (ed.). Banaras: Dikshita Krishnachandra Sharma.Google Scholar
Yang, B. 1981. Gu hanyu xuci [Empty words in Ancient Chinese]. Beijing: Zhonghua shuju.Google Scholar
Yang, S. 1928. Ciquan [Word Lexicon]. Beijing: Shangwu yinshuguan.Google Scholar
Yang, X. 1st c./1951. Fang yan 方言. Repr. as Fang yan jiaojian ji tongjian by Zhou Zumo. Beijing: Kexue chubanshe.Google Scholar
Yāska. [c. 5th c. bce]1921–6. Nirukta, w. comm. of Durga (Anandashrama Sanskrit Series 12, no. 88). Pune: Anandashrama.Google Scholar
Yeivin, I. 1980. Introduction to the Tiberian Masorah. Revell, E. J. (ed./trans). Missoula, MT: Scholars Press.Google Scholar
Yuan, R. [1710]1989. Xuzi shuo. Repr. Beijing: Zhonghua shuju.Google Scholar
Zamenhof, L. L. 1905. Fundamento de Esperanto. Paris: Hachette.Google Scholar
Zentella, A. C. 1997. Growing up Bilingual: Puerto Rican Children in New York. Oxford: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar
Zeuß, J. K. 1853. Grammatica celtica. Berlin: Weidmann.Google Scholar
Zgusta, L. 1971. Manual of Lexicography. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Zhang, Q. 2005. A Chinese yuppie in Beijing: Phonological variation and the construction of a new professional identity. Language in Society 34: 431–66.Google Scholar
Zhou, D. 1324/1978. Zhong yuan yin yun. 1978: repr. as Zhong yuan yin yun jiaokan ji by Lu Zhiwei & Yang Naisi. Beijing: Zhonghua shuju.Google Scholar
Zhu, Z. 1269–97/1987. Menggu zi yun. 1987: repr. as Menggu zi yun jiaoben by Yang Naisi & Zhaona Tusi. Beijing: Minzu chubanshe.Google Scholar
Zimmer, H. 1879. Altindisches Leben. Berlin: Weidmann.Google Scholar
Zislin, M. J. 1990. Mĕ’Ŏr ‘ayin (Svetoch glaza) by Juda ben Jacob ben Juda. Moscow: Nauka.Google Scholar
Žolkovskij, A. & Mel’čuk, I. 1967. O semanticˇeskom sinteze. Problemy kibernetiki 19: 177238.Google Scholar
Zue, V. W. 1985. The use of speech knowledge in automatic speech recognition. Proceedings of the IEEE 73, pp. 1602–15.Google Scholar
Zumpt, K. G. 1818. Lateinische Grammatik. Berlin: F. Dümmler.Google Scholar
Zwaan, R. A. & Radvansky, G. A. 1998. Situation models in language comprehension and memory. Psychological Bulletin 123: 162–85.Google Scholar
Zwartjes, O. 1997. Love Songs from al-Andalus: History, Structure and Meaning of the kharja. Leiden: E. J. Brill.Google Scholar
Zwartjes, O. & Hovdhaugen, E. 2004. Missionary Linguistics/Lingüística misionera. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Save book to Kindle

To save this book to your Kindle, first ensure coreplatform@cambridge.org is added to your Approved Personal Document E-mail List under your Personal Document Settings on the Manage Your Content and Devices page of your Amazon account. Then enter the ‘name’ part of your Kindle email address below. Find out more about saving to your Kindle.

Note you can select to save to either the @free.kindle.com or @kindle.com variations. ‘@free.kindle.com’ emails are free but can only be saved to your device when it is connected to wi-fi. ‘@kindle.com’ emails can be delivered even when you are not connected to wi-fi, but note that service fees apply.

Find out more about the Kindle Personal Document Service.

Available formats
×

Save book to Dropbox

To save content items to your account, please confirm that you agree to abide by our usage policies. If this is the first time you use this feature, you will be asked to authorise Cambridge Core to connect with your account. Find out more about saving content to Dropbox.

Available formats
×

Save book to Google Drive

To save content items to your account, please confirm that you agree to abide by our usage policies. If this is the first time you use this feature, you will be asked to authorise Cambridge Core to connect with your account. Find out more about saving content to Google Drive.

Available formats
×